Rockwell Automation ArmorStart 280E, 281E, 284E motor controller User Manual
ArmorStart 280E, ArmorStart 281E, ArmorStart 284E motor controllers are designed for industrial applications. They offer a variety of features, such as overload protection, embedded switch technology, and EtherNet/IP™ communication. These controllers are rated for group motor installations and can be used to control a wide range of motors.
Advertisement
Advertisement
User Manual
ArmorStart
®
Distributed Motor Controller with EtherNet/IP™
Catalog Numbers 280E, 281E, 284E
Important User Information
Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this publication, those responsible for the application and use of this control equipment must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all performance and safety requirements, including any applicable laws, regulations, codes and standards.
The illustrations, charts, sample programs and layout examples shown in this guide are intended solely for purposes of example. Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation does not assume responsibility or liability (to include intellectual property liability) for actual use based upon the examples shown in this publication.
Solid-state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment.
Safety
Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (Publication SGI-1.1
available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/ ) describes some important differences between solid-state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because of this difference, and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid-state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable.
In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation,
Inc., is prohibited.
Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.
WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment, which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.
SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present.
IMPORTANT
BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures.
Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.
Trademark List
Allen-Bradley, ArmorConnect, ArmorStart, DeviceLogix, RSLogix 5000, RSNetWorx, StepLogic, RSLinx, On-Machine and ControlLogix are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
European Communities (EC) Directive Compliance
If this product has the CE mark it is approved for installation within the European Union and EEA regions. It has been designed and tested to meet the following directives.
Low Voltage and EMC Directives
This product is tested to meet Council Directive 2006/95/EC Low Voltage Directive and Council Directive
2004/108/EC Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) by applying the following standard(s):
•
Bulletin 280E/281E: EN 60947-4-1 — Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear — Part 4-1: Contactors and motorstarters — Electromechanical contactors and motor-starters.
•
Bulletin 284E: EN 61800-5-1 — Adjustable speed electronic power drive systems — Part 5-1: Safety requirements
— Electrical, thermal and energy.
•
Bulletin 284E: EN 61800-3 — Adjustable speed electronic power drive systems — Part 3: EMC product standard including specific test methods.
This product is intended for use in an industrial environment.
Product Overview
Table of Contents
European Communities (EC) Directive Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Low Voltage and EMC Directives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Chapter 1
E-mail Notification Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
EtherNet/IP LED Status Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Optional HOA Keypad Configuration (Bulletin 280E/281E only) 25
Optional HOA Selector Keypad with Jog Function
Source Brake Contactor and Connector (Bulletin 284E only) . . . . 26
EMI Filter (Bulletin 284E only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Dynamic Brake Connector (Bulletin 284E only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor (Bulletin 284E only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Output Contactor (Bulletin 284E only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Shielded Motor Cable (Bulletin 284E only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
5
Table of Contents
6
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
Precautions for Bulletin 280E/281E Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Precautions for Bulletin 284E Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Conduit Gland Entrance Bulletin 280E/281E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Conduit Gland Entrance Bulletin 284E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
ArmorConnect® Gland Connectivity Bulletin 280E/281E . . . . . . . 35
ArmorConnect Gland Connectivity Bulletin 284E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Power, Control, Safety Monitor Inputs, and Ground Wiring . . . . . 37
Recommended Cord Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
AC Supply Considerations for Bulletin 284E Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Ungrounded and High Resistive Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Group Motor Installations for USA and Canada Markets . . . . . . . . 45
Wiring and Workmanship Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Other System Design Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
General Notes (Bulletin 284E only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Grounding Safety Grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Grounding PE or Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Table of Contents
Introduction to EtherNet/IP and
Device Level Ring Technology
Chapter 4
Product Commissioning
Branch Circuit Protection Requirements for ArmorConnect
Three-Phase Power Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Chapter 3
Manually Configure the Network Address Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Use the Rockwell Automation BootP/DHCP Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Using the Rockwell Automation Embedded
E-mail Notification Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Chapter 5
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
7
Table of Contents
8
Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix
5000
Connect and Configure ArmorStart with Add-On-Profile (AOP) . . . . 82
Chapter 6
Optional HOA Keypad Operation
Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E
Programmable Parameters
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Parameter Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Produced Assembly Config Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
User I/O Configuration Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Miscellaneous Configuration Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Starter Display Group (Bulletin 280E/281E only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Starter Setup Group (Bulletin 280E/281E only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Produced Assembly Config Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
User I/O Configuration Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Miscellaneous Configuration Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Drive I/O Configuration Group (Bulletin 284E only) . . . . . . . . . . 152
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
How to Configure an Explicit
Message
Diagnostics
Table of Contents
Drive Display Group (Bulletin 284E only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Drive Setup Group (Bulletin 284E only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Drive Advanced Setup Group (Bulletin 284E only). . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Clear a Type 1 Fault and Restart the Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
How StepLogic Works. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Chapter 8
Programming ControlLogix® Explicit Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Explicit Messaging with ControlLogix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Setting Up the MSG Instruction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Chapter 9
Protection Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Internal Communication Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
9
Table of Contents
Troubleshooting
Specifications for EtherNet/IP
10
EtherNet/IP LED Status Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Chapter 10
Bulletin 280E/281E Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Operation and Troubleshooting of the DB1 - Dynamic Brake . . . 225
DB1 Resistor Overtemperature Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
DB1 Undercurrent Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
DB1 Thermal Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Installation of Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Troubleshoot and General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks. . . 235
Specific Issues on Your DLR or Linear Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Chapter 11
Motor Overload Trip Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Contactor Life Load Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Sensorless Vector Control (SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Motor Overload Trip Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Chapter 12
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Table of Contents
Accessories
Applying More Than One
ArmorStart
Motor Controller in a Single
Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
CIP Information
D Code Connectivity (M12) – 1585D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Sensorless Vector Control (SVC) Minimum Resistance and
Recommended Modules for Option DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Bulletin 284E Option (-DB) – IP20 Resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Sensorless Vector Control (SVC) Recommended Dynamic Brake
Modules for Option DB1 (IP67 Resistor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Appendix A
ArmorStart LT Product Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Multiple-Motor Branch Circuits and Motor Controllers Listed for Group
Maximum Fuse Ampere Rating According to 7.2.10.4(1) and 7.2.10.4(2)
Input and Output Conductors of Bulletin 290E and 291E Controllers (a)
Input and Output Conductors of Bulletin 294E Controllers (b) . . . . 275
Combined Load Conductors (c). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Appendix B
Product Codes and Name Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
CIP Explicit Connection Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
CLASS CODE 0x0001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
CLASS CODE 0x0004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
CLASS CODE 0x0006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
11
Table of Contents
Using DeviceLogix
12
Exclusive Owner Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
CLASS CODE 0x0008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
CLASS CODE 0x0009 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
CLASS CODE 0x000F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
CLASS CODE 0x0010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
CLASS CODE 0x001D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
CLASS CODE 0x001E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
CLASS CODE 0x0029 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
CLASS CODE 0x002C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Device Level Ring (DLR) Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
CLASS CODE 0x0047 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
CLASS CODE 0x0048 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
CLASS CODE 0x0097 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
CLASS CODE 0x0098 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
CLASS CODE 0x00B4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
CLASS CODE 0x00F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
CLASS CODE 0x00F6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Appendix C
DeviceLogix Programming Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Bulletin 284 - VFD Preset Speed Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
DeviceLogix Ladder Editor Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
ArmorStart 280 and 281 Status Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Bulletin 280 and 281 ArmorStart Fault Bits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Bulletin 280 and 281 ArmorStart Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Table of Contents
Bulletin 280 and 281 ArmorStart Produced Network Bits . . . . . . 322
Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Status Bits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Fault Bits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Produced Network Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Appendix D
PID Setup
StepLogic, Basic Logic and Timer/
Counter Functions
StepLogic Using Basic Logic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Appendix F
Renewal Parts
PID Reference and Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Guidelines for Adjusting the PID Gains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Appendix E
Control Module Renewal Part Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Base Module Renewal Part Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Control Module Renewal Part Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Base Module Renewal Part Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
13
Table of Contents
14
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Chapter
1
Product Overview
Bulletin
Type
0.5…10 Hp (0.37…7.5 kW)
0.5…5 Hp (0.4…3.0 kW)
Full-Voltage and Reversing
Sensorless Vector Control
IP67/NEMA Type 4
24V DC
200…480V AC
380…480V AC
Rated for Group Motor Installations
Local logic using DeviceLogix™
I/O Capability:
Four Inputs
Two Outputs
EtherNet/IP™
LED Status Indication
Conduit Entrance
ArmorConnect Power Media
Quick Disconnects (I/O, Communications, Motor
Connection, Three-Phase and Control Power
Extended Length Motor and Brake Cables
HOA Keypad
Source Brake Contactor
Dynamic Brake Connector
Output Contactor
EMI Filter
Shielded Motor Cable
280E/281E
Horsepower Range:
✓
—
Starting Method:
✓
—
Environmental Rating:
✓
Control Voltage:
✓
Operational Voltage Ratings:
✓
—
✓
✓
✓
✓
Network Communications:
✓
✓
Gland Plate Entry:
✓
✓
✓
✓
Factory Installed Options:
✓
—
—
—
—
—
EtherNet/IP™
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
284E
—
✓
—
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
—
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
15
Chapter 1 Product Overview
Introduction
Description
16
This chapter provides a brief overview of the features and functionality of the
ArmorStart
®
EtherNet/Industrial Protocol (IP) Distributed Motor Controllers,
Bulletin 280E, 281E, and 284E.
The ArmorStart EtherNet/IP™ Distributed Motor Controllers are integrated, pre-engineered, motor starting solutions. Bulletins 280E and 281E are used for full-voltage and reversing applications, respectively. Bulletin 284E is used in variable frequency applications where more precise motor control is needed. The
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP controller offers a robust IP67/UL Type 4/12 enclosure design, which is suitable for water wash down environments.
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP includes an embedded dual port switch that supports device level ring (DLR) applications. It supports IEEE 1588 end-to-end transparent clock. This allows synchronization within a distributed network of devices. Transparent clocks in combination with enhanced or managed Ethernet switches are able to adjust for network introduced timing delays and improve the performance of motion applications.
The ArmorStart EtherNet/IP network address can be configured dynamically or statically via the embedded Web Server. In addition, the controller’s IP address can be manually set via three IP address switches found on the I/O section of the device.
The controller’s embedded Web Server allows the user to check status, diagnostics and perform simple device configuration using a standard web browser. It also supports SMTP protocol which allows the user to configure the device to send an alert e-mail of potential issues.
The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller is a modular “plug and play” design that offers simplicity in wiring and installation. The quick disconnects for the I/O, communications, and motor connections reduce the wiring time and eliminate wiring errors. The controller offers, as standard, four configurable
(sink/source) DC inputs and two sourcing solid state outputs, to be used with sensors and actuators respectively, for monitoring and controlling the application process. The ArmorStart’s light-emitting diode (LED) status indication and built-in diagnostics capabilities allow ease of maintenance and troubleshooting.
The optional Hand/Off/Auto (HOA) keypad configuration allows local start/ stop control.
An Add-on profile for ControlLogix® is available. Add-on profiles streamline the programming and installation by eliminating the task of individually configuring the device tags.
The copy and paste function allows easy configuration of multiple ArmorStarts
Controllers. RSLogix™ 5000 revision 17.01 or later is required to implement addon profile support.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Product Overview Chapter 1
The Armorstart controller and associated motor cable have been evaluated as a system by UL and is suitable for group installation. Armorstart controllers contain a UL listed disconnect which in many applications eliminates the need for additional components.
Catalog Number Explanation
Examples given in this section are for reference purposes. This basic explanation should not be used for product selection because not all combinations will produce a valid catalog number.
Figure 1 - Catalog Number Explanation for 280E/281E
Code
280
281
Code
E
Code
F
280
a a
Bulletin Number
Description
Full Voltage Starter
Reversing Starter
b
E
b
– F
c
Code
10
25
12Z – 10
d e
C – CR – Option 1
f g h e
Short Circuit Protection
(Motor Circuit Protection)
Description
10 A Rated Device
25 A Rated Device
h
Option 1
Code
3
3FR
Hand/Off/Auto Selector Keypad
Hand/Off/Auto Selector Keypad with
Forward/Reverse
Description
EtherNet/IP
c
Enclosure Type
Description
IP67/ UL Type 4/12
f
Code
Overload Selection Current Range
Description
A
B
C
0.24…1.2 A
0.5…2.5 A
1.1…5.5 A
D 3.2…16 A
d
Contactor Size/Control Voltage
24V DC
12Z
23Z CR
CR
RR
RR
Code blank
W* blank
W*
g
Control and 3-Phase Power Connections/Motor Cable Connection
(CR: Conduit/Round Media) or (RR: Round/Round Media)
Control Power
Description
3-Phase Power
Conduit Entrance Conduit Entrance
Motor Cable
3 m, unshielded cordset male 90°
Conduit Entrance
Round Media (Male
Receptacle)
Round Media (Male
Receptacle)
Conduit Entrance
Round Media (Male
Receptacle)
Round Media (Male
Receptacle)
No cable
3 m, unshielded cordset male 90°
No cable
* Refer to the Industrial Controls Catalog for extended motor cable lengths.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
17
Chapter 1 Product Overview
Figure 2 - Catalog Number Explanation for 284E
284 E – F V D2P3 D – 10 – CR – Option 1 – Option 2 – Option 3
a b c d e f g h i j k
Code
284
a
Bulletin Number
Description
VFD Starter
d
Torque Performance Mode
Code Description
V
Sensorless Vector Control and Volts per Hertz
Code
Z
f
Control Voltage
Description
24V DC
Code
3
i
Option 1
Description
Hand/Off/Auto Selector
Keypad with Jog Function
Code
E
b
Communications
Description
EtherNet/IP
Code
F
c
Enclosure Type
Description
Type 4 (IP67)
Code
D1P4
D2P3
D4P0
D6P0
D7P6
e
Output Current
380…480V
Description
1.4 A, 0.4 kW, 0.5 Hp
2.3 A, 0.75 kW, 1.0 Hp
4.0 A, 1.5 kW, 2.0 Hp
6.0 A, 2.2 kW, 3.0 Hp
7.6 A, 3.3 kW, 5.0 Hp
g
Short Circuit Protection (Motor
Circuit Protector)
Code Description
10
25
10 A Rated Device
25 A Rated Device
j
Code
Option 2
Description
DB blank DB Brake Connector
DB1
SB
SB blank blank
W
Connectivity to IP67
DB Resistor
Source Brake
Contactor
No cable
Code
EMI
OC
k
Option 3
Description
EMI Filter
Output Contactor
h
Control and 3-Phase Power Connections / Motor Cable Connection
(CR: Conduit/Round Media) or (RR: Round/Round Media)
Code
Control Power
Description
3-Phase Power
CR blank Conduit Entrance Conduit Entrance
Motor Cable
3 m, unshielded cordset male 90°
CR
CR
RR
RR
RR
N
W blank
N
W
Conduit Entrance
Round Media
(Male Receptacle)
Round Media
(Male Receptacle)
Round Media
(Male Receptacle)
Conduit Entrance
Conduit Entrance Conduit Entrance
Round Media
(Male Receptacle)
Round Media
(Male Receptacle)
Round Media
(Male Receptacle)
3 m, shielded cordset male 90°
No cable
3 m, unshielded cordset male 90°
3 m, shielded cordset male 90°
No cable
Operation
The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers can operate three-phase squirrelcage induction motors as follows:
Bulletin 280E/281E: up to 10 Hp (7.4 kW) at 480V AC
Bulletin 284E: up to 5 Hp (3.0 kW) at 480V AC
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP Controllers accept 24V DC control voltage. The control voltage will provide power to inputs (unswitched) and outputs
(switched). Unswitched control voltage is used to ensure no loss of sensor or other field input status under normal operation.
18
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Mode of Operation
Product Overview Chapter 1
Bulletin 280E/281E
Full-Voltage Start
This method is used in applications requiring across-the-line starting, in which full inrush current and locked-rotor torque are realized. The ArmorStart Bulletin
280E offers full-voltage starting and the Bulletin 281E offers full-voltage starting for reversing applications.
Figure 3 - Full-Voltage Start
100%
Percent
Voltage
Time (seconds)
Bulletin 284E
Sensorless Vector Control
Sensorless vector control provides exceptional speed regulation and very high levels of torque across the entire speed range of the drive. Features include:
• Autotune feature allows the Motor Controller to adapt to individual motor characteristics.
• Able to develop high torque over a wide speed range and adapts to individual motor characteristics.
• Embedded Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) control includes the Timer,
Counter, Basic Logic and StepLogic® functions which can reduce hardware design costs and simplify control schemes.
• Integral PID (proportional, integral, differential) functionality enhances application flexibility.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
19
Chapter 1 Product Overview
Figure 4 - Sensorless Vector Control
Description of Features
Embedded Switch
Technology
20
Overload Protection
The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller incorporates, as standard, electronic motor overload protection. This overload protection is accomplished electronically with an
I
2 t algorithm. The ArmorStart’s overload protection is programmable via the communication network, providing the user with flexibility.
The Bulletin 280E/281E overload trip class can be selected for class 10, 15, 20 protection. The Bulletin 284E overload trip class is Class 10 only. Ambient insensitivity is inherent in the electronic design of the overload (refer to
Chapter 11 for the specification for overload trip curves).
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP includes embedded switch technology as standard.
Each ArmorStart EtherNet/IP will consume one Common Industrial Protocol
(CIP) connection. The ArmoStart will consume a Class 3 connection when
RSLogix 5000 software displays the AOP.
In general, for a DLR or linear network keep individual segments to 50 nodes or less. In addition, it is important to reserve a minimum of 10% of available bandwidth to allow for processing of explicit messages.
Common features are:
• Designed according to the ODVA specification for EtherNet/IP.
ODVA specification found at http://www.odva.org/
• Embedded switch technology is designed to enable end devices to form linear and ring network topologies
• Supports Device Level Ring (DLR) protocol
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Product Overview Chapter 1
• Supports IEEE 1588 transparent clock for CIP Motion™ and CIP Sync™ applications
• Supports the management of network traffic to ensure timely delivery of critical data, that is, QoS and IGMP protocols are supported
Note:
DLR ports cannot be used as two network interface cards (NICs) connected to two different subnets.
Switched vs. Unswitched
Control Power Input/Output
(I/O) Connections
The voltage at terminals A1/A2 supplies power to the Armorstart outputs.
Removing this power or placing the Armorstart disconnect in the “OFF” position will disable the outputs.
The unswitched power A3/A2 supplies power to the input and communication module. This power is not affected by the state of the disconnect switch. This ensures that anytime the controller can communicate, the state of the inputs is correct.
Figure 5 - Input and Output Configuration
EtherNet/IP™ Ports
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP includes a dual port Ethernet switch that supports
10/100 Mbps It utilizes a sealed D-coded micro (M12) style Ethernet connector.
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is enabled as the factory default. Before using your adapter in an EtherNet/IP network you may need to configure an IP address or set the address statically.
ATTENTION: To avoid unintended operation, the adapter must be assigned a fixed IP address. If a DHCP server is used, it must be configured to assign a fixed IP address for your adapter.
Failure to observe this precaution may result in unintended machine motion or loss of process control.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
21
Chapter 1 Product Overview
Embedded Web Server
The embedded web server allows the user to view information and configure the
ArmorStart via a web browser. The default Login is “Administrator”. There is no
password set by default.
IMPORTANT
Caution: The user should set the password to a unique value for authorized personnel. If the Login and password are lost you will need to reset the device to factory defaults via the Programmable Logic Controller (PLC). Note: The configuration will be lost.
E-mail Notification Configuration
The embedded web server supports configuration of the Simple Mail Transfer
Protocol (SMTP). Once properly configured, the motor controller will e-mail the user with specific fault/trip messages.
EtherNet/IP LED Status
Indication
Figure 6 - EtherNet/IP LED
EtherNet/IP LED status and diagnostics consists of four LEDs.
• Link Activity/Status LEDS
– Ethernet Link1 Activity/Status (Port 1) – LED Color: Bicolor
(Green/Yellow)
– Ethernet Link2 Activity/Status (Port 2) – LED Color: Bicolor
(Green/Yellow)
• “MOD” LED – Bicolor Red/Green represents the Ethernet Module status
• “NET” LED – Bicolor Red/Green represents the Ethernet Network status
Control Module LED Status and Reset
Figure 7 - LED Status
Indication and Reset
The Control Module LED status and diagnostics consists of four status LEDs and a Reset button.
• POWER LED
The LED is illuminated solid green when switched (+A1/A2) control power is present and with the proper polarity.
22
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Product Overview Chapter 1
• RUN LED
This LED is illuminated solid green when a start command and control power are present.
• NETWORK LED
This bicolor (red/green) LED indicates the status of the internal communication link.
• FAULT LED
This indicates a Controller Fault (trip) condition.
The “Reset Button” is a local trip reset.
Electronic Data Sheet (EDS)
EtherNet/IP devices have electronic data sheets (EDS). These are specially formatted text files, as defined by the CIP™ Specifications, which represent the object model of the device. EDS files contain details about the readable and configurable parameters of the EtherNet/IP device. They also provide information about the I/O connections the device supports and the content of the associated data structures. EDS are used by EtherNet/IP device configuration tools, such as RSNetWorx™ for EtherNet/IP, and data servers such as RSLinx® Classic.
EDS files for all ArmorStart EtherNet/IP devices can also be uploaded directly from the device via the web server interface. Rockwell Automation product EDS files are also available on the internet at: http://www.ab.com/networks/eds.
Fault Diagnostics
Fault diagnostics capabilities built in the ArmorStart Distributed Motor
Controller are designed to help you pinpoint a problem for easy troubleshooting and quick re-starting.
Protection Faults
Protection Faults are generated when potentially dangerous or damaging conditions are detected. Protection Faults are also known as “Trips.”
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
23
Chapter 1 Product Overview
Standard Features
Table 1 - Protection Faults
Bulletin 280E/281E Trip Status
Short Circuit
Overload
Phase Loss
Reserved
Reserved
Control Pwr Loss
Input Fault
Over Temperature
Phase Imbalance
A3, Unswitched Power Loss
Reserved
Reserved
EEprom
Hdw Flt
Reserved
Reserved
Bulletin 284E Trip Status
Short Circuit
Overload
Phase Short
Ground Fault
Stall
Control Pwr Loss
Input Fault
Over Temperature
Over Current
A3, Unswitched Power Loss
Internal Comm
DC Bus Fault
EEprom
Hdw Flt
Restart Retries
Misc. Fault
PowerFlex 40 Fault Codes
—
(Drive Codes 7 and 64)
(Drive Codes 38…43)
(Drive Code 13)
(Drive Code 6)
—
—
—
(Drive Codes 12 and 63)
—
(Drive Code 81)
(Drive Codes 3, 4 and 5)
(Drive Code 100)
(Drive Codes 70 and 122)
(Drive Code 33)
(Drive Codes 2, 8, 29, 48 and 80)
Parameter Group “Start Protection,” Parameter 24 “PrFault Enable” is used to enable and disable the above protection faults. Refer to Parameter 61
“LastPR Fault” for additional details of the last protection fault.
Inputs
The EtherNet/IP version includes four 24V DC inputs that are single keyed (two inputs per connector) sourced from A3/A2 control power. The inputs use two
M12 Connectors. Each input has an LED status indication. They are configurable as sinking or sourcing.
Outputs
The EtherNet/IP version includes two self-protected solid state outputs that are single keyed (one per connector), sourced from A1/A2 control power. Outputs are sourcing type with a maximum current per output point of 0.5 A DC. The outputs use one M12 connectors per output, each having LED status indication.
24
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Product Overview Chapter 1
Gland Plate Entrance
The ArmorStart product offers two different methods of connecting incoming three-phase and control power to the device. One method offered is the traditional conduit entrance with a 3/4 in. and a 1 in. conduit hole opening. The second method offers connectivity to the ArmorConnect® power media. Factoryinstalled receptacles are provided for connectivity to both three-phase and control power media.
Motor Cable
With every ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller, a 3-meter unshielded
4-conductor cordset is provided with each unit as standard. If the optional
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Filter is selected for Bulletin 284E units, a shielded 4-conductor cordset is provided with each unit as standard.
DeviceLogix™
DeviceLogix is a stand-alone Boolean program that resides within the
ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller. DeviceLogix is programmed locally using the Add-On Profile and implements Boolean math operations, such as,
AND, OR, NOT, Timers, Counters, and Latches. DeviceLogix can run as a stand-alone application, independent of the network. However, 24V DC via A3 unswitched control power, must be maintained.
Factory-Installed Options
Optional HOA Keypad Configuration (Bulletin 280E/281E only)
The ArmorStart offers two optional factory-installed Hand/Off/Auto (HOA) configurations: Standard and Forward/Reverse HOA.
Figure 8 - Optional HOA Configuration (Bulletin 280E left, 281E right)
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
25
Chapter 1 Product Overview
Optional HOA Selector Keypad with Jog Function
(Bulletin 284E only)
The HOA Selector Keypad with Jog Function allows for local start/stop control with capabilities to jog in forward/reverse motor directions.
Figure 9 - Optional HOA with Jog Function Configuration
26
Source Brake Contactor and Connector (Bulletin 284E only)
An internal contactor is used to switch the electromechanical motor brake On/
Off. The motor brake contactor is powered from the main power circuit. The configuration of the R1 relay controls the function of the brake. A customer accessible 2.5 A fuse is provided to protect the brake cable. Included is a 3-meter
3-pin cordset for connection to the motor brake as standard.
EMI Filter (Bulletin 284E only)
The EMI filter is required to be CE compliant. When selected, a 3-meter shielded 4-conductor motor cordset is provided as standard. This is only available with sensorless vector control.
Dynamic Brake Connector (Bulletin 284E only)
The user selectable DB Option includes a 3-meter, 3-pin cordset for connection to a IP20 dynamic brake module. See
Chapter 11 for available dynamic brake
modules.
Note:
The IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor cannot be used with the -DB factory-installed option.
IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor (Bulletin 284E only)
The IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor design offers simplicity in wiring and installation. The user selectable DB1 option provides the quick connector and an
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Product Overview Chapter 1 internal resistor monitoring circuit board. The cable length available is 0.5 m and
1.0 m. The IP67 Dynamic Brake is separately ordered. See Chapter 11
for available IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistors.
Note:
The IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor is used only with the -DB1 factory-installed option. Only the specified IP67 Dynamic Brake resistor can be used based on the VFD horsepower. Connecting resistors other than those specified will result in a DB1 fault.
Output Contactor (Bulletin 284E only)
An internal contactor is sourced from the 24V DC (A1/A2) control voltage to isolate the load side of the Bulletin 284E ArmorStart Distributed Motor
Controller. When control power is applied to A1/A2, the output contactor will close. When control power is removed, the output contactor will open. There is no other switching element that allows alternate control of the output contactor.
A sequenced stop involving the output contactor cannot be performed.
Shielded Motor Cable (Bulletin 284E only)
If the EMI Filter is selected, a 3-meter shielded 4-conductor cordset is provided as standard.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
27
Chapter 1 Product Overview
ArmorStart
®
EtherNet/
IP Features
Local Disconnect
IP Address Notation Area
2 Outputs (Micro/M12)
4 Inputs (Micro/M12)
IP Address Switches
Ethernet Ports (DLR)
Figure 10 - Bulletin 280E/281E ArmorStart with EtherNet/IP™
Communication Protocol
LED Status
Indication and Reset
Control Module
Hand-Off-Auto Keypad
Motor Connection
Local Disconnect
IP Address Notation Area
2 Outputs (Micro/M12)
4 Inputs (Micro/M12)
IP Address Switches
Ethernet Ports (DLR)
Figure 11 - Bulletin 284E ArmorStart with EtherNet/IP Communication Protocol
LED Status
Indication and Reset
Control Module
Hand-Off-Auto Keypad
Source Brake Connection
Motor Connection
28
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Notes:
Product Overview Chapter 1
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
29
Chapter 1 Product Overview
30
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Receiving
Unpacking
Inspecting
Storing
Chapter
2
Installation and Wiring
It is the responsibility of the user to thoroughly inspect the equipment before accepting the shipment from the freight company. Check the item(s) received against the purchase order. If any items are damaged, it is the responsibility of the user not to accept delivery until the freight agent has noted the damage on the freight bill. Should any concealed damage be found during unpacking, it is again the responsibility of the user to notify the freight agent. The shipping container must be left intact and the freight agent should be requested to make a visual inspection of the equipment.
Remove all packing material, wedges, or braces from within and around the
Armorstart distributed motor controller. Remove all packing material from the device(s). Check the contents of the package. Contact your local Allen-Bradley representative if any items are missing.
IMPORTANT
Before the installation and start-up of the drive, a general inspection of mechanical integrity (i.e. loose parts, wires, connections, packing materials, etc.) must be made.
After unpacking, check the item(s) nameplate catalog number(s) against the purchase order. See Chapter 1 for an explanation of the catalog numbering system which will aid in nameplate interpretation.
The controller should remain in its shipping container prior to installation. If the equipment is not to be used for a period of time, it must be stored according to the following instructions in order to maintain warranty coverage.
• Store in a clean, dry location.
• Store within an ambient temperature range of –25°C…+85°C
(–13°F…+185°F).
• Store within a relative humidity range of 0…95%, noncondensing.
• Do not store equipment where it could be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere.
• Do not store equipment in a construction area.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
31
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
General Precautions
Precautions for Bulletin
280E/281E Applications
Precautions for Bulletin 284E
Applications
In addition to the precautions listed throughout this manual, the following statements, which are general to the system, must be read and understood.
ATTENTION: The controller contains ESD (electrostatic discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies. Static control precautions are required when installing, testing, servicing, or repairing the assembly. Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed. If you are not familiar with static control procedures, refer to Publication 8000-4.5.2
, Guarding against
Electrostatic Discharge, or any other applicable ESD protection handbooks.
ATTENTION: An incorrectly applied or installed controller can damage components or reduce product life. Wiring or application errors, such as undersizing the motor, incorrect or inadequate AC supply, or excessive ambient temperatures, may result in malfunction of the system.
ATTENTION: Only personnel familiar with the controller and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation, startup, and subsequent maintenance of the system. Failure to do this may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage.
ATTENTION: To prevent electrical shock, open the disconnect switch prior to connecting and disconnecting cables. Risk of shock – environment rating may not be maintained with open receptacles.
WARNING: The drive contains high voltage capacitors which take time to discharge after removal of mains supply. Before working on a drive, ensure isolation of mains supply from line inputs (R, S, T [L1, L2, L3]). Wait three minutes for capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or death. Darkened display LEDs are not an indication that capacitors have discharged to safe voltage levels. Risk of shock – environment rating may not be maintained with open receptacles.
ATTENTION: Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation, startup, and subsequent maintenance of the system. Failure to do this may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage.
32
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Dimensions
[
290
11.42
[
]
351
13.82
]
Installation and Wiring Chapter 2
Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. All dimensions are subject to change.
Conduit Gland Entrance Bulletin 280E/281E
Figure 12 - Dimensions for Bulletin 280E/281E
189
[ ]
[
268
10.55
]
[
287,5
11.32
]
6,8
[ ]
150
[ ]
MOT OR CONNECTION 185 [7.3] M22 CORDSET
MOTOR CONN ECTION 243 [9.57] M35 CORDSET
[
373
14.69
]
[
3,02
.12
]
[
11
.43
]
[
195
7.68
]
67,9
[ ]
39
[ ] [
47
1.85
]
1 in. CONDUIT OPENING
0.75 in. CONDUIT OPENING
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
33
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
2HP or less 420.38 [16.55]
3HP or greater 444.38 [17.50]
[
290
11.42
]
Conduit Gland Entrance Bulletin 284E
Figure 13 - Dimensions for Bulletin 284E
236
[ ]
[
268
10.55
]
[
287,5
11.32
]
6,8
[ ]
MOTO R CONNECTION 266.9 [10.51]
[
373
14.69
]
3,02
[ ]
11
[ ]
[
195
7.68
]
67,9
[ ]
39
[ ] [
47
1.85
]
1 in. CONDUIT OPENING
0.75 in. CONDUIT OPENING
34
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
203.2
[8]
CABLE
KEEP OUT
6,8
[ ]
Installation and Wiring Chapter 2
3 Hp and less @ 480V AC
[
351
13.82
]
[
290
11.42
]
ArmorConnect
®
Gland Connectivity Bulletin 280E/281E
Figure 14 - Dimensions for Bulletin 280E/281E
10 Hp @ 480V AC
[
351
13.82
]
[
290
11.42
]
[
268
10.55
]
[
287,5
11.32
]
[
268
10.55
]
[
287,5
11.32
]
203.2
[8]
CABLE
KEEP OUT
6,8
[ ]
10 A Short Circuit
Protection (M22)
25 A Short Circuit
Protection (M35)
77,6
[ ]
60,6
[ ]
25,5
[ ]
[
68
]
77,6
[ ]
60,6
[ ]
25,5
[ ] [
68
2.68
]
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
35
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
2 Hp or less at 480V
[
290
11.42
]
[
419,53
16.52
]
ArmorConnect Gland Connectivity Bulletin 284E
Figure 15 - Dimensions for Bulletin 284E
3 Hp or greater at 480V
[
290
11.42
]
[
444,38
17.50
]
30,4
1[]
[
268
10.55
]
[
287,5
11.32
]
[
268
10.55
]
[
287,5
11.32
]
6,8
[ ]
10 A Short Circuit
Protection (M22)
6,8
[ ]
25 A Short Circuit
Protection (M35)
77,6
3[]
60,6
2[]
25,5
1[] [
68
2.68
]
77,6
3[]
60,6
2[]
25,5
1[] [
68
2.68
]
36
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Mount Orientation
Installation and Wiring Chapter 2
The recommended mounting orientation of ArmorStart EtherNet/IP is the vertical configuration. This is especially important for the Bulletin 284. This ensures proper air flow over the heat sink. Improper mounting or debris build up will reduce air flow and increased internal temperatures. This may reduce the overall life of the product. For alternate mounting contact your local sales representative.
Operation
Wiring
IMPORTANT
For proper heat dissipation and product operation, mount in the vertical orientation as shown.
The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers can operate three-phase squirrel-cage induction motors as follows:
Bulletin 280E/281E: 0.24…16 A; 200V AC, 230V AC, 460V AC; 50/60 Hz.
Bulletin 284E: up to 5 Hp (3.0 kW) @ 480V AC
The ArmorStart EtherNet/IP Distributed Motor Controller will accept a control power input of 24V DC.
Power, Control, Safety Monitor Inputs, and Ground Wiring
Table 2 provides the power, control, and ground wire capacity and the tightening
torque requirements. The power, control, ground, and safety monitor terminals will accept a maximum of two wires per terminal.
Table 2 - Power, Control, Safety Monitor Inputs, Ground Wire Size, and Torque Specifications
Terminals Wire Size Wire Strip Length
Power and
Ground
Control Inputs
Primary/Secondary
Terminal:
1.5…4.0 mm
2
(#16 …#10 American Wire
Gage (AWG))
1.0 mm
2
…4.0 mm
(#18…#10 AWG)
2
Torque
Primary Terminal:
10.8 lb-in.
(1.2 N•m)
Secondary Terminal:
4.5 lb-in.
(0.5 N•m)
6.2 lb-in.
(0.7 N•m)
0.35 in. (9 mm)
0.35 in. (9 mm)
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
37
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
Terminal Designations
As shown in Figure 16, the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller contains
terminals for power, control, and ground wiring. Access can be gained by removing the terminal access cover plate.
Figure 16 - ArmorStart Power and Control Terminal Connections
(applies to Bulletin 280E/281E and Bulletin 284E)
See Detail A Detail A
Control Power Wiring
Table 3 - Power, Control and Ground Terminal Designations
Terminal Designations
A1 (+)
A2 (–)
A3 (+)
PE
1/L1
3/L3
5/L5
No. of Poles
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Description
Control Power Input
Control Power Common
Unswitched 24V Control
Ground
Line Power Phase A
Line Power Phase B
Line Power Phase C
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP utilizes 24V DC control power for communications and I/O. The control power terminal connections are labeled A1, A2, and A3.
Switched power will supply the outputs. Unswitched power will supply logic power and sensor inputs.
38
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Installation and Wiring Chapter 2
24V DC Control Power
• 24V DC (–15%, +10%)
• A1 = Switched +V
• A2 = Common for both switched and unswitched (–V)
• A3 = Unswitched +V
Input and Output Characteristics
• 5-pin female connectors (M12)
• 4 fixed inputs (two per connector) – software selectable sink or source
• 2 sourcing outputs DC (solid-state) – (one per connector)
Input and Output Power Connection
• Sensor Power will be sourced from +24V supplied from A3(+) and A2(–).
• Output power will be sourced from +24V supplied from A1(+) and A2(–).
• Max. current per output point is 0.5 A and is not to exceed 1.0 A total
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
39
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
ArmorStart with
EtherNet/IP Internal Wiring
Figure 17 - ArmorStart Ethernet Bulletin 280E with HOA Diagram
140M
L1
L2
L3
AS Logic
Control
Power
Sense
AS Logic
Control
F
A1
A2
2A SC Protected
Output A
1 Ampere
Total
Output B
2A SC Protected
A3
PTC
Off/Tripped
140M
On
7A
Class CC
Port 2
2.5A
Class CC
300mA Max
Ethernet
Logic
Short
Detect
Port 1
24V
26V
Note: This power supply is not present in the Status Only versions.
Reversed bias under normal operation
Current supplied by control power due to the power supply voltage being greater than A3 voltage
Current supplied from A3 when
A1 control power is lost
11 -
25V DC
+24V DC Status
24V DC
11 -
25V DC
+5V DC
5V DC
140M Trip
140M Status
F
A
Not Used
Input 10mA @ 24V DC
Input 10mA @ 24V DC
Input 10mA @ 24V DC
Input 10mA @ 24V DC
AS Logic Circuits
Motor
4 Inputs
50mA Max/input depends on sensor attached to input
40
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Installation and Wiring Chapter 2
Figure 18 - ArmorStart Ethernet Bulletin 281E with HOA Diagram
ArmorStart Ethernet REV with HOA Diagram
Reverser
140M
L1
L2
L3
A1
A2
2A SC Protected
Output A
1 Ampere
Total
Output B
2A SC Protected
A3
AS Logic
Control
Power
Sense
R
B
F
F
B
R
AS Logic
Control
AS Logic
Control
PTC
Off/Tripped
140M
On
7A
Class CC
Port 1
2.5A
Class CC
300mA Max
Ethernet
Logic
Short
Detect
Port 2
24V
26V
Reversed bias under normal operation
Note: This power supply is not present in the Status Only versions.
Current supplied by control power due to the power supply voltage being greater than A3 voltage
Current supplied from A3 when
A1 control power is lost
11 -
25V DC
+24V DC Status
24V DC
11 -
25Vdc
+5V DC
5Vdc
140M Trip
140M Status
F
A
Not Used
Input 10mA @ 24V DC
Input 10mA @ 24V DC
Input 10mA @ 24V DC
Input 10mA @ 24V DC
AS Logic Circuits
Motor
4 Inputs
50mA Max/input depends on sensor attached to input
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
41
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
L1
L2
L3
AS Logic
Control
Power
Sense
Figure 19 - ArmorStart Ethernet Bulletin 284E Drive Diagram
140M
3A
Class CC
Source Brake
Option
L1
L2
L3
R1 R2 R3
BR+ BR-
Sensorless Vector Control
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
T1
T2
T3
RJ-45
Output Contactor
Option
Motor
A1
A2
Output A
1 Ampere
Total
Output B
Fan
Off/Tripped
140M
On 7A
Class CC
2A SC Protected
2A SC Protected
2.5A
Class CC
O
Output
Contactor
R1
R2
PF40
B
Source Brake
Option
24V DC
26V
Reversed bias under normal operation
A3
PTC
300mA Max
Port 1 Port 2
Current supplied by control power due to the power supply voltage being greater than A3 voltage
Current supplied by
A3 when A1 control power is lost
Dynamic Brake
Connector
Option
Note: This switch is controlled by the Control Power Logic sense. If control power is present, switch is closed.
Prevents drive from running when there is no power for the fan
11 -
25V DC
+24V DC Status
24V DC
11 -
25V DC
+5V DC
5V DC
Ethernet
Logic
Short
Detect 4 Inputs
50mA Max/input depends on sensor attached to input
140M Trip
140M Status
Brake CNTR Status
Output CNTR Status
1
1 - Output CNTR Status not available when SM option specified
Input 10mA @ 24V DC
Input 10mA @ 24V DC
Input 10mA @ 24V DC
Input 10mA @ 24V DC
AS Logic
Circuits
42
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Installation and Wiring Chapter 2
Recommended Cord Grips
Figure 20 - Cord grips for ArmorStart Devices with 10 A Short Circuit Protection Rating
3/4 in. Lock Nut
Thomas & Betts Cord Grip
Cat. No. 2931NM
3/4 in. Stain Relief Cord Connector
Cable Range: 0.31…0.56 in.
Used with Control Power Media
Cordset - Example:
Cat. No. 889N-M65GF-M2
1 in. Lock Nut
Thomas & Betts Cord Grip
Cat. No. 2940NM
1 in. Stain Relief Cord Connector
Cable Range: 0.31…0.56 in.
Used with Three-Phase Power
Media Cordset - Example:
Cat. No. 280-PWR22G-M1
Figure 21 - Cord grips for ArmorStart Devices with 25 A Short Circuit Protection Rating
3/4 in. Lock Nut
Thomas & Betts Cord Grip
Cat. No. 2931NM
3/4 in. Stain Relief Cord Connector
Cable Range: 0.31…0.56 in.
Used with Control Power Media
Cordset - Example:
Cat. No. 889N-M65GF-M2
1 in. Lock Nut
Thomas & Betts Cord Grip
Cat. No. 2942NM
1 in. Stain Relief Cord Connector
Cable Range: 0.70…0.95 in.
Used with Three-Phase Power
Media Cordset - Example:
Cat. No. 280-PWR35G-M1
AC Supply Considerations for
Bulletin 284E Units
Ungrounded and High Resistive Distribution Systems
ATTENTION: The Bulletin 284E contains protective Metal Oxide Varistors
(MOVs) that are referenced to a ground. These devices should be disconnected if the Bulletin 284E is installed on an ungrounded and high resistive distribution system.
ATTENTION: Do not remove this jumper, shown in Figure 23, if the unit is
equipped with an EMI filter installed.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
43
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
Disconnecting MOVs
To prevent drive damage, the MOVs connected to ground must be disconnected if the drive is installed on an ungrounded and high resistive distribution system where the line-to-ground voltages on any phase could exceed 125% of the nominal line-to-line voltage. To disconnect the MOVs, remove the jumper shown
in Figure 23, Bulletin 284E Jumper Removal.
1.
Before installing the Bulletin 284E, loosen four mounting screws.
2.
Unplug control module from the base unit by pulling forward.
Figure 22 - Bulletin 284E Removal of Control Module
Figure 23 - Bulletin 284E Jumper Removal
Remove Jumper
44
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Installation and Wiring Chapter 2
Group Motor Installations for USA and Canada Markets
The ArmorStart Distributed Motor controllers are listed for use with each other in group installations per NFPA 79, Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery.
When applied according to the group motor installation requirements, two or more motors, of any rating or controller type, are permitted on a single branch circuit. Group Motor Installation has been successfully used for many years in the
USA and Canada.
Note:
For additional information regarding group motor installations with the
ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller, see Appendix A
.
Wiring and Workmanship Guidelines
In addition to conduit and seal-tite raceway, it is acceptable to utilize cable that is dual rated Tray Cable Exposed Runs (TC-ER) and Cord, STOOW, for power and control wiring on ArmorStart installations. In the USA and Canada installations, the following guidance is outlined by the National Electrical Code
(NEC) and National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 79.
In industrial establishments where the conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only qualified persons service the installation, and where the exposed cable is continuously supported and protected against physical damage using mechanical protection, such as struts, angles, or channels, Type TC tray cable that complies with the crush and impact requirements of Type MC
(Metal Clad) cable and is identified for such use with the marking Type TC-ER
(Exposed Run)* shall be permitted between a cable tray and the utilization equipment or device as open wiring. The cable shall be secured at intervals not exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft) and installed in a “good workman-like” manner.
Equipment grounding for the utilization equipment shall be provided by an equipment grounding conductor within the cable.
*Historically cable meeting these crush and impact requirements were designated and marked “Open Wiring”. Cable so marked is equivalent to the present Type
TC-ER and can be used.
While the ArmorStart is intended for installation in factory floor environments of industrial establishments, the following must be taken into consideration when locating the ArmorStart in the application:
• Cables, including those for control voltage including 24V DC and communications, are not to be exposed to an operator or building traffic on a continuous basis.
• Location of the ArmorStart to minimize exposure to continual traffic is recommended. If location to minimize traffic flow is unavoidable, other barriers to minimize inadvertent exposure to the cabling should be considered.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
45
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC)
46
• Routing cables should be done in such a manner to minimize inadvertent exposure and/or damage.
• Additionally, if conduit or other raceways are not used, it is recommended that strain relief fittings be utilized when installing the cables for the control and power wiring through the conduit openings.
The working space around the ArmorStart may be minimized as the ArmorStart does not require examination, adjustment, servicing or maintenance while energized. In lieu of this service, the ArmorStart is meant to be unplugged and replaced after proper lockout/tag-out procedures have been employed.
The Hand-Off-Auto (HOA) is a factory-installed option that the user may select.
The HOA keypad may require the ArmorStart to be selected and installed as follows if the application requires frequent use of the hand operated interface by the equipment operator:
1.
They are not less than 0.6 m (2 ft) above the servicing level and are within easy reach of the normal working position of the operator.
2.
The operator is not placed in a hazardous situation when operating them.
3.
The possibility of inadvertent operation is minimized.
If the operated interface is used in industrial establishments where the conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only qualified persons operate and service the ArmorStart's operator interface, and the installation is located so that inadvertent operation is minimized, then other installation locations with acceptable access can be provided.
Other System Design Considerations
The user should keep 3-phase power cabling at least 6 in. away from the
EtherNet/IP network to avoid noise issues. EtherNet/IP is an unpowered network therefore if device status is important when the disconnect is in the OFF position, the A3 terminal must have an unswitched power source.
The following guidelines are provided for EMC installation compliance.
General Notes (Bulletin 284E only)
• The motor Cable should be kept as short as possible in order to avoid electromagnetic emission as well as capacitive currents.
• Conformity of the drive with CE EMC requirements does not guarantee an entire machine installation complies with CE EMC requirements.
Many factors can influence total machine/installation compliance.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Grounding
Installation and Wiring Chapter 2
• Using an EMI filter, with any drive rating, may result in relatively high ground leakage currents. Therefore, the filter must only be used in installations that are solidly grounded (bonded) to the building power distribution ground. Grounding must not rely on flexible cables and should not include any form of plug or socket that would permit inadvertent disconnection. Some local codes may require redundant ground connections. The integrity of all connections should be periodically checked.
Wiring
Wire in an industrial control application can be divided into three groups: power, control, and signal. The following recommendations for physical separation between these groups is provided to reduce the coupling effect:
• Minimum spacing between different wire groups in the same tray should be 6 in. (16 cm).
• Wire runs outside an enclosure should be run in conduit or have shielding/ armor with equivalent attenuation.
• Different wire groups should be run in separate conduits.
• Minimum spacing between conduits containing different wire groups should be 3 in. (8 cm).
An effectively grounded product is one that is “intentionally
connected to earth through a ground connection or connections of sufficiently low impedance and having sufficient current-carrying capacity to prevent the buildup of voltages which may result in undue hazard to connected equipment or to persons” (as defined by the US National Electric Code NFPA70, Article 100B). Grounding is done for two basic reasons: safety (defined above) and noise containment or reduction. While the safety ground scheme and the noise current return circuit may sometimes share the same path and components, they should be considered different circuits with different requirements.
Grounding Safety Grounds
The object of safety grounding is to ensure that all metalwork is at the same ground (or Earth) potential at power frequencies. Impedance between the drive and the building scheme ground must conform to the requirements of national and local industrial safety regulations or electrical codes. These will vary based on country, type of distribution system and other factors. Periodically check the integrity of all ground connections.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
47
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
General safety dictates that all metal parts are connected to earth with separate copper wire or wires of the appropriate gauge. Most equipment has specific provisions to connect a safety ground or PE (protective earth) directly to it.
Grounding PE or Ground
The safety ground - PE must be connected to earth ground. This point must be connected to adjacent building steel (girder, joist), a floor ground rod, bus bar or building ground grid. Grounding points must comply with national and local industrial safety regulations or electrical codes. Some codes may require redundant ground paths and periodic examination of connection integrity.
IMPORTANT
To avoid electrolytic corrosion on the external earth terminal, avoid spraying moisture directly on the terminal. When used in washdown environments apply a sealant or other corrosion inhibitor on the external ground terminal to minimize any negative effects of galvanic or Electro-chemical corrosion.
Ground connections should be inspected on a regular basis.
Grounding Motors
The motor frame or stator core must be connected directly to the PE connection with a separate ground conductor. It is recommended that each motor frame be grounded to building steel at the motor.
ArmorConnect Power Media
Description
The ArmorConnect power media offers both three-phase and control power cable cord set systems including patchcords, receptacles, tees, reducers and accessories to be utilized with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller.
These cable system components allow quick connection of ArmorStart
Distributed Motor Controllers, reducing installation time. They provide for repeatable, reliable connection of the three-phase and control power to the
ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller and motor by providing a plug-andplay environment that also avoids system mis-wiring. When specifying power media for use with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers (Bulletin
280E/281E and Bulletin 284E) use only the Bulletin 280E ArmorConnect power media.
Refer to the On-Machine Selection Catalog for ordering details. The following shows example configurations for power, control, and communication media.
48
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Figure 24 - Ethernet Media System Overview
Installation and Wiring Chapter 2
Connections:
➊
CAT5e Bulkhead Connector and Receptacle – Example Cat.No. 1585A-DD4JD
➋
CAT5e Patchcord, IP67, M12 D-Code, Male Straight, Male Right Angle – Example Cat.No. 1585D-M4TBDE-*
➌
CAT5e, Patch Cable, IP20, RJ45 Male to RJ45 Male – Example Cat.No. 1585J-M4TB-*
➍
Three-Phase Power Receptacles -
Female receptacles are a panel mount connector with flying leads – Example Cat. No. 280-M35F-M1
➎
Three-Phase Power Trunk- Patchcord cable with integral female or male connector on each end –
Example Cat. No. 280-PWR35A-M*
➏
Three-Phase Drop Cable- Patchcord cable with integral female or male connector on each end –
Example Cat. No. 280-PWR22A-M*
➐
Three-Phase Power Tees and Reducer –
Tee connects to a single drop line to trunk with quick change connectors – Cat. No. 280-T35
Reducing Tee connects to a single drop line (Mini) to trunk (Quick change) connector – Cat. No. 280-RT35
Reducer connects from quick change male connector to mini female connector – Cat. No. 280-RA35
➑
Control Power Receptacles - Female receptacles are a panel mount connector with flying leads –
Cat. No. 888N-D65AF1-*
➒
Control Power Media Patchcords – Patchcord cable with integral female or male connector on each end –
Example Cat. No. 889N-F65GFNM-*
➓
Control Power Tees - The E-stop In Tee (Cat. No. 898N-653ST-NKF) is used to connect to the Bulletin 800F On-
Machine E-Stop station using a control power media patchcord. The E-stop Out tee (Cat. No. 898N-653ES-
NKF
) is used with cordset or patchcord to connect to the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
49
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
ArmorConnect Connections
Figure 25 - ArmorConnect Receptacles
10 A Short Circuit Protection Rating 25 A Short Circuit Protection Rating
Control Power Receptacle
Three-Phase Power Receptacle
Control Power Receptacle
Three-Phase Power Receptacle
Factory-installed ArmorConnect gland plate connections
Figure 26 - ArmorConnect Connections
50
Table 4 - ArmorConnect Gland Plate Conductor Color Code
Terminal Designations
A1 (+)
A2 (–)
A3 (+)
PE
1/L1
2/L2
3/L3
Description
Control Power Input
Control Power Common
Unswitched Control Power
Ground
Line Power – Phase A
Line Power – Phase B
Line Power – Phase C
Color Code
Blue
Black
Red
Green/Yellow
Black
White
Red
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Figure 27 - On-Machine Stop Stations
Installation and Wiring Chapter 2
Enclosure Type
Plastic
Metal
Quick Connect
Mini Receptacle
Table 1 Product Selection
Knockout Type
Metric
Operator
Twist to Release
Illumination
Voltage
24V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
Contact
Configuration
1 N.C./1 N.O.
Cat. No.
800F-1YMQ4
800F-1MYMQ4
Figure 28 - Stop Circuit for EtherNet/IP Version
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
51
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
ArmorConnect Cable Ratings
The ArmorConnect Power Media cables are rated per UL Type TC
600V 90°C Dry 75°C Wet, Exposed Run (ER) or MTW 600V 90°C or
STOOW 105°C 600V - Canadian Standards Association (CSA) STOOW 600V
FT2. For additional information regarding ArmorConnect Power Media refer to the Industrial Controls Catalog.
Branch Circuit Protection Requirements for ArmorConnect
Three-Phase Power Media
When using ArmorConnect Three-Phase Power Media, fuses or circuit breakers can be used for the motor branch circuit protective device, for the group motor installations.
For 25 A rated ArmorConnect cable for trunk and taps:
Circuit Breaker:
Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than
65 000 RMS symmetrical amperes at 480V AC maximum when protected by
Bulletin 140U-H frame circuit breaker, not rated more than 480V, 100 A and a maximum interrupting of 65 000 RMS symmetrical amperes Short Circuit
Current Rating (SCCR).
Fusing:
Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 65 000
RMS symmetrical amperes (SCCR) at 600V AC maximum when protected by
CC, J, and T class fuses.
For 10 A and 15 A rated ArmorConnect taps:
Circuit Breaker:
Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than
45 000 RMS symmetrical amperes at 480Y/277V AC maximum when protected by Cat. No. 140U-D6D3-C30 circuit breaker, not rated more than 480V, 30 A, having an interrupting rating not less than 45 000 RMS symmetrical amperes,
480Y/277V AC maximum.
WARNING: The total circuit impedance including each cable assembly's own impedance, must be low enough to ensure any short-circuit or ground fault current that can flow through any assembly, will be large enough to operate the magnetic trip of the
Cat. No. 140U-D63-C* circuit breaker. Refer to your local electrical code for acceptable practices for this evaluation.
Fusing:
Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 65 000
RMS symmetrical amperes (SCCR) at 600V AC maximum when protected by
CC, J, and T class fuses, rated 40 A non-time delay or 20 A time delay.
52
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Installation and Wiring Chapter 2
Ethernet and I/O Connections
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP utilizes a sealed D-coded M12 (micro) style
Ethernet connector.
Figure 29 - Ethernet/IP Connector
M12 Female Ethernet Connector
(view into connector)
Pin 1 - Tx+
Pin 2 - Rx+
Pin 3 - Tx–
Pin 4 - Rx–
Figure 30 - I/O Receptacle Input Pin Out (M12)
Pin 1 - +24V (A3 pwr)
Pin 2 - Input 0
Pin 3 - Common
Pin 4 - Input 1
Pin 5 - NC (no connection)
Figure 31 - I/O Receptacle Output Pin Out (M12)
Pin 1 - NC (no connection)
Pin 2 - NC (no connection)
Pin 3 - Common
Pin 4 - Output +24V DC (A1 pwr)
Pin 5 - NC (no connection)
Power Connections
Figure 32 - External Connections for Motor Connector – Bulletin 284E - 5 Hp and
Bulletin 280E/281E - 3 Hp or less (M22) at 480V AC
Pin 1 - T1 (black)
Pin 2 - T2 (white)
Pin 3 - T3 (red)
Pin 4 - Ground (green/yellow)
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
53
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
Figure 33 - External Connections for Motor Connector – Bulletin 280E/281E - 10 Hp (M35) at 480V AC
Pin 1 - T1 (black)
Pin 2 - Ground (green/yellow)
Pin 3 - T3 (red)
Pin 4 - T2 (white)
Figure 34 - External Connections for Brake Contactor Connector (M25)
Pin 1 - L1 (black)
Pin 2 - Ground (green/yellow)
Pin 3 - L2 (white)
Figure 35 - External Connections for Dynamic Brake Connection (M22)
Pin 1 - Ground (green/yellow)
Pin 2 - BR+ (black)
Pin 3 - BR– (white)
Figure 36 - Incoming Control Power (M22) – 24V DC Only
Pin 1 - +24V DC unswitched (A3/red)
Pin 2 - Common (A2/black)
Pin 3 - PE (green)
Pin 4 - Not used (blank)
Pin 5 - +24V DC switched (A1/blue)
Pin 6 - Not used (white)
54
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Installation and Wiring Chapter 2
Figure 37 - Incoming Three-Phase Power for 10 A Short Circuit Protection (M22)
Pin 1 - L1 (black)
Pin 2 - L2 (white)
Pin 3 - L3 (red)
Pin 4 - Ground (green/yellow)
Figure 38 - Incoming Three-Phase Power for 25 A Short Circuit Protection (M35)
Pin 1 - L1 (black)
Pin 2 - Ground (green/yellow)
Pin 3 - L3 (red)
Pin 4 - L2 (white)
Optional Locking Clip
The clam shell design clips over the ArmorStart motor connector and motor cable to limit customer access from disconnecting the motor cable on the
ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller. The locking clip is an optional device that can be used, if desired. A locking clip is not available for the M25 Source
Brake connection.
Figure 39 - Bulletin 280E/281E Installation of Locking Clip
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
55
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
Figure 40 - Bulletin 284E Installation of Locking Clip
56
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Terminology
Chapter
3
Introduction to EtherNet/IP and
Device Level Ring Technology
Refer to the table for the meaning of common terms.
This Term
Consumer
CSMA/CD
Determinism
DHCP
DNS
Ethernet
EtherNet/IP
Ethernet network
Explicit messaging
Full duplex
Means
A destination device in the CIP™ networking model. See CIP.
Carrier sense multiple access/collision detection is the access method used in
Ethernet. When a device wants to gain access to the network, it checks to see if the network is quiet (senses the carrier). If it is not, it waits a random amount of time before retrying. If the network is quiet and two devices access the line at exactly the same time, their signals collide. When the collision is detected, they both back off and each waits a random amount of time before retrying.
The ability to predict when information will be delivered. Important in timecritical applications.
The dynamic host configuration protocol is an Internet protocol, similar to BootP, for automating the configuration of computers that use TCP/IP. DHCP can be used to automatically assign IP addresses, to deliver IP stack configuration parameters, such as the subnet mask and default router, and to provide other configuration information, such as the addresses for printer, time, and news servers.
The domain name system is a hierarchical, distributed method of organizing the name space of the Internet. The DNS administratively groups hosts into a hierarchy of authority that allows addressing and other information to be widely distributed and maintained. A big advantage to the DNS is that using it eliminates dependence on a centrally-maintained file that maps host names to addresses.
A physical layer standard using carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) methods.
Ethernet industrial protocol applies a common industrial protocol (CIP) over
Ethernet by encapsulating messages in TCP/UDP/IP.
A local area network designed for the high-speed exchange of information between computers and related devices.
Non-time critical messaging used for device configuration and data collection, such as downloading programs or peer-to-peer messaging between two PLC units.
A mode of communication that allows a device to send and receive information at the same time, effectively doubling the bandwidth.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
57
Chapter 3 Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology
This Term
Fully qualified domain name
Gateway
Hardware address
Host name
Hub
Implicit messaging
IP
IP address
Latency
Multicast
Producer
Means
A fully qualified domain name (FQDN) is a domain name that includes all higher level domains relevant to the entity named. If you think of the DNS as a treestructure with each node having its own label, a fully qualified domain name for a specific node would be its label followed by the labels of all the other nodes between it and the root of the tree. For example, for a host, a FQDN would include the string that identifies the particular host, plus all domains of which the host is a part, up to and including the top-level domain (the root domain is always null). For example, PARIS.NISC.SRI.COM is a fully qualified domain name for the host at 192.33.33.109.
A module or set of modules that allows communications between nodes on dissimilar networks.
Each Ethernet device has a unique hardware address (sometimes called a MAC address) that is 48 bits. The address appears as six digits separated by colons (such as, xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx). Each digit has a value between 0 and 255 (0x00 to 0xFF). This address is assigned in the hardware and cannot be changed. The hardware address is required to identify the device if you are using a BOOTP utility.
The host name is the unique name for a computer within its domain. It's always the first element of a full name, and, with its domain and top-level domain suffix, creates the unique name of that computer on the Internet. For example, let's say a trading website is www.trading.com. The host name is www, which is not unique on the web, but is unique within the trading domain.
The host name can also refer to the fully qualified domain name (FQDN), or in this example, www.trading.com. Both naming methods seem to be used interchangeably in various documents. For the purposes of this document, the host name will refer to the FQDN, or as in this example, www.trading.com.
A central connecting device that joins devices together in a star configuration.
Hubs are generally not suitable for use in I/O control systems, since they are time-critical applications that cannot tolerate lost packets.
Real-time messaging of I/O data.
Internet protocol that provides the routing mechanism for messages. All messages contain not only the address of the destination station, but the address of a destination network, which allows messages to be sent to multiple networks within an organization or around the world.
A 32-bit identification number for each node on an Internet Protocol network.
These addresses are represented as four sets of 8-bit numbers (numbers from 0 to 255), with decimals between them. Each node on the network must have a unique IP address.
The time between initiating a request for data and the beginning of the actual data transfer.
In the CIP producer/consumer model, one producer multicasts (broadcasts) the data once to all the consumers.
The source of information in the CIP networking model. See CIP.
58
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology Chapter 3
This Term
Subnet mask
Switch
TCP
Means
An extension of the IP address that allows a site to use a single net ID for multiple networks.
A network device that cross connects devices or network segments. A switch provides each sender/receiver the full network bandwidth (2x in full duplex mode), reduces collisions, and increases determinism.
The transport control protocol is a more reliable but slower transport protocol than UDP. It is used for explicit (not time critical) messaging in EtherNet/IP.
Introduction to EtherNet/IP
Automation architectures must provide users with three primary services:
• Control services involve the exchange of time-critical data between controlling devices and I/O devices.
• Networks must provide users configuration capabilities to set up and maintain their automation systems.
• Automation architecture must allow for collection of data.
EtherNet/IP, provides installation flexibility and leverages commercially available industrial infrastructure products. It is also compatible with other communication standards, such as Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP), Simple
Networks Management Protocol (SNMP), and Dynamic Host Configuration
(DHCP).
EtherNet/IP is a CIP adaptation of TCP/IP that fully utilizes the IEEE standard.
The relationship between the TCP/IP and CIP to form EtherNet/IP is shown in
the ISO/OSI 7-layer model is shown in Figure 41. The OSI model is an ISO
standard for network communications that define all functions from a physical layer to the protocol.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
59
Chapter 3 Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology
Figure 41 - OSI Model for ISO Standard for Network Communications
This approach provides real time technology into the Ethernet domain. With the network extensions of CIP Safety™, CIP Sync™ and CIP Motion™, CIP networks allow for safety communication, time synchronization, and simple to high performance motion all over the same EtherNet/IP network.
60
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology Chapter 3
Linear Network Introduction
A linear network is a collection of devices that are daisy-chained together.
Figure 42 - Linear Network Collection of Devices
In this topology a communication issue in the media or device will prevent nodes downstream from communicating.
Figure 43 - Communication Issue in the Media or Device Line
The EtherNet/IP embedded switch technology allows this topology to be implemented at the device level. No additional switches are required.
These are the primary advantages of a linear network:
• The network simplifies installation and reduces wiring and installation costs.
• The network requires no special software configuration.
• Embedded switch products offer improved CIP Sync application performance on linear networks.
The primary disadvantage of a linear network is that any break of the cable disconnects all devices downstream from the break from the rest of the network.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
61
Chapter 3 Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology
IMPORTANT
Products with EtherNet/IP embedded switch technology have two ports to connect to a linear or DLR network in a single subnet.
You cannot use these ports as two Network Interface Cards (NICs) connected to two different subnets.
Device Level Ring (DLR)
Introduction
A DLR protocol defines a set of behaviors, refer to Figure 44. A ring supervisor
keeps packets of information from circulating infinitely around the ring by blocking one of the ports. A beacon frame constantly is detected on both ring supervisor ports. If a beacon frame is not detected the supervisor detects the physical layer issue and reconfigures the network to a linear topology without the loss of any node communication or data. Once repaired the ring supervisor reconfigures back to ring mode.
.
Figure 44 - DLR Protocol
62
As shown in Figure 45, when a physical layer failure is detected the adjacent
nodes to the fault generate a link status message that the ring supervisor acknowledges. The ring supervisor unblocks the port to allow communication.
The neighboring nodes to the fault identify the fault and reconfigure themselves to support a linear topology. Now, both the ring supervisor and nodes are configured to support a linear topology.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology Chapter 3
Figure 45 - Physical Layer Failure is Detected
When the physical layer fault is corrected the supervisor will “hear” the beacon frame again on both ports. Once this is detected the ring supervisor re-establishes and configures the ring topology. All the neighboring nodes detect this and reconfigure themselves back to ring. A DLR network is a single-fault tolerant network intended for the interconnection of automation devices.
At least one ring supervisor must be configured before a ring is formed.
IMPORTANT
Any nodes that do not support DLR should not be directly connected to the ring.
The node should be connected to the ring through a switch that supports DLR.
The advantages of the DLR network include:
• simple installation
• resilience to a single point of failure on the network
• fast recovery time when a single fault occurs on the network
The primary disadvantage of the DLR topology is the additional effort required to set up and use the network as compared to a linear or star network.
IMPORTANT
Products with EtherNet/IP embedded switch technology have two ports to connect to a linear or DLR network in a single subnet.
You cannot use these ports as two Network Interface Cards (NICs) connected to two different subnets.
IMPORTANT
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP is cannot be configured as a ring supervisor.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
63
Chapter 3 Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology
Number of Nodes on a
DLR Network
Ethernet Switches
Ethernet Media
Rockwell Automation recommends that you use no more than 50 nodes on a single DLR or linear network. If your application requires more than 50 nodes, we recommend that you segment the nodes into separate, but linked, DLR networks.
With smaller networks:
• there is better management of traffic on the network.
• the networks are easier to maintain.
• there is a lower likelihood of multiple faults.
Additionally, on a DLR network with more than 50 nodes, network recovery times from faults are higher. For DLR networks with 50 or less nodes, ring recovery time is less than 3 ms.
Ethernet managed switches are key components that provide determinism and the required throughput to achieve automation needs. Switches are able to manage network traffic which reduces unnecessary delays or band width needs. A properly designed EtherNet/IP infrastructure that implement segregation via managed switch technology achieves a more reliable and secure network.
Today, unshield twisted pair (UTP) wiring is the standard in most applications and allows for greatest flexibility and ease of installation and maintenance.
Category 5e (e-enhanced) cable is specifically designed to meet today’s automation needs.
Standard RJ-45 connectors are not designed for industrial environments. For outside the panel, IP67 connectors are required for EtherNet/IP.
Figure 46 - Network Media - Ethernet M12 D-Code Media
64
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
EtherNet/IP General
Wiring Guideline
Requested Packet
Interval (RPI)
Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology Chapter 3
Ethernet is found in automation equipment, panels, and components. There are a few guidelines, that if followed, will reduce the number of issues an EtherNet/IP application may experience.
• Many EtherNet/IP applications will share the same space with power conductors. If the Ethernet media must cross power conductors, do so at right angles. This will reduce the coupling effect and reduce the potential for communication noise.
• Where possible, route the Ethernet/IP media five feet or more from high voltage sources (for example, lights, ballasts, motors, …) or sources of radio frequency, such as variable frequency drives.
• Ensure that the application or equipment follows industry acceptable grounding practices.
• Maintain media lengths between nodes to less than 100 m (328 ft). In today’s environment it may be challenging to maintain these guidelines, however these will reduce potential application issues.
The RPI is the update rate specified for a particular piece of data on the network.
This value specifies how often to produce the data for that device. For example, if you specify an RPI of 50 ms, it means that every 50 ms the device should send data to the controller or the controller should send data to the device. Use RPIs only for devices that exchange data.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
65
Chapter 3 Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology
Notes:
66
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
IP Address
Chapter
4
Product Commissioning
Class A
Class B
Class C
The IP address identifies each node on the IP network (or system of connected networks). Each TCP/IP node on a network must have a unique IP address.
The IP address is 32 bits long and has a net ID part and Host ID part. Networks are classified A, B, C, (or other). The class of the network determines how an IP address is formatted.
Figure 47 - IP Address on the IP Network
0
0
0
1 0
0
1 1 0
Net ID
Net ID
7 8
Net ID
15
16
Host ID
Host ID
23
24
Host ID
31
31
31
You can distinguish the class of the IP address from the first integer in its dotted-decimal IP address as follows:
Range of first integer
0…127
128…191
Class
A
B
Range of first integer
192…223
224…255
Class
C other
Each node on the same physical network must have an IP address of the same class and must have the same net ID. Each node on the same network must have a different Host ID thus giving it a unique IP address.
Gateway Address
The Gateway Address is the default address of a network. It provides a single domain name and point of entry to the site. Gateways connect individual physical networks into a system of networks.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is used for splitting IP networks into a series of subgroups, or subnets. The mask is a binary pattern that is matched up with the IP address to turn part of the Host ID address field into a field for subnets.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
67
Chapter 4 Product Commissioning
Configuring EtherNet/
IP Address
Before using the ArmorStart you may need to configure an IP address, subnet mask, and optional Gateway address. The rotary network address switches found on the I/O section of the ArmorStart are set to 999 and DHCP is enabled as the factory default. The ArmorStart reads these switches first to determine if the switches are set to a valid IP address between 1…254. When switches are set to a valid number the IP address will be 192.168.1._ _ _ [switch setting].
The IP address can also be set using DHCP.
• If DHCP is preferred, use Rockwell Automation BootP/DHCP utility, version 2.3 or later, that ships with RSLogix™ 5000 or RSLinx software.
• Or use a third party DHCP server.
This document assumes the user has set the IP address to 192.168.1.1. The user can change this IP address to any address either statically or dynamically.
ATTENTION: To avoid unintended operation, the adapter must be assigned a fixed IP address. If a DHCP server is used, it must be configured to assign a fixed
IP address for your adapter.
Failure to observe this precaution may result in unintended machine motion or loss of process control.
Protective IP67 Caps
Manually Configure the Network Address Switches
Remove the protective caps from the rotary switches. Set the network address by adjusting the three switches on the front of the I/O module.
Figure 48 - Switches on the I/O Module
Writable surface for IP address
68
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Product Commissioning Chapter 4
Figure 49 - Network Address Example
This example shows the
IP address set to 163.
8
X100
0
6
4
2 8
X10
0
6
4
2
8
X1
0
6
4
2
Valid IP address switch settings range from 001 to 254. When the switches are set to a valid number, the adapter’s IP address will be 192.168.1.xxx (where xxx represents the number set on the switches). The adapter’s subnet mask will be
255.255.255.0 and the gateway address is set to 0.0.0.0. A power cycle is required for any new IP address to take effect.
Note:
The upper three octets are fixed. DHCP or the embedded webserver must be used to configure the IP address to a value other than 192.168.1.xxx.
If the switches are set to an invalid number (such as 000 or a value greater than
254), the adapter will check to see if DHCP is enabled. If DHCP is enabled, the adapter requests an address from a DHCP server. If DHCP is not enabled, the adapter will use the IP address (along with other TCP configurable parameters) stored in non-volatile memory.
IMPORTANT
Refer to Figure 50, the ArmorStart is shipped with the control module rotary
switches set to a value of 99. DO NOT modify this setting. If these are changed and the unit stops responding, the switches will need to be manually set to node address 63 and power cycled.
Figure 50 - Rotary Switch on Control Module
Factory Setting 99
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
69
Chapter 4 Product Commissioning
Use the Rockwell Automation
BootP/DHCP Utility
The Rockwell Automation BootP/DHCP utility is a stand alone program that incorporates the functionality of standard BootP/DHCP software with a user friendly graphical interface. It is located in the Utils directory on the
RSLogix 5000 installation CD. The ArmorStart EtherNet/IP adapter must have
DHCP enabled (factory default) to use the utility.
To configure your adapter using the BootP/DHCP utility, perform the following steps:
1.
Run the BootP/DHCP software.
In the BootP/DHCP Request History panel you will see the hardware addresses of the devices issuing BootP/DHCP requests.
Figure 51 - BootP/DHCP Request History Panel
2.
Double-click the hardware address of the device you want to configure.
You will see the New Entry dialog with the device’s Ethernet Address
(MAC).
Figure 52 - New Entry Dialog Box
70
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Product Commissioning Chapter 4
3.
Enter the IP Address you want to assign to the device, and click OK.
The device is added to the Relation List, displaying the Ethernet Address
(MAC) and corresponding IP Address, Hostname, and Description (if applicable).
Figure 53 - Relation List
When the address displays in the IP Address column in the Request
History section, it signifies that the IP address assignment has been made.
4.
To assign this configuration to the device, highlight the device in the
Relation List panel, and click the Disable BOOTP/DHCP button.
When power is cycled to the device, it uses the configuration you assigned and does not issue a DHCP request.
5.
To enable DHCP for a device with DHCP disabled, highlight the device in the Relation List, and click the Enable DHCP button.
You must have an entry for the device in the Relation List panel to re-enable DHCP.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
71
Chapter 4 Product Commissioning
Figure 54 - Enable DHCP Button
Save the Relation List
You can save the Relation List to use later. To save the Relation List perform the following steps:
1.
Select Save As... from the File menu.
Figure 55 - Save the Relation List
72
You will see the Save As Dialog.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Figure 56 - Save As Dialog Box
Product Commissioning Chapter 4
DHCP IP Support
2.
Select the folder you want to Save in.
3.
Enter a File name for the Relation List (for example, Control System
Configuration), and click Save.
You can leave the Save as type at the default setting: Bootp
You can then open the file containing the Relation List at a later session.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) software automatically assigns
IP addresses to client stations logging onto a TCP/IP network.
When DHCP is enabled (factory default Enabled), the unit will request its network configuration from a DHCP/BOOTP server. Any configuration received from a DHCP server will be stored in non-volatile memory.
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP will remember the last successful address if DHCP is enabled. The unit will try to obtain the same IP address from the DHCP server.
If the server is not present (e.g., server fails to power up), the unit will use the IP address it previously received from the server. The DHCP timeout = 30 s.
Be cautious about using DHCP software to configure your adapter. A DHCP server typically assigns a finite lease time to the offered IP address. When fifty percent of the leased time has expired, the ArmorStart Ethernet adapter attempts to renew its IP address with the DHCP server. The possibility exists that the adapter will be assigned a different IP address, which would cause the adapter to cease communicating with the controller.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
73
Chapter 4 Product Commissioning
Using the Rockwell
Automation Embedded
Web Server
Internal Web Server
ArmorStart Ethernet/IP internal web server allows you to view information and configure the ArmorStart via a web browser. The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data. Security in the form of an administrative password can be set. The default Login is Administrator. There is no password
set by default.
IMPORTANT
Caution: The user should set the password to a unique value for authorized personnel.
If the login and password are lost you will need to reset the device to the factory defaults, which results in losing its configuration.
To access the internal web browser, open your computers internet browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart (for example, 192.168.1.1).
Note:
192.168.1.1 is NOT the factory default IP address as DHCP is enabled by default.
Figure 57 - Internal Web Browser
74
From here you are able to view parameter settings, device status, and diagnostics from multiple tab views.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Figure 58 - Multiple Tab Views
Product Commissioning Chapter 4
Network Configuration
To access the network configuration you will need to login to the Administrative
Setting. The factory default Login is Administrator. The factory default password is not used. The user should change the password to ensure unauthorized personnel do not access and modify the device configuration.
Figure 59 - Network Configurations
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
75
Chapter 4 Product Commissioning
From this screen you can change the Ethernet Configuration. For example in the above image the default IP address was changed from 192.168.1.1 to
10.10.10.101. To access the webpage after a power cycle, the new address must be used.
Parameter Configuration
ArmorStart Ethernet/IP embedded web server provides the user the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having to access
RSLogix 5000. To view the device configuration from the web server, select the
Parameters folder. For the parameter configuration, the user will login through the Administrative Settings, or when prompted.
Figure 60 - Starter Setup
76
In the figure above the Starter Setup parameters are viewed. The user can view all parameters from this screen. To modify a parameter the user will click the
“Edit” button.
Figure 61 - Enter Network Password
The user will be prompted to enter the default User Name (Administrator).
There is no password set by default. The user is expected to change the User
Name (Login) and Password to avoid unauthorized access to the device configuration.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Figure 62 - Overload Class Settings
Product Commissioning Chapter 4
The above screen shows an example of changing the Overload Class setting to 15.
Once all changes are made select Apply.
E-mail Notification Configuration
ArmorStart Ethernet/IP internal web server will support the e-mailing of warning and trip messages via Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP). The configuration parameters for the SMTP Server’s IP address, user login, and port number are configurable through the Administrative Settings page of the internal web server. The user will configure the device name, device description, and device trip type.
Figure 63 - E-mail Notification Configuration
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
77
Chapter 4 Product Commissioning
Device Connections
E-mail triggers:
• when a trip occurs
• when a trip is cleared
• when a warning occurs
• when a warning is cleared
Note:
“Cleared Event” e-mails will only be sent when all events have been cleared and if a trip event e-mail has previously been sent. For example, if the device is configured to send e-mails when a phase loss trip and an overload trip is detected, no e-mail will be sent when both the overload and the phase loss is cleared.
The following is an example trip e-mail:
Subject: ArmorStart 281E, 0.5
…
2.5 A, 24V DC has detected a trip.
Body:
Trip Type:
Trip Info:
Device Name:
Overload
Load has drawn excessive current based on the trip class selected.
ArmorStart 281E, 0.5
…
2.5 A, 24V DC
(From Identity Object)
Device Description: Lift conveyor on-machine motor starter
(From E-mail Config web page)
Device Location: Customer Plant
(From E-mail Config web page)
Contact Info: Joe Schmo
(From E-mail Config web page) [email protected]
The device will support both scheduled (Class 1) and unscheduled (Class 3 &
UCMM) CIP connections. A maximum of two Class 1 CIP connections (one exclusive owner and one listen only) are supported, one per PLC. Six Class 3 CIP connections are supported.
78
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Setup
Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000
Chapter
5
This section will show you how to add an ArmorStart Add-On-Profile (AOP) to
RSLogix 5000. It is assumed that you have downloaded and installed the AOP so that the RSLogix 5000 software can fully support the ArmorStart Ethernet/IP.
The AOP can be downloaded from: http://support.rockwellautomation.com/ controlflash/LogixProfiler.asp
.
1.
Open RSLogix 5000 by double-clicking on the icon on your desktop.
2.
Select File>New to create a new project.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
79
Chapter 5 Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000
3.
Enter the name of the project and select your controller from the Type drop down menu. For this example, a Cat. No. 1769-L35E and software revision 19 will be used. Then click OK.
4.
To add a new module to the tree, right-click on Ethernet and select
New Module. This allows you to add a new ArmorStart to the Logix
Project.
80
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 Chapter 5
5.
Select the ArmorStart in your application and click OK.
6.
The AOP is shown below. Enter a Name for this ArmorStart and an
Ethernet address. For this example, the Private Network setting will be used. This should be set to match the IP address switch setting on the
ArmorStart. Then press OK.
Note:
Refer to Configuring EtherNet/ IP Address in Chapter 4 to set an
IP address on the device.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
81
Chapter 5 Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000
Connect and Configure
ArmorStart with Add-On-
Profile (AOP)
This section will show the AOP tabs and how they can be used to connect, obtain status, and configure the ArmorStart. Before the walkthrough is started, the
RSLogix 5000 software should be open and an AOP displayed as shown below.
82
The screenshot above displays that the AOP has seven tabs that can be used to configure and/or monitor your ArmorStart. The following lists the tabs and whether or not they are editable with the controller when OFFLINE, ONLINE, or both:
• General – OFFLINE
• Connection – OFFLINE
• Module Info – ONLINE
• Parameters – OFFLINE/ONLINE
Internet Protocol
– ONLINE
• Port Configuration – ONLINE
• Network – ONLINE
The last five tabs in the list will not display information until the ONLINE connection has been established with the ArmorStart. The General, Connection, and Parameters tabs will be discussed first because they are used to define
OFFLINE settings so that connection with the ArmorStart can be established.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Offline Connection
Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 Chapter 5
General Tab
Click on the General tab to display the following:
This tab allows you to name your module, which should be descriptive and representative of the module. The IP Address of the module must also be input so that communication can be established. The IP Address should be the one defined using the BootP/DHCP Server, the Rotary Network Address Switches or the ArmorStart internal web server.
For the majority of cases, the Host Name and Module Definition section of this tab do not require any adjustment. Changes to either of these should only be made if you are familiar with the functionality of each of these sections.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
83
Chapter 5 Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000
Connection Tab
Click on the Connection tab to display the following:
The Request Packet Interval (RPI) indicates the maximum frequency at which data will be received. It is possible that data could come more quickly than the time interval assigned in the RPI. In the majority of cases, the default 20 ms should be the optimal setting. If you check the Inhibit Module option, connection to controller tags will be broken. The Major Fault on Controller if
Connection Fails While in Run Mode option should be checked to ensure that the controller processes the connection fault with the ArmorStart. The Use
Unicast Connection over EtherNet/IP is checked to use the Unicast mode instead of the EtherNet/IP mode. This appears only for modules using
RSLogix 5000 software version 18 or later which supports Unicast.
84
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 Chapter 5
Parameters Tab
Click on the Parameters tab to display the following:
Online Connection
The parameters are divided into groups based on the type of ArmorStart. By clicking in the Group drop down menu you can choose which parameter group is displayed. When the Parameters tab is selected, the tab defaults to the Drive
Setup (Bulletin 284E) or Starter Setup (Bulletin 280E) groups depending on the
ArmorStart. These Setup groups are the minimum required parameters to get the
ArmorStart running.
After this parameter group has been set, the next time that the Parameters tab is opened, all of the parameters will be shown and the tab will no longer default to the setup groups.
Now that the offline connection settings have been set, connect to the
ArmorStart and review the last five AOP tabs.
Note:
If you are using a Cat. No. 1756-ENBT Ethernet module to communicate with the PLC, verify that you have updated the module’s firmware to Revision 6.001 or later. The latest firmware can be found at http://support.rockwellautomation.com/ controlflash/ .
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
85
Chapter 5 Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000
1.
If a controller path is not set in the field shown below, you must first set a path before going online with the controller. Click on the RSwho button shown below.
2.
Expand and browse the AB_ETHIP-1, Ethernet driver.
3.
Select the Controller path. Then click Go Online.
86
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 Chapter 5
4.
The following will appear and for this example, click on Download to connect to the controller.
5.
If a download confirmation dialog box appears, click Download again.
6.
Click Yes to bring the controller back to Remote Run.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
87
Chapter 5 Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000
7.
The controller should now be online. If at any point you go offline and a path is selected, you can also go online by clicking the Offline drop down in the upper left corner of the screen. Click on Go Online to connect to the ArmorStart, as shown below.
Note:
If a yellow triangle appears next to the ArmorStart Icon in the
Controller Organizer Tree as shown below, it means that the connection is faulted. The problem must be fixed before you can connect to the
ArmorStart. The next steps assume that the connection was successful.
88
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 Chapter 5
Parameters Tab
Return to the Parameters tab again once the AOP is opened by selecting the
ArmorStart in the project tree. Notice that when clicking in the Parameters tab, an ArmorStart Correlation pop-up window is displayed, as shown below.
This indicates that the AOP is comparing the parameter data entered offline vs. the parameter data stored in the ArmorStart. If any discrepancies are found between the parameters in the AOP and the parameters in the ArmorStart, a window will pop-up, as shown below, asking you to decide which parameters you want to keep.
If you want to keep the parameters in the AOP, select Download. If you want to keep the parameters in the ArmorStart, select Upload. Otherwise, select Cancel.
Clicking Cancel will lock the user out of viewing the values. If you are connected
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
89
Chapter 5 Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 to a new ArmorStart and you just created the ArmorStart object and have not made any changes in the parameters, the ArmorStart correlation should not find any discrepancy.
Note:
If you make any changes to the parameters offline, they will not be downloaded to the ArmorStart when the connection is made (going Online). For the Offline changes to take effect you must go to the Parameters tab. Once you click the Parameters tab, ArmorStart correlation will take place and then the changes can be downloaded to the ArmorStart.
Module Info Tab
Click on the Module Info tab to display the following:
90
This tab will display general identification information, as well as status information about the ArmorStart. It is important to note that the information displayed in this tab will not be constantly updated. After you click on the
Module Info tab, the AOP queries the ArmorStart once for the information displayed in this tab and does not query the ArmorStart for the values again. If after the initial query the status of the ArmorStart changes, for example a fault occurs, the change in the status will not be automatically updated. The Refresh button must be pressed to request the AOP for another ArmorStart query.
Note:
A connection status (offline, online, downloading or uploading) is provided at the bottom left of the tab window. The connection status appears in all the tabs.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 Chapter 5
Internet Protocol Tab
Click on the Internet Protocol tab to display the following:
If the IP address was set up using the Rotary Network Address Switches, default settings for the IP would already be established and you will not be able to make any changes in this tab. In most cases, you would not need to make any changes in this tab and it will only display the current IP Settings Configuration.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
91
Chapter 5 Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000
Port Configuration Tab
Click on the Port Configuration tab to display the following:
This tab is used to enable or disable a physical port in the module. The ports will normally be in Auto Negotiate mode, which in general, is the recommended setting. Otherwise, you have to physically set the Speed or Duplex selection in this tab. It is important to note that although there are two physical ports, they act as one. Therefore, when you press either of the Port Diagnostic buttons, information coming from both of the physical ports will be displayed.
92
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Network Tab
Click on this tab to display the following:
Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 Chapter 5
This tab displays information about the network configuration, such as the type of topology (linear or device level ring).
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
93
Chapter 5 Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000
Auto-Generated Tags
After you install and configure the AOP, the controller tags are generated. The tags names are descriptive and automatically generated. This greatly simplifies programming. The figure below shows an example of the auto-generated tags for ArmorStart
.
94
The following tables provide more clarification regarding the Produce and
Consume assemblies and how they correlate with the auto-generated names.
Using an AOP the data in the Consumed and Produced Assemblies are automatically created as descriptive tag names. To drive this point home we've highlighted a few of the commands to demonstrate the AOP tag alignment to the Consumed and Produced Assemblies in the following tables.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 Chapter 5
Table 5 - Default Consume Assembly for Bulletin 284E
Byte Bit 7
3
4
1 DriveInput4
2
5
Pt07DeviceIn
Pt15DeviceIn
Bit 6
DriveInput3
Instance 166 Consumed Inverter Type Starter with Network Inputs
Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2
—
DriveInput2
JogReverse
DriveInput1
JogForward
DecelCtrl_1
ResetFault
DecelCtrl_0
Pt06DeviceIn
Pt14DeviceIn
Pt05DeviceIn
Pt13DeviceIn
FreqCommand (Low) (xxx.x Hz)
FreqCommand (High) (xxx.x Hz)
Pt04DeviceIn
Pt12DeviceIn
Pt03DeviceIn
Pt11DeviceIn
Pt02DeviceIn
Pt10DeviceIn
Bit 1
RunReverse
AccelCtrl_1
Pt01DeviceIn
Pt9DeviceIn
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
Controller Name
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
Table 6 - Bulletin 284E Consume Assembly Command Tags
DriveInput4
FreqCommand
Pt00DeviceIn
Pt01DeviceIn
Pt02DeviceIn
Pt03DeviceIn
Pt04DeviceIn
Pt05DeviceIn
Pt06DeviceIn
Pt07DeviceIn
Pt08DeviceIn
Pt09DeviceIn
Pt10DeviceIn
OutB
AccelCtrl_0
AccelCtrl_1
DecelCtrl_0
DecelCtrl_1
DriveInput1
DriveInput2
DriveInput3
Name
Controller Output/ Command Tags
Logix Tag Name
RunForward
RunReverse
AS_DEMO:O.RunForward
AS_DEMO:O.RunReverse
ResetFault
JogForward
JogReverse
OutA
AS_DEMO:O.ResetFault
AS_DEMO:O.JogForward
AS_DEMO:O.JogReverse
AS_DEMO:O.OutA
AS_DEMO:O.OutB
AS_DEMO:O.AccelCtrl_0
AS_DEMO:O.AccelCtrl_1
AS_DEMO:O.DecelCtrl_0
AS_DEMO:O.DecelCtrl_1
AS_DEMO:O.DriveInput1
AS_DEMO:O.DriveInput2
AS_DEMO:O.DriveInput3
AS_DEMO:O.DriveInput4
AS_DEMO:O.FreqCommand
AS_DEMO:O.Pt00DeviceIn
AS_DEMO:O.Pt01DeviceIn
AS_DEMO:O.Pt02DeviceIn
AS_DEMO:O.Pt03DeviceIn
AS_DEMO:O.Pt04DeviceIn
AS_DEMO:O.Pt05DeviceIn
AS_DEMO:O.Pt06DeviceIn
AS_DEMO:O.Pt07DeviceIn
AS_DEMO:O.Pt08DeviceIn
AS_DEMO:O.Pt09DeviceIn
AS_DEMO:O.Pt10DeviceIn
Bit 0
RunForward
AccelCtrl_0
Pt00DeviceIn
Pt8DeviceIn
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
95
Chapter 5 Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000
Controller Name
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
Controller Output/ Command Tags
Name
Pt11DeviceIn
Logix Tag Name
AS_DEMO:O.Pt11DeviceIn
Pt12DeviceIn
Pt13DeviceIn
Pt14DeviceIn
AS_DEMO:O.Pt12DeviceIn
AS_DEMO:O.Pt13DeviceIn
AS_DEMO:O.Pt14DeviceIn
Table 7 - Default Produce Assembly for Bulletin 284E
12
13
10
11
8
9
6
7
14
15
16
17
Byte
2
3
0
1
4
5
Bit 7 Bit 6
Produce Assembly - Instance 151 “Drive Status” - Bulletin284E Starters
Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1
Reserved - {name}:I.Fault
Reserved - {name}:I.Fault
Reserved - {name}:I.Fault
Reserved - {name}:I.Fault
AtReference
Output
ContactorStatus
Network
ReferenceStatus
Brake
ContactorStatus
NetControlStatus
DisconnectClosed
Ready
Hand
RunningReverse
In3
RunningForward
In2
WarningPresent
In1
Pt07DeviceOut Pt06DeviceOut
LogicEnable Pt14DeviceOut
Pt05DeviceOut
Pt13DeviceOut
OutputFrequency (Low) (xxx.x Hz)
OutputFrequency (High) (xxx.x Hz)
Pt04DeviceOut
Pt12DeviceOut
Pt03DeviceOut
Pt11DeviceOut
Pt02DeviceOut
P10DeviceOut
Pt01DeviceOut
Pt09DeviceOut
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 13 Prod Assy Word 0" (low byte)" - Int00DeviceOut
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 13 Prod Assy Word 0" (high byte)" - Int00DeviceOut
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 14 Prod Assy Word 1" (low byte)" - Int01DeviceOut
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 14 Prod Assy Word 1" (high byte)" - Int01DeviceOut
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 15 Prod Assy Word 2" (low byte)" - Int02DeviceOut
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 15 Prod Assy Word 2" (high byte)" - Int02DeviceOut
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 16 Prod Assy Word 3" (low byte)" - Int03DeviceOut
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 16 Prod Assy Word 3" (high byte)" - Int03DeviceOut
Bit 0
TripPresent
In0
Pt00DeviceOut
Pt08DeviceOut
Table 8 - Bulletin 284E Produced Assembly Status Tags
Controller Name
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
Name
Fault
TripPresent
Controller Input/ Status Tags
Logix Tag Name
AS_DEMO:I.Fault
AS_DEMO:I.TripPresent
WarningPresent
RunningForward
RunningReverse
AS_DEMO:I.WarningPresent
AS_DEMO:I.RunningForward
AS_DEMO:I.RunningReverse
96
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 Chapter 5
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
Controller Name
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
AS_DEMO
Pt02DeviceOut
Pt03DeviceOut
Pt04DeviceOut
Pt05DeviceOut
Pt06DeviceOut
Pt07DeviceOut
Pt08DeviceOut
Pt09DeviceOut
Pt10DeviceOut
Pt11DeviceOut
Pt12DeviceOut
Pt13DeviceOut
Pt14DeviceOut
LogicEnabled
Int00DeviceOut
Int01DeviceOut
Int02DeviceOut
Int03DeviceOut
Controller Input/ Status Tags
Name
Ready
NetworkControlStatus
NetworkReferenceStatus
Logix Tag Name
AS_DEMO:I.Ready
AS_DEMO:I.NetworkControlStatus
AS_DEMO:I.NetworkReferenceStatus
AtReference
In0
In1
In2
AS_DEMO:I.AtReference
AS_DEMO:I.In0
AS_DEMO:I.In1
AS_DEMO:I.In2
In3
Hand
DisconnectClosed
BrakeContactorStatus
OutputContactorStatus
OutputFrequency
Pt00DeviceOut
Pt01DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.In3
AS_DEMO:I.Hand
AS_DEMO:I.DisconnectClosed
AS_DEMO:I.BrakeContactorStatus
AS_DEMO:I.OutputContactorStatus
AS_DEMO:I.OutputFrequency
AS_DEMO:I.Pt00DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Pt01DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Pt02DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Pt03DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Pt04DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Pt05DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Pt06DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Pt07DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Pt08DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Pt09DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Pt10DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Pt11DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Pt12DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Pt13DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Pt14DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.LogicEnabled
AS_DEMO:I.Int00DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Int01DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Int02DeviceOut
AS_DEMO:I.Int03DeviceOut
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
97
Chapter 5 Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000
Table 9 - Bulletin 284E Consume Assembly/Command Tag Explanation
FreqCommand
Pt00DeviceIn
Pt01DeviceIn
Pt02DeviceIn
Pt03DeviceIn
Pt04DeviceIn
Pt05DeviceIn
Pt06DeviceIn
Pt07DeviceIn
Pt08DeviceIn
Pt09DeviceIn
Pt10DeviceIn
Pt11DeviceIn
Pt12DeviceIn
Pt13DeviceIn
Pt14DeviceIn
Pt15DeviceIn
AccelCtrl_0
AccelCtrl_1
DecelCtrl_0
DecelCtrl_1
DriveInput1
DriveInput2
DriveInput3
DriveInput4
Controller Output/ Command Tags Tag Description/Use
RunForward Command VFD forward
RunReverse
ResetFault
Command VFD reverse
Fault reset
JogForward
JogReverse
OutA
OutB
Command Jog forward per internal frequency
Command Jog reverse per internal frequency
Output A
Output B
VFD acceleration ramp 1
VFD acceleration ramp 2
VFD deceleration ramp 1
VFD deceleration ramp 2
VFD Digit Input 1
VFD Digit Input 2
VFD Digit Input 3
VFD Digit Input 4
Logix commanded frequency
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
98
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 Chapter 5
Table 10 - Bulletin 284E Produced Assembly/Status Tag Explanation
BrakeContactorStatus
OutputContactorStatus
OutputFrequency
Pt00DeviceOut
Pt01DeviceOut
Pt02DeviceOut
Pt03DeviceOut
Pt04DeviceOut
Pt05DeviceOut
Pt06DeviceOut
Pt07DeviceOut
Pt08DeviceOut
Pt09DeviceOut
Pt10DeviceOut
Pt11DeviceOut
Pt12DeviceOut
Controller Input/ Status Tags Tag Description/Use
Fault Communication Fault between PLC and Device (all 1's = Fault, all 0's = Normal)
TripPresent
WarningPresent
Fault exisits with unit
Warning of potential fault
RunningForward
RunningReverse
Ready
NetworkControlStatus
Motor commanded to run forward
Motor commanded to run reverse
Control Power and 3-phase present
Start and Stop command comes from network (PLC or Connected Explicit Messaging)
NetworkReferenceStatus
AtReference
In0
In1
In2
In3
Hand
DisconnectClosed
Speed reference comes from the network (not DeviceLogix)
At commanded speed reference
Input 0
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
HOA is in Auto mode
Disconnect is closed
Pt13DeviceOut
Pt14DeviceOut
LogicEnabled
Int00DeviceOut
Int01DeviceOut
Int02DeviceOut
Int03DeviceOut
Source brake contactor status (1=close, 0=open)
Ouput contactor status (1=close, 0=open)
VFD frequency
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix is enabled
Data reference by Parameter 13
Data reference by Parameter 14
Data reference by Parameter 15
Data reference by Parameter 16
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
99
Chapter 5 Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000
Table 13 -
100
Byte
0
1
2
3
Byte
Table 11 - Default Consume Assembly for Bulletin 280E/281E
Byte
0
1
2
Instance 162 Default Consumed DOL and Reversing Starter
Bit 7
OutB
Bit 6
OutA
Bit 5
—
Bit 4
—
Bit 3
—
Bit 2
ResetFault
Bit 1
RunReverse
Bit 0
RunForward
Pt07DeviceIn Pt06DeviceIn Pt05DeviceIn Pt04DeviceIn Pt03DeviceIn Pt02DeviceIn Pt01DeviceIn Pt00DeviceIn
Pt15DeviceIn Pt14DeviceIn Pt13DeviceIn Pt12DeviceIn Pt11DeviceIn Pt10DeviceIn Pt09DeviceIn Pt08DeviceIn
Table 12 - Bulletin 280E/281E Controller Output/Command Tags
Controller Name
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
Name Logix Tag Name
RunForward DEMO_REV:O.RunForward
RunReverse DEMO_REV:O.RunReverse
ResetFault DEMO_REV:O.ResetFault
OutA DEMO_REV:O.OutA
OutB DEMO_REV:O.OutB
Pt00DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt00DeviceIn
Pt01DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt01DeviceIn
Pt02DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt02DeviceIn
Pt03DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt03DeviceIn
Pt04DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt04DeviceIn
Pt05DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt05DeviceIn
Pt06DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt06DeviceIn
Pt07DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt07DeviceIn
Pt08DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt08DeviceIn
Pt09DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt09DeviceIn
Pt10DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt10DeviceIn
Pt11DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt11DeviceIn
Pt12DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt12DeviceIn
Pt13DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt13DeviceIn
Pt14DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt14DeviceIn
Pt15DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt15DeviceIn
Bit 7
Bit 7
Instance 150 "Starter Stat" - Default Status Assembly for Bulletin 280E/281E Starters
Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2
Bit 6 Bit 5
Reserved - {name}:I.Fault
Reserved - {name}:I.Fault
Reserved - {name}:I.Fault
Reserved - {name}:I.Fault
Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Bit 1
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit 0
Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 Chapter 5
13
14
15
11
12
9
10
Byte
4
7
8
5
6
Bit 7
—
Instance 150 "Starter Stat" - Default Status Assembly for Bulletin 280E/281E Starters
Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1
— — Ready RunningForward WarningPresent
Bit 0
TripPresent
Hand In3 In2 In1 In0
Pt07DeviceOut Pt06DeviceOut Pt05DeviceOut Pt04DeviceOut Pt03DeviceOut Pt02DeviceOut Pt01DeviceOut Pt00DeviceOut
LogicEnable Pt14DeviceOut Pt13DeviceOut Pt12DeviceOut Pt11DeviceOut Pt10DeviceOut Pt09DeviceOut Pt08DeviceOut
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 13 Prod Assy Word 0" (low byte)" - ProducedWord0Param
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 13 Prod Assy Word 0" (high byte)" - ProducedWord0Param
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 14 Prod Assy Word 1" (low byte)" - ProducedWord1Param
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 14 Prod Assy Word 1" (high byte)" - ProducedWord1Param
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 15 Prod Assy Word 2" (low byte)" - ProducedWord2Param
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 15 Prod Assy Word 2" (high byte)" - ProducedWord2Param
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 16 Prod Assy Word 3" (low byte)" - ProducedWord3Param
Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 16 Prod Assy Word 3" (high byte)" - ProducedWord3Param
Table 14 - Bulletin 280E/281E Controller Input/ Status Tags
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
Controller Name
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
Name Logix Tag Name
Fault DEMO_REV:I.Fault
TripPresent DEMO_REV:I.TripPresent
WarningPresent DEMO_REV:I.WarningPresent
RunningForward DEMO_REV:I.RunningForward
RunningReverse DEMO_REV:I.RunningReverse
Ready DEMO_REV:I.Ready
In0 DEMO_REV:I.In0
In1 DEMO_REV:I.In1
In2 DEMO_REV:I.In2
In3 DEMO_REV:I.In3
Hand DEMO_REV:I.Hand
DisconnectClosed DEMO_REV:I.DisconnectClosed
Pt00DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt00DeviceOut
Pt01DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt01DeviceOut
Pt02DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt02DeviceOut
Pt03DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt03DeviceOut
Pt04DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt04DeviceOut
Pt05DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt05DeviceOut
Pt06DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt06DeviceOut
Pt07DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt07DeviceOut
Pt08DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt08DeviceOut
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
101
Chapter 5 Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000
Controller Name
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
Name Logix Tag Name
Pt09DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt09DeviceOut
Pt10DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt10DeviceOut
Pt11DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt11DeviceOut
Pt12DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt12DeviceOut
Pt13DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt13DeviceOut
Pt14DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt14DeviceOut
LogicEnabled DEMO_REV:I.LogicEnabled
ProducedWord0Param DEMO_REV:I.ProducedWord0Param
ProducedWord1Param DEMO_REV:I.ProducedWord1Param
ProducedWord2Param DEMO_REV:I.ProducedWord2Param
ProducedWord3Param DEMO_REV:I.ProducedWord3Param
Table 15 - Bulletin 280E/281E Consume Assembly
Command Tag Explanation
Controller Output/ Command Tags
RunForward
RunReverse
ResetFault
OutA
OutB
Pt00DeviceIn
Pt01DeviceIn
Pt02DeviceIn
Pt03DeviceIn
Pt04DeviceIn
Pt05DeviceIn
Pt06DeviceIn
Pt07DeviceIn
Pt08DeviceIn
Pt09DeviceIn
Pt10DeviceIn
Pt11DeviceIn
Pt12DeviceIn
Pt13DeviceIn
Pt14DeviceIn
Pt15DeviceIn
Tag Description/Use
Command VFD forward
Command VFD reverse
Fault reset
OutputA
OutputB
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
102
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000 Chapter 5
Pt05DeviceOut
Pt06DeviceOut
Pt07DeviceOut
Pt08DeviceOut
Pt09DeviceOut
Pt10DeviceOut
Pt11DeviceOut
Pt12DeviceOut
Pt13DeviceOut
Pt14DeviceOut
LogicEnabled
ProducedWord0Param
ProducedWord1Param
ProducedWord2Param
ProducedWord3Param
TripPresent
WarningPresent
RunningForward
RunningReverse
Ready
In0
In1
In2
In3
Hand
DisconnectClosed
Pt00DeviceOut
Pt01DeviceOut
Pt02DeviceOut
Pt03DeviceOut
Pt04DeviceOut
Table 16 - Bulletin 280E/281E Produced Assembly
Status Tag Explanation
Controller Input/Status Tags
Fault
Tag Description/Use
Communication Fault between PLC and Device (all 1's =
Fault, all 0's = Normal)
Fault exisits with unit
Warning of potential fault
Motor commanded to run forward
Motor commanded to run reverse
Control Power and 3-phase present
Input 0
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
HOA is in Auto mode
Disconnect is closed
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix is enabled
Data reference by Parameter 13
Data reference by Parameter 14
Data reference by Parameter 15
Data reference by Parameter 16
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
103
Chapter 5 Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix 5000
Notes:
104
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Introduction
Chapter
6
Optional HOA Keypad Operation
This chapter provides a basic understanding of the programming of the factory- installed optional built-in Hand/Off/Auto (HOA) keypad. The HOA keypad can be programmed for maintained or momentary operation.
Figure 64 - Optional HOA Keypads
Available on Bulletin 280E
Keypad Description
Available on Bulletin 281E
Available on Bulletin 284E
The keys found on the optional HOA keypads are described below:
Table 17 - HOA Keypad – Key Description
HAND
The Hand key will initiate starter operation
AUTO
The Auto key allows for Start/Stop control via the communications network
OFF
If the starter is running, pressing the OFF key will cause the starter to stop.
REV
The REV key selects reverse direction of the motor
FWD
The FWD key selects forward direction of the motor
DIR Arrow
The Dir arrow selects the direction of the motor, either forward or reverse.
JOG
When pressed, JOG will be initiated if no other control devices are sending a stop command. Releasing the key will cause the drive to stop, using selected stop mode.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
105
Chapter 6 Optional HOA Keypad Operation
Figure 65 - Bulletin 280E/281E Hand -Off-Auto Selector Keypad
.
The following state transition matrix summarizes the HOA Keypad when
Parameter 45 “Keypad Mode” is set to 1=momentary.
HAND FWD AUTO HAND STOP
Command motor OFF and transition to “AUTO”
Ignore Ignore
Command motor ON and transition to “HAND FWD”
Ignore Ignore
Ignore
Command motor OFF and transition to “HAND STOP”
Command motor OFF and transition to “HAND STOP”
.
The following state transition matrix summarizes the HOA Keypad when Parameter 45 “Keypad Mode” is set to 0=maintained.
NO KEY PRESSED
HAND STOP
Ignore
HAND FWD
Command motor OFF and transition to “HAND STOP”
AUTO
Ignore
Command motor OFF and transition to “AUTO”
Ignore Ignore
Command motor ON and transition to “HAND FWD”
Ignore Ignore
Ignore
Command motor OFF and transition to “HAND STOP”
Command motor OFF and transition to “HAND STOP”
Figure 66 - Bulletin 281E Hand-Off-Auto Selector Keypad with
Forward/Reverse Function
106
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Optional HOA Keypad Operation Chapter 6
HAND STOP
Set FWD LED
The following state transition matrix summarizes the HOA behavior when
Parameter 45 “Keypad Mode” is set to 1=momentary.
HAND FWD
Ignore
HAND REV
Ignore
AUTO
Set FWD LED
NO KEY
PRESSED
Set REV LED Ignore Ignore Set REV LED
Command motor OFF and transition to
“AUTO”
If (FWD LED) transition to
“HAND FWD”
If (REV LED) transition to “HAND REV”
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Command motor OFF and transition to
“HAND STOP”
Command motor OFF and transition to
“HAND STOP”
Command motor OFF and transition to
“HAND STOP”
HAND STOP
Ignore
Set FWD LED
The following state transition matrix summarizes the HOA behavior when
Parameter 45 “Keypad Mode” is set to 0=maintained.
HAND FWD
Command motor OFF and transition to
“HAND STOP”
HAND REV
Command motor OFF and transition to
“HAND STOP”
Ignore Ignore
AUTO
Ignore
Set FWD LED
Set REV LED Ignore Ignore Set REV LED
Command motor OFF and transition to
“AUTO”
If (FWD LED) transition to
“HAND FWD”
If (REV LED) transition to “HAND REV”
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Command motor OFF and transition to
“HAND STOP”
Command motor OFF and transition to
“HAND STOP”
Command motor OFF and transition to
“HAND STOP”
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
107
Chapter 6 Optional HOA Keypad Operation
Figure 67 - Bulletin 284E Hand-Off-Auto Selector Keypad with JOG and
Direction Arrow Functions
The following state transition matrix summarizes the Jog/HOA behavior when
Parameter 45 “Keypad Mode” is set to 1 = momentary.
HAND STOP
If (FWD LED) Set REV LED
Else If (REV LED) Set FWD LED
HAND FWD
If (FWD LED)
Set REV LED
Else If (REV LED)
Set FWD LED
Ignore
HAND REV
If (FWD LED)
Set REV LED
Else If (REV LED)
Set FWD LED
Ignore
JOG FWD
Ignore
JOG REV
Ignore
AUTO
Ignore
If (FWD LED) transition to JOG FWD
If (REV LED) transition to JOG REV
Ignore Ignore Ignore
No Key Pressed
Command motor OFF and transition to AUTO
If (FWD LED) transition to
HAND FWD
Else If (REV LED) transition to
HAND REV
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Command motor
OFF and transition to HAND STOP
Ignore
Command motor
OFF and transition to HAND STOP
Command motor
OFF and transition to HAND STOP
Command motor
OFF and transition to HAND STOP
Command motor
OFF and transition to HAND STOP
Command motor
OFF and transition to HAND STOP
Ignore
Command motor
OFF and transition to HAND STOP
108
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Keypad and HOA Disable
Optional HOA Keypad Operation Chapter 6
No Key Pressed
The following state transition matrix summarizes the Jog/HOA behavior when
Parameter 45 “Keypad Mode” is set to 0 = maintained.
HAND STOP
Ignore
HAND FWD
Command motor
OFF and transition to HAND STOP
HAND REV
Command motor
OFF and transition to HAND STOP
JOG FWD
Command motor
OFF and transition to HAND STOP
JOG REV
Command motor
OFF and transition to HAND STOP
Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore
AUTO
Ignore
If (FWD LED) Set REV LED
Else If (REV LED) Set FWD LED
If (FWD LED) transition to JOG FWD
If (REV LED) Transition to JOG REV
Command motor OFF and Transition to AUTO
If (FWD LED) transition to
HAND FWD
If (REV LED) transition to HAND REV
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore
Command motor
OFF and transition to HAND STOP
Command motor
OFF and transition to HAND STOP
Command motor
OFF and transition to HAND STOP
Command motor
OFF and transition to HAND STOP
Command motor
OFF and transition to HAND STOP
Note:
In nearly all instances, if the processor detects multiple buttons are pressed at the same time, the software interprets this as a “no button pressed” condition.
The only exception to this rule is if multiple buttons are pressed and one of them is the “OFF” button. If the “OFF” button is pressed in combination with any combination of other buttons, the processor will interpret this the same as if the
“OFF” button were pressed by itself.
Parameter 46 “Keypad Disable”, disables the “HAND”, “FWD”, “REV” and “Jog” buttons on the HOA keypad. The “OFF” and “AUTO” buttons are always enabled, even if Parameter 46 is set to “1=Disable”.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
109
Chapter 6 Optional HOA Keypad Operation
Notes:
110
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Chapter
7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E
Programmable Parameters
Basic Setup Parameters
To configure the basic ArmorStart functionality refer to Table 18 below. These are the minimum setup configurations required for Bulletin 280E/281E or
Bulletin 284E. There are additional capabilities and motor protection that are not enabled or left at their default values.
Table 18 - Quick Parameter Setup
Bulletin 280E/281E
106 FLA Setting
107 Overload Class
108 OL Reset Level
Bulletin 284E
131 Motor NP Volts
132 Motor NP Hertz
133 Motor OL Current
134 Minimum Freq
135 Maximum Freq
137 Stop Mode
138 Speed Reference
139 Accel Time 1
140 Decel Time 1
Parameter Groups
Basic Status
1 Hdw Inputs
2 DeviceIn Data
3 DeviceOut Data
4 Trip Status
5 Starter Status
6 InternalLinkStat
7 Starter Command
22 Breaker Type
56 Base Enclosure
57 Base Options
58 Wiring Options
59 Starter Enclosure
60 Starter Options
61 Last Pr Fault
62 Warning Status
63 Base Trip
Common to Bulletin 280E/281E and Bulletin 284E Units
Produced Assembly
Config Group
13 Int00DeviceOut Cfg
14 Int01DeviceOut Cfg
15 Int02DeviceOut Cfg
16 Int03DeviceOut Cfg
Starter Protection
23 Pr FltResetMode
24 Pr Fault Enable
25 Pr Fault Reset
26 Str Net FltState
27 Str Net FltValue
28 Str Net IdlState
29 Str Net IdlValue
User I/O Config
30 Anti-bounce On Delay
31 Anti-bounce OFF Delay
32 In Sink/Source
33 OutA Pr FltState
34 OutA Pr FltValue
35 OutA Net FltState
36 OutA Net FltValue
37 OutA Net IdlState
38 OutA Net IdlValue
39 OutB Pr FltState
40 OutB Pr FltValue
41 OutB Net FltState
42 OutB Net FltValue
43 OutB Net IdlState
44 OutB Net IdlValue
Bulletin 284E
Units Only
Miscellaneous Config
8 Network Override
9 Comm Override
45 Keypad Mode
46 Keypad Disable
47 Set To Defaults
Drive I/O Config
48 Drive Control
49 DrvIn Pr FltState
50 DrvIn Pr FltValue
51 DrvIn Net FltState
52 DrvIn Net FltValue
53 DrvIn Net IdlState
54 DrvIn Net IdlValue
55 High Speed Enable
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
111
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Bulletin280E/281E
Units Only
Starter Display
101 Phase A Current
102 Phase B Current
103 Phase C Current
104 Average Current
105 Therm Utilized
Starter Setup
106 FLA Setting
107 Overload Class
108 OL Reset Level
Drive Display
101 Output Freq
102 Commanded Freq
103 Output Current
104 Output Voltage
105 DC Bus Voltage
106 Drive Status
107 Fault 1 Code
108 Fault 2 Code
109 Fault 3 Code
110 Process Display
112 Control Source
113 Contrl In Status
114 Dig In Status
115 Comm Status
116 Control SW Ver
117 Drive Type
118 Elapsed Run Time
119 Testpoint Data
122 Output Power
123 Output Power Fctr
124 Drive Temp
125 Counter Status
126 Timer Status
128 StpLogic Status
129 Torque Current
Drive Setup
131 Motor NP Volts
132 Motor NP Hertz
133 Motor OL Current
134 Minimum Freq
135 Maximum Freq
136 Start Source
137 Stop Mode
138 Speed Reference
139 Accel Time 1
140 Decel Time 1
141 Reset To Defaults
143 Motor OL Ret
Bulletin 284E Units Only
Drive Advanced Setup
151 Digital In 1 Sel
152 Digital In 2 Sel
153 Digital In 3 Sel
154 Digital In 4 Sel
155 Relay Out Sel
156 Relay Out Level
167 Accel Time 2
168 Decel Time 2
169 Internal Freq
170 Preset Freq 0
171 Preset Freq 1
172 Preset Freq 2
173 Preset Freq 3
174 Preset Freq 4
175 Preset Freq 5
176 Preset Freq 6
177 Preset Freq 7
178 Jog Frequency
179 Jog Accel/Decel
180 DC Brake Time
181 DC Brake Level
182 DB Resistor Sel
183 S Curve %
184 Boost Select
185 Start Boost
186 Brake Voltage
187 Brake Frequency
188 Maximum Voltage
189 Current Limit 1
190 Motor OL Select
191 PWM Frequency
192 Auto Rstrt Tries
193 Auto Rstrt Delay
194 Start At PowerUp
195 Reverse Disable
196 Flying Start En
197 Compensation
198 SW Current Trip
199 Process Factor
200 Fault Clear
201 Program Lock
202 Testpoint Sel
205 Comm Loss Action
206 Comm Loss Time
214 Slip Hertz @ FLA
215 Process Time Lo
216 Process Time Hi
217 Bus Reg Mode
218 Current Limit 2
219 Skip Frequency
220 Skip Freq Band
221 Stall Fault Time
224 Var PWM Disable
225 Torque Perf Mode
226 Motor NP FLA
227 Autotune
228 IR Voltage Drop
229 Flux Current Ref
230 PID Trim Hi
231 PID Trim Lo
232 PID Ref Sel
233 PID Feedback Sel
234 PID Prop Gain
235 PID Integ Time
236 PID Diff Rate
237 PID Setpoint
238 PID Deadband
239 PID Preload
240 StpLogic 0
241 StpLogic 1
242 StpLogic 2
243 StpLogic 3
244 StpLogic 4
245 StpLogic 5
246 StpLogic 6
247 StpLogic 7
250 StpLogic Time 0
251 StpLogic Time 1
252 StpLogic Time 2
253 StpLogic Time 3
254 StpLogic Time 4
255 StpLogic Time 5
256 StpLogic Time 6
257 StpLogic Time 7
260 EM Brk OFF Delay
261 EM Brk On Delay
262 MOP Reset Sel
263 DB Threshold
264 Comm Write Mode
267 PID Invert Error
112
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP
Parameters
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
Introduction
This chapter describes each programmable parameter and its function.
Parameter Programming
Each Distributed Motor Controller type will have a common set of parameters followed by a set of parameters that pertain to the individual starter type.
Parameters 1
…
100 are common to all ArmorStarts
IMPORTANT
Parameter setting changes take effect immediately unless otherwise noted in the parameter listing. These changes maybe immediate even during the "running" status.
Bulletin 280E/281E
Basic Status Group
Hdw Inputs
This parameter provides status of hardware inputs.
3
—
—
—
X
2
—
—
X
—
Bit
1
—
X
—
—
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
—
—
0
X
—
1
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
15
0
Function
In0
In1
In2
In3
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
113
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
DeviceIn Data
This parameter provides status of network device inputs.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
2
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
65535
0
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Function
Pt00DeviceIn
Pt01DeviceIn
Pt02DeviceIn
Pt03DeviceIn
Pt04DeviceIn
Pt05DeviceIn
Pt06DeviceIn
Pt07DeviceIn
Pt08DeviceIn
Pt09DeviceIn
Pt10DeviceIn
Pt11DeviceIn
Pt12DeviceIn
Pt13DeviceIn
Pt14DeviceIn
Pt15DeviceIn
114
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
DeviceOut Data
This parameter provides status of network device outputs.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
3
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
32767
0
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Function
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X Pt00DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — Pt01DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — Pt02DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — Pt03DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — Pt04DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — Pt05DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — Pt06DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — — Pt07DeviceOut
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — — Pt08DeviceOut
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — — Pt09DeviceOut
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — — Pt10DeviceOut
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — — Pt11DeviceOut
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — — Pt12DeviceOut
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — — Pt13DeviceOut
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Pt14DeviceOut
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Reserved
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
115
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Trip Status
This parameter provides trip identification.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
4
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
16383
0
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — X
X
X
X
—
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — —
— — — —
— — — — —
Function
Short Circuit
Overload
Phase Loss
Reserved
Reserved
Control Power
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — I/O Fault
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — — Over Temperature
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — — Phase Imbalance
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — — A3 Power Loss
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — —
Reserved
Reserved
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X X — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
EEprom
HW Fault
Reserved
116
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
Starter Status
This parameter provides the status of the starter.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
5
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
16383
0
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Function
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X TripPresent
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — WarningPresent
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — RunningForward
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — RunningReverse
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — —
Ready
Net Ctl Status
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — —
Reserved
At Reference
Reserved
Reserved
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — — Reserved
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — — Keypad Hand Mode
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — — HOA Status
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — — DisconnectClosed
X X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Reserved
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
117
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
InternalLinkStat
Status of the internal network connections.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
6
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
31
0
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — —
X X X X X X X X X X X — — — — —
Function:
Explicit Connection
I/O Connection
Explicit Fault
I/O Fault
I/O Idle
Reserved
Starter Command
The parameter provides the status of the starter command.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
— — — — — — —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
X —
— —
0
X
— — — —
— — — X
— —
— X
X
X
—
—
—
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— — — — — — —
Function:
Run Fwd
Run Rev
Fault Reset
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
OutA
OutB
7
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
255
0
118
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Breaker Type
This parameter identifies the Bulletin
140M used in this product.
0 = 140M-D8N-C10
1 = 140M-D8N-C25
Base Enclosure
Indicates the ArmorStart Base unit enclosure rating.
Bit 0 = IP67
Bit 1 = Reserved
Bit 2…15 = Reserved
Base Options
Indicates the options for the
ArmorStart Base unit.
Bit 0 = Output Fuse
Bit 1 = Reserved
Bit 2 = CP Fuse Detect
Bits 3…7 = Reserved
Bit 8 = 10A Base
Bit 9 = 25A Base
Bit 10…15 = Reserved
Wiring Options
Bit 0 = Conduit
Bit 1 = Round Media
Bit 2 = 28xG Gland
Bits 3…15 = Reserved
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
58
GET
WORD
Basic Status
4
0
—
0
57
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
517
0
56
GET
WORD
Basic Status
1
1
—
0
22
GET/SET
BOOL
Basic Status
1
0
—
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
119
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Starter Enclosure
Bit 0 = IP67
Bit 1 = Reserved
Bit 2 = Sil3/Cat4
Bit 3…15 = Reserved
Starter Options
Bit 0 = Full Keypad
Bit 1 = Reserved
Bit 2 = Source Brake
Bit 3 = Reserved
Bit 4 = Reserved
Bit 5 = Reserved
Bit 6 = Reserved
Bit 7 = Reserved
Bit 8 = Reserved
Bit 9…15 = Reserved
Last PR Fault
0 = None
1 = Hardware Short Circuit
2 = Software Short Circuit
3 = Motor Overload
4 = Reserved
5 = Phase Loss
6…12 = Reserved
13 = Control Power Loss
14 = Control Power Fuse
15 = I/O Short
16 = Output Fuse
17 = Overtemp
18 = Reserved
19 = Phase Imbalance
20 = Reserved
21 = A3 Power Loss
22 = Internal Comm
23…26 = Reserved
27 = MCB EEPROM
28 = Base EEPROM
29 = Reserved
30 = Wrong Base
31 = Wrong CTs
32…100 = Reserved
—
0
100
61
GET
UINT
Basic Status
0
60
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
66535
0
59
GET
WORD
Basic Status
4
1
—
0
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
120
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
Warning Status
This parameter warns the user of a condition, without faulting.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
62
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
65535
0
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X X — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Warning
Reserved
Reserved
Phase Loss
Reserved
Reserved
Control Power
I/O Warning
Reserved
Phase Imbalance
A3 Power Loss
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Hardware
Reserved
Base Trip
The parameter determines the status of the Base Module Trip Status.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
63
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
65535
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
121
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — —
X X X X X X X X X X X X — — — —
Warning
EEPROM Fault
Internal Comm
Hardware Fault
Control Module
Reserved
Produced Assembly Config Group
Int00DeviceOut Cfg
This parameter is used to specify
Int00DeviceOut of produced assembly
150 or 151.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Int01DeviceOut Cfg
This parameter is used to specify
Int01DeviceOut of produced assembly
150 or 151.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Int02DeviceOut Cfg
This parameter is used to specify
Int02DeviceOut of produced assembly
150 or 151.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
13
GET/SET
USINT
Produced Assembly Config
—
0
108
1
14
GET/SET
USINT
Produced Assembly Config
—
0
108
4
15
GET/SET
USINT
Produced Assembly Config
—
0
108
5
122
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
Int03DeviceOut Cfg
This parameter is used to specify
Int03DeviceOut of produced assembly
150 or 151.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Starter Protection Group
Pr FltReset Mode
This parameter configures the
Protection Fault reset mode.
0 = Manual
1 = Automatic
Pr Fault Enable
This parameter enables the Protection
Fault by setting the bit to 1.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
16
GET/SET
USINT
Produced Assembly Config
—
0
108
6
23
GET/SET
BOOL
Starter Protection
1
0
—
0
24
GET/SET
WORD
Starter Protection
—
12419
13287
12419
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
123
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Bit
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X
— — — — — — — — — — — — X —
— — — — — — — — — — — X — —
— — — — — — — — — — X — — —
— — — — — — — — — X — — — —
— — — — — — — — X — — — — —
— — — — — — — X — — — — — —
— — — — — — X — — — — — — —
— — — — — X — — — — — — — —
— — — — X — — — — — — — — —
— — — X — — — — — — — — — —
— — X — — — — — — — — — — —
— X — — — — — — — — — — — —
X — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Function
Short Circuit
Overload
Phase Loss
Reserved
Reserved
Control Power
I/O Fault
Over Temperature
Phase Imbalance
A3 Power Loss
Reserved
Reserved
EEprom
HW Fault
Pr Fault Reset
This parameter resets the Protection
Fault on a transition of
0 > 1.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
25
GET/SET
BOOL
Starter Protection
1
0
—
0
Str Net FltState
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 27 (Str Net FltValue) defines how the starter will respond when a fault occurs as determined by
Parameter 27. Allows Starter to hold last state or go to FltValue on
NetFaults.
0 = Goto Fault Value
1 = Hold Last State
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
26
GET/SET
BOOL
Starter Protection
1
0
—
0
124
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Str Net FltValue
This parameter determines how the starter will be commanded in the event of a fault. State the Starter will go to on a Net Flt if Parameter 26 (Str
Net FltState) = 0 (Goto Fault Value).
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Str Net IdlState
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 29 (Str Net IdlValue) defines how the starter will respond when a network is idle as determined by Parameter 29.
0 = Goto Idle Value
1 = Hold Last State
Str Net IdlValue
This parameter determines the state that starter assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 28 (Str
Net IdlState) is set to “0”.
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
User I/O Configuration Group
Anti-bounce On Delay
This parameter allows the installer to program a time duration before an input is reported “ON” (Anti-bounce).
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
27
GET
BOOL
Starter Protection
1
0
—
0
28
GET/SET
BOOL
Starter Protection
1
0
—
0
29
GET
BOOL
Starter Protection
1
0
—
0
30
GET/SET
UINT
User I/O Config.
ms
0
65
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
125
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Anti-bounce OFF Delay
This parameter allows the installer to program a time duration before an input is reported “OFF” (Anti-bounce).
In Sink/Source
This parameter allows the installer to program the inputs to be sink or source.
0 = Sink
1 = Source
OutA Pr FltState
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 34 (OutA Pr FltValue) defines how Output A will respond when a protection trip occurs.
0 = Goto Pr FltValue
1 = Ignore Pr Flt
When set to “1”, Output A continues to operate as command via the network.
When set to “0”, Output A will open or close as determined by setting in
Parameter 34.
OutA Pr FltValue
This parameter determines the state the Output A assumes when a trip occurs and Parameter 33 (OutA Pr
FltState) is set to “0”.
0 = Open
1 = Close
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
31
GET/SET
UINT
User I/O Config.
ms
0
65
0
32
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
33
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
34
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
126
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
OutA Net FltState
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 36 (OutA Net FltValue) defines how Output A will respond when a network fault occurs.
0 = Goto Net FltValue
1 = Hold Last State
When set to “1”, Output A will hold state prior to trip occurrence. When set to “0”, Output A will open or close as determined by setting in Parameter
36.
OutA Net FltValue
This parameter determines the state that Output A assumes when a network fault occurs and Parameter
35 (OutA Net FltState) is set to “0”.
0 = Open
1 = Close
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
OutA Net IdlState
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 38 (OutA Net IdlValue) defines how Output A will respond when the network is idle.
0 = Goto Net IdlValue
1 = Hold Last State
When set to “0”, Output A will open or close as determined by the setting in
Parameter 38.
OutA Net IdlValue
This parameter determines the state that Output A assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 37
(OutA Net IdlState) is set to “0”.
0 = Open
1 = Close
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
35
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
—
0
1
0
36
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
37
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
38
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
127
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
OutB Pr FltState
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 40 (OutB Pr FltValue) defines how Output B will respond when a protection trip occurs.
0 = Goto PrFlt Value
1 = Ignore PrFlt
When set to “1”, Output B continues to operate as command via the network.
When set to “0”, Output B will open or close as determined by setting in
Parameter 40.
OutB Pr FltValue
This parameter determines the state the Out B assumes when a protection trip occurs and Parameter 39 (OutB Pr
FltState) is set to “0”.
0 = Open
1 = Close
OutB Net FltState
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 42 (OutB Net FltValue) defines how Output B will respond when a network fault occurs.
0 = Goto Idle Value
1 = Hold Last State
When set to “1”, Output B will hold state prior to trip occurrence. When set to “0”, Output B will open or close as determined by setting in Parameter
42.
OutB Net FltValue
This parameter determines the state that Output B assumes when a network fault occurs and Parameter
41 (OutB Net FltState) is set to “0”.
0 = Open
1 = Close
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
39
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
—
0
1
0
40
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
41
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
42
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
128
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
OutB Net IdlState
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 44 (OutB Net IdlValue) defines how Output B will respond when the network is idle.
0 = Goto PrFlt Value
1 = Ignore PrFlt
When set to “0”, Output B will open or close as determined by the setting in
Parameter 44.
OutB Net IdlValue
This parameter determines the state that Output B assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 43
(OutB Net IdlState) is set to “0”.
0 = Open
1 = Close
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Miscellaneous Configuration Group
Network Override
This parameter allows for the local logic to override a Network fault.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Comm Override
This parameter allows for local logic to override the absence of an I/O connection.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
43
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
44
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
9
GET/SET
BOOL
Misc. Config.
1
0
—
0
8
GET/SET
BOOL
Misc. Config.
1
0
—
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
129
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Keypad Mode
This parameter selects if the keypad operation is maintained or momentary.
0 = Maintained
1 = Momentary
Keypad Disable
This parameter disables all keypad function except for the “OFF” and
“RESET” buttons.
0 = Not Disabled
1 = Disabled
Set to Defaults
This parameter if set to “1” will set the device to the factory defaults (but will not cause the ArmorStart to reboot).
0 = No Operation
1 = Set to Defaults
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Starter Display Group (Bulletin 280E/281E only)
Phase A Current
This parameter provides the current of
Phase A measured n increments of
1/10 th
of an ampere.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
101
GET/SET
INT
Starter Display xx.x Amps
0
32767
0
46
GET/SET
BOOL
Misc. Config.
1
0
—
0
45
GET/SET
BOOL
Misc. Config.
1
0
—
0
47
GET/SET
BOOL
Misc. Config.
1
0
—
0
130
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Phase B Current
This parameter provides the current of
Phase B measured in increments of
1/10 th
of an ampere.
Phase C Current
This parameter provides the current of
Phase C measured in increments of
1/10 th
of an ampere.
Average Current
This parameter provides the average current measured in increments of
1/10 th
of an ampere.
Therm Utilized
This parameter displays the
% Thermal Capacity used.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
104
GET/SET
INT
Starter Display xx.x Amps
0
32767
0
105
GET/SET
USINT
Starter Display
% FLA
0
100
0
102
GET/SET
INT
Starter Display xx.x Amps
0
32767
0
103
GET/SET
INT
Starter Display xx.x Amps
0
32767
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
131
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Starter Setup Group (Bulletin 280E/281E only)
FLA Setting
The motor’s full load current rating is programmed in this parameter.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
106
GET/SET
INT
Starter Setup xx.x Amps
See Table 19.
See Table 19.
See Table 19.
Table 19 - FLA Setting Ranges and Default Values (with indicated setting precision)
Minimum Value
FLA Current Range (A)
Maximum Value
0.24
0.5
1.2
2.5
1.1
3.2
5.5
16.0
Default Value
0.24
0.5
1.1
3.2
Overload Class
This parameter allows the installer to select the overload class.
1 = Overload Class 10
2 = Overload Class 15
3 = Overload Class 20
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
107
GET/SET
USINT
Starter Setup xx.x Amps
1
3
1
OL Reset Level
This parameter allows the installer select the % Thermal Capacity which an overload can be cleared.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
108
GET/SET
USINT
Starter Setup
% FLA
0
100
75
132
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Bulletin 284E
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
Basic Status Group
Hdw Inputs
This parameter provides status of hardware inputs.
3
—
—
—
X
2
—
—
X
—
Bit
1
—
X
—
—
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
—
—
0
X
—
1
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
15
0
Function
In0
In1
In2
In3
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
133
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
DeviceIn Data
This parameter provides status of network device inputs.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
2
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
65535
0
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Function
Pt00DeviceIn
Pt01DeviceIn
Pt02DeviceIn
Pt03DeviceIn
Pt04DeviceIn
Pt05DeviceIn
Pt06DeviceIn
Pt07DeviceIn
Pt08DeviceIn
Pt09DeviceIn
Pt10DeviceIn
Pt11DeviceIn
Pt12DeviceIn
Pt13DeviceIn
Pt14DeviceIn
Pt15DeviceIn
134
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
DeviceOut Data
This parameter provides status of network device outputs.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
3
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
32767
0
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Function
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X Pt00DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — Pt01DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — Pt02DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — Pt03DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — Pt04DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — Pt05DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — Pt06DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — — Pt07DeviceOut
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — — Pt08DeviceOut
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — — Pt09DeviceOut
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — — Pt10DeviceOut
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — — Pt11DeviceOut
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — — Pt12DeviceOut
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — — Pt13DeviceOut
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Pt14DeviceOut
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Reserved
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
135
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Trip Status
This parameter provides trip identification.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
4
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
65535
0
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — X
X
X
X
—
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — —
— — — —
— — — — —
Function
Short Circuit
Overload
Phase Short
Ground Fault
Stall
Control Power
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — I/O Fault
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — — Over Temperature
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — —
Over Current
A3 Power Loss
Internal Comm
DC Bus Fault
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
EEprom
HW Fault
Restart Retries
Misc. Fault
136
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
Starter Status
This parameter provides the status of the starter.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
5
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
65535
0
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Function
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X TripPresent
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — WarningPresent
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — RunningForward
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — RunningReverse
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — —
Ready
Net Ctl Status
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — —
Net Ref Status
At Reference
DrvOpto1
DrvOpto2
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — —
Keypad Jog
Keypad Hand
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — — HOA Status
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — — Disconnect Closed
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Contactor 2 ➊
Contactor 2 ➋
➊ Refers to source brake contactor status
➋ Refers to output contactor status
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
137
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
InternalLinkStat
This parameter provides status of the internal network connections.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
6
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
31
0
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — —
X X X X X X X X X X X — — — — —
Function:
Explicit Connection
I/O Connection
Explicit Fault
I/O Fault
I/O Idle
Reserved
Starter Command
The parameter provides the status of the starter command.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
7
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
255
0
Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
— — — — — — —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
X —
— —
0
X
— — — —
— — — X
— —
— X
X
X
—
—
—
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— — — — — — —
Function:
Run Fwd
Run Rev
Fault Reset
Jog Fwd
Jog Rev
Reserved
OutA
OutB
138
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Breaker Type
This parameter identifies the Bulletin
140M used in this product.
0 = 140M-D8N-C10
1 = 140M-D8N-C25
Base Enclosure
Indicates the ArmorStart Base unit enclosure rating.
Bit 0 = IP67
Bit 1 = Nema 4X
Bit 2…15 = Reserved
Base Options
Indicates the options for the
ArmorStart Base unit.
Bit 0 = Output Fuse
Bit 1 = Reserved
Bit 2 = CP Fuse Detect
Bits 3…7 = Reserved
Bit 8 = 10A Base
Bit 9 = 25A Base
Bit 10…15 = Reserved
Wiring Options
Bit 0 = Conduit
Bit 1 = Round Media
Bit 2 = 28xG Gland
Bits 3…15 = Reserved
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
56
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
—
0
22
GET
BOOL
Basic Status
—
0
1
—
57
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
—
0
58
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
—
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
139
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Starter Enclosure
Bit 0 = IP67
Bit 1 = Reserved
Bit 2 = Sil3/Cat4
Bit 3…15 = Reserved
Starter Options
Bit 0 = Full Keypad
Bit 1 = Reserved
Bit 2 = Source Brake
Bit 3 = Reserved
Bit 4 = Dynamic Brake
Bit 5 = Output Contactor
Bit 6 = EMI Filter
Bit 7 = Reserved
Bit 8 = Fused DynBrake
Bit 9…15 = Reserved
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
60
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
66535
0
59
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
—
0
140
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
Last PR Fault
1 = Hdw Short Ckt
2 = Reserved
3 = Motor Overload (PF Fault Code 7)
4 = Drive Overload (PF Fault Code 64)
5 = Phase U to Gnd (PF Fault Code 38)
6 = Phase V to Gnd (PF Fault Code 39)
7 = Phase W to Gnd (PF Fault Code 40)
8 = Phase UV Short (PF4 Fault Code 41)
9 = Phase UW Short (PF Fault Code 42)
10 = Phase VW Short (PF Fault Code 43)
11 = Ground Fault (PF Fault Code 13)
12 = Stall (PF Fault Code 6)
13 = Control Pwr Loss
14 = Control Pwr Fuse
15 = Input Short
16 = Output Fuse
17 = Over Temp
18 = Heatsink OvrTmp (PF Fault Code 8)
19 = HW OverCurrent (PF Fault Code 12)
20 = SW OverCurrent (PF Fault Code 63)
21 = A3 Power Loss
22 = Internal Comm
23 = Drive Comm Loss (PF Fault Code 81)
24 = Power Loss (PF Fault Code 3)
25 = Under Voltage (PF Fault Code 4)
26 = Over Voltage (PF Fault Code 5)
27 = MCB EEPROM
28 = Base EEPROM
29 = Drive EEPROM (PF Fault Code 100)
30 = Wrong Base
31 = Fan RPM
32 = Power Unit (PF Fault Code 70)
33 = Drive I/O Brd (PF Fault Code 122)
34 = Restart Retries (PF Fault Code 33)
35 = Drive Aux In Flt (PF Fault Code 2)
36 = Analog Input (PF Fault Code 29)
37 = Drv Param Reset (PF Fault Code 48)
38 = SCV Autotune (PF Fault Code 80)
39 = Source Brake
40 = Reserved
41 = DB1 Comm
42 = DB1 Fault
43 = DB Switch Short
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
61
GET
UINT
Basic Status
—
0
43
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
141
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Warning Status
This parameter warns the user of a condition, without faulting.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
62
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
65535
0
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Warning
Reserved
Reserved
Phase Loss
Reserved
Reserved
Control Power
I/O Warning
Reserved
Phase Imbalance
A3 Power Loss
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Hardware
Reserved
Reserved
142
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
Base Trip
The parameter provides the Base
Module Trip Status.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
63
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
65535
0
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — —
X X X X X X X X X X X X — — — —
Warning
EEPROM Fault
Internal Comm
Hardware Fault
Control Module
Reserved
Produced Assembly Config Group
Int00DeviceOut Cfg
This parameter is used to specify
Int00DeviceOut of produced assembly
150 or 151.
Int01DeviceOut Cfg
This parameter is used to specify
Int01DeviceOut of produced assembly
150 or 151.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
13
GET/SET
USINT
Produced Assembly Config
—
0
263
1
14
GET/SET
USINT
Produced Assembly Config
—
0
263
4
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
143
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Int02DeviceOut Cfg
This parameter is used to specify
Int02DeviceOut of produced assembly
150 or 151.
Int03DeviceOut Cfg
This parameter is used to specify
Int03DeviceOut of produced assembly
150 or 151.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Starter Protection Group
Pr FltResetMode
This parameter is the Protection Fault reset mode.
0 = Manual
1 = Automatic
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
15
GET/SET
USINT
Produced Assembly Config
—
0
263
5
16
GET/SET
USINT
Produced Assembly Config
—
0
263
6
23
GET/SET
BOOL
Starter Protection
1
0
—
0
144
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
Pr Fault Enable
This parameter enables the Protection
Fault by setting the bit to 1.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
24
GET/SET
WORD
Starter Protection
—
64927
65535
64927
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — X
X
X
X
—
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — —
— — — —
— — — — —
Function
Short Circuit
Overload
Phase Loss
Ground Fault
Stall
Control Power
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — I/O Fault
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — — Over Temperature
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — —
Over Current
A3 Power Loss
Internal Comm
DC Bus Fault
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
EEprom
HW Fault
Restart Retries
Misc. Fault
Pr Fault Reset
This parameter resets the Protection
Fault on a transition of
0 > 1.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
25
GET/SET
BOOL
Starter Protection
1
0
—
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
145
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Str Net FltState
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 27 (Str Net FltValue) defines how the starter will respond when a fault occurs as determined by
Parameter 27.
0 = Goto Fault Value
1 = Hold Last State
Allows Starter to hold last state or go to FltValue on NetFaults.
Str Net FltValue
This parameter determines how the starter will be commanded in the event of a fault. State the Starter will go to on a Net Flt if Parameter
26 (Str Net FltState) = 0 (Goto Fault
Value).
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Str Net IdlState
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 29 (Str Net IdlValue) defines how the starter will respond when a network is idle as determined by Parameter 29.
0 = Goto Idle Value
1 = Hold Last State
Str Net IdlValue
This parameter determines the state that starter assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 28 (Str
Net IdlState) is set to “0”.
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
28
GET/SET
BOOL
Starter Protection
1
0
—
0
29
GET
BOOL
Starter Protection
1
0
—
0
26
GET/SET
BOOL
Starter Protection
1
0
—
0
27
GET
BOOL
Starter Protection
1
0
—
0
146
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
User I/O Configuration Group
Anti-bounce On Delay
This parameter allows the installer to program a time duration before being reported “ON” (Anti-bouce).
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Anti-bounce OFF Delay
This parameter allows the installer to program a time duration before being reported “OFF” (Anti-bouce).
In Sink/Source
This parameter allows the installer to program the inputs to be sink or source.
0 = Sink
1 = Source
OutA Pr FltState
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 34 (OutA Pr FltValue) defines how Output A will respond when a trip occurs.
0 = Goto PrFlt Value
1 = Ignore PrFlt
When set to “1”, Output A continues to operate as command via the network.
When set to “0”, Output A will open or close as determined by the setting in
Parameter 34.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
30
GET/SET
UINT
User I/O Config.
ms
0
65
0
31
GET/SET
UINT
User I/O Config.
ms
0
65
0
32
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
33
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
—
0
1
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
147
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
OutA Pr FltValue
This parameter determines the state the Output A assumes when a trip occurs and Parameter 33 (OutA Pr
FltState) is set to “0”.
0 = Open
1 = Close
OutA Net FltState
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 36 (OutA Net FltValue) defines how Output A will respond when a network fault occurs.
0 = Goto Net FltValue
1 = Hold Last State
When set to “1”, Output A will hold state prior to trip occurrence. When set to “0”, Output A will open or close as determined by the setting in
Parameter 36.
OutA Net FltValue
This parameter determines the state that Output A assumes when a network fault occurs and Parameter
35 (OutA Net FltState) is set to “0”.
0 = Open
1 = Close
OutA Net IdlState
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 38 (OutA Net IdlValue) defines how Output A will respond when the network is idle.
0 = Goto Net IdlValue
1 = Hold Last State
When set to “0”, Output A will open or close as determined by the setting in
Parameter 38.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
36
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
37
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
34
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
35
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
—
0
1
0
148
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
OutA Net IdlValue
This parameter determines the state that Output A assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 37
(OutA Net IdlState) is set to “0”.
0 = Open
1 = Close
OutB Pr FltState
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 40 (OutB Pr FltValue) defines how Output B will respond when a protection trip occurs.
0 = Goto PrFlt Value
1 = Ignore PrFlt
When set to “1”, Output B continues to operate as command via the network.
When set to “0”, Output B will open or close as determined by setting in
Parameter 40.
OutB Pr FltValue
This parameter determines the state the Out B assumes when a protection trip occurs and Parameter 39 (OutB Pr
FltState) is set to “0”.
0 = Open
1 = Close
OutB Net FltState
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 42 (OutB Net FltValue) defines how Output B will respond when a network fault occurs.
0 = Goto Idle Value
1 = Hold Last State
When set to “1”, Output B will hold state prior to trip occurrence. When set to “0”, Output B will open or close as determined by setting in Parameter
42.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
40
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
41
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
—
0
1
0
38
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
39
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
—
0
1
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
149
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
OutB Net FltValue
This parameter determines the state that Output B assumes when a network fault occurs and Parameter
41 (OutB Net FltState) is set to “0”.
0 = Open
1 = Close
OutB Net IdlState
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 44 (OutB Net IdlValue) defines how Output B will respond when the network is idle.
0 = Goto PrFlt Value
1 = Ignore PrFlt
When set to “0”, Output B will open or close as determined by the setting in
Parameter 44.
OutB Net IdlValue
This parameter determines the state that Output B assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 43
(OutB Net IdlState) is set to “0”.
0 = Open
1 = Close
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Miscellaneous Configuration Group
Network Override
This parameter allows for the local logic to override a Network fault.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
42
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
43
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
44
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
8
GET/SET
BOOL
Misc. Config.
1
0
—
0
150
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Comm Override
This parameter allows for local logic to override the absence of an I/O connection.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Keypad Mode
This parameter selects if the keypad operation is maintained or momentary.
0 = Maintained
1 = Momentary
Keypad Disable
This parameter disables all keypad function except for the “OFF” and
“RESET” buttons.
0 = Not Disabled
1 = Disabled
Set to Defaults
This parameter if set to “1” will set the device to the factory defaults (but will not cause the ArmorStart to reboot).
0 = No Operation
1 = Set to Defaults
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
47
GET/SET
BOOL
Misc. Config.
1
0
—
0
46
GET/SET
BOOL
Misc. Config.
1
0
—
0
45
GET/SET
BOOL
Misc. Config.
1
0
—
0
9
GET/SET
BOOL
Misc. Config.
1
0
—
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
151
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Drive I/O Configuration Group (Bulletin 284E only)
Drive Control
This parameter provides the status of drive parameters.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
48
GET
WORD
Drive I/O Config.
—
0
4095
0
Bit
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
— — — — — — — — — — —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
X —
— —
0
X
— — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — X
— — — — — —
— — — — — X
X
—
—
—
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— — — —
— — — X
— —
— X
X
X
—
—
—
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— — — — — — — — — — —
Function
Accel 1 En
Accel 2 En
Decel 1 En
Decel 2 En
Freq Sel 0
Freq Sel 1
Freq Sel 2
Reserved
Drv In 1
Drv In 2
Drv In 3
Drv In 4
DrvIn Pr FltState
This parameter, in conjunction with
Parameter 50 (DrvIn Pr FltValue), defines how the Drive Digital
Inputs 1…4 will respond when a protection trip occurs. When set to “1”,
Drive Digital Inputs 1…4 continue to operate as command via the network.
When set to “0”, Drive Digital Inputs
1…4 will open or close as determined by setting in Parameter
50.
0 = Go to PrFlt Value
1 = Ignore PrFlt
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
49
GET/SET
BOOL
Drive I/O Config.
—
0
1
0
152
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
DrvIn Pr FltValue
This parameter determines the state of Drive Digital Inputs 1…4, assumes when a trip occurs and Parameter 49
(DrvIn Pr FltState) is set to “0”.
0 = Open
1 = Close
DrvIn Net FltState
This parameter, in conjunction with
Parameter 52 (DrvIn Net FItValue), defines how the Drive Digital
Inputs 1…4 will respond when a network fault occurs. When set to “1”,
Drive Digital Inputs 1…4 hold to last state occurs. When set to “0”, will go to DrvIn Net FltValue as determined by Parameter 52.
0 = Go to Fault Value
1 = Hold Last State
DrvIn Net FItValue
This parameter determines the state of Drive Digital Inputs 1…4 when a network fault occurs and Parameter
51 (DrvIn Net FltState) is set to “0”.
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
DrvIn Net IdlState
This parameter, in conjunction with
Parameter 54 (DrvIn Net IdlValue), defines how the Drive Digital Inputs
1…4 will respond when a network is idle. When set to “1”, hold to last state occurs. When set to “0”, will go to
DrvIn Net IdlState as determined by
Parameter 54.
0 = Go to Fault Value
1 = Hold Last State
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
52
GET/SET
BOOL
Drive I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
53
GET/SET
BOOL
Drive I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
50
GET/SET
BOOL
Drive I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
51
GET/SET
BOOL
Drive I/O Config.
—
0
1
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
153
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
154
DrvIn Net IdlValue
This parameter determines the state that Drive Digital Inputs 1…4 assume when the network is idle and
Parameter 53 (DrvIn Net IdlState) is set to “0”.
0 = OFF
1 = ON
High Speed Enable
Enable High Speed Inverter control thru the terminal block.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Drive Display Group (Bulletin 284E only)
Output Freq
Output frequency present at T1, T2,
T3.
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Commanded Freq
Value of the active frequency command. Displays the commanded frequency even if the drive is not running.
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
101
102, 110, 134, 135, 138
GET
UINT
Drive Display
0.1 Hz
0.0
400.0 Hz
Read Only
102
101, 113, 134, 135, 138
GET
UINT
Drive Display
0.1 Hz
0.0
400.0 Hz
Read Only
54
GET/SET
BOOL
Drive I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
55
GET/SET
BOOL
Drive I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
Output Current
Output Current present at T1, T2, T3.
Output Voltage
Output Voltage present at T1, T2, T3.
DC Bus Voltage
Present DC Bus voltage level
Drive Status
Present operating condition of the drive
Bit 0 = Running
Bit 1 = Forward
Bit 2 = Accelerating
Bit 3 = Decelerating
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameter
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
105
GET
UINT
Drive Display
1V DC
Based on Drive Rating
Read Only
106
195
GET
Byte
Drive Display
—
0
1
Read Only
103
GET
UINT
Drive Display
0.01
0.00
Drive rated amps x 2
Read Only
104
131, 184, 188
GET
UINT
Drive Display
1V AC
0
480V
Read Only
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
155
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Fault 1 Code
A code that represents the drive fault.
The code will appear in this parameter as the most recent fault that has occurred. (Refer to
in Chapter 10 for more information).
Fault 2 Code
A code that represents a drive fault.
The code will appear in this parameter as the second most recent fault that has occurred.
Fault 3 Code
A code that represents a drive fault.
The code will appear in this parameter as the third most recent fault that has occurred.
Process Display
The output frequency scaled by the process factor (Parameter 199).
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameter
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
110
101. 199
GET
UINT
Drive Display
—
0.00
9999
Read Only
109
GET
UINT
Drive Display
—
F2
F122
Read Only
108
GET
UINT
Drive Display
—
F2
F122
Read Only
107
GET
UINT
Drive Display
—
F2
F122
Read Only
156
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
Control Source
Displays the source of the Start
Command and Speed Reference.
2 = 2-wire
3 = 2-wire Level Sensitive
4 = 2-wire High Speed
5 = RS485 (DSI) Port
9 = Jog
Valid Speed Commands for the
Bulletin 284E ArmorStart are the following:
1 = Internal Frequency
4 = Preset Freq x
5 = Comm Port (RS485 (DSI))
6 = StepLogic Control
9 = Jog Freq
Contrl In Status
Status of control inputs. These can be used in DeviceLogix.
Bit 0 = Start/Run FWD Input
Bit 1 = Direction/Run REV Input
Bit 2 = Stop Input
Bit 3 = Dynamic Brake Transistor On
Dig In Status
Status of the control terminal block digital inputs:
Bit 0 = Digital In 1 Sel
Bit 1 = Digital In 2 Sel
Bit 2 = Digital In 3 Sel
Bit 3 = Digital In 4 Sel
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameter
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameter
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
112
136, 138, 151…154 (Digital In x
Sel) must be set to Option 4, 169,
170…177 (Preset Freq x),
240…247 (StpLogic x)
GET
UINT
Drive Display
1
0
9
Read Only
114
151…154
GET
UINT
Drive Display
1
0
1
Read Only
113
102, 134, 135
GET
UINT
Drive Display
1
0
1
Read Only
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
157
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Comm Status
Status of communications ports:
Bit 0 = Receiving Data
Bit 1 = Transmitting Data
Bit 2 = RS485
Bit 3 = Communication Error
Control SW Ver
Main Control Board software version for AC Drive.
Drive Type
Used by Rockwell Automation field service personnel.
Elapsed Run Time
Accumulated time drive is outputting power. Time is displayed in 10 hour increments.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameter
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
118
GET
UINT
Drive Display
1 = 10 hrs
0
9999
Read Only
117
GET
UINT
Drive Display
1
1001
9999
Read Only
116
GET
UINT
Drive Display
0.01
1.00
99.99
Read Only
115
205, 206
GET
UINT
Drive Display
1
0
1
Read Only
158
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
Output Power
The output power present at T1, T2, and T3.
Output Power Fctr
The angle in electrical degrees between motor voltage and current.
Drive Temp
Present operating temperature of the drive power section.
Counter Status
The current value of the counter when counter is enabled.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
122
GET
UINT
Drive Display
0.00
Drive rated power X 2
Read Only
123
GET
UINT
Drive Display
0.1
°
0.0
°
180.0
°
Read Only
125
GET
UINT
Drive Display
1
0
9999
Read Only
124
GET
UINT
Drive Display
1
°C
0
120
Read Only
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
159
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
160
Timer Status
The current value of the timer when timer is enabled.
StpLogic Status
When Parameter 138 (Speed
Reference) is set to "6" (StpLogic), this parameter will display the current step of StepLogic as defined by
Parameters 240…247 (StpLogic X).
Torque Current
The current value of the motor torque current.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Drive Setup Group (Bulletin 284E only)
Motor NP Volts
O
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Set to the motor nameplate rated volts.
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
131
104, 184, 185…187
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Setup
1V AC
20
480V
Based on Drive Rating
128
GET
UINT
Drive Display
1
0
8
Read Only
126
GET
UINT
Drive Display
0.1 sec
0
9999
Read Only
129
GET
UINT
Drive Display
0.01
0.00
Drive Rated Amps x 2
Read Only
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
Motor NP Hertz
O
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Set to the motor nameplate rated frequency.
Motor OL Current
Set to the maximum allowable current. The drive fault on an F7
Motor Over load if the value of this parameter is exceeded by 150% for 60 s.
Minimum Freq
Sets the lowest frequency the drive will output continuously.
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameter
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameter
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
132
184, 185…187, and 190
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Setup
1 Hz
15
400
60 Hz
133
155, 189, 190, 198, 214, 218,
260…261
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Setup
0.1 A
0.0
Drive rated amps x 2
Based on Drive Rating
134
101, 102, 113, 135, 185…187,
260, 261
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Setup
0.1 Hz
0.0
400
0.0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
161
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Maximum Freq
O
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Sets the highest frequency the drive will output continuously.
Start Source
O
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Sets the control scheme used to start the Bulletin 284E ArmorStart.
2 = 2-Wire
3 = 2-Wire Level Sensitive
4 = 2-Wire High Speed
5 = Comm Port (RS485 (DSI))
Stop Mode
Valid Stop Mode for the Bulletin 284E ArmorStart are the following:
0 = Ramp, CF Ramp to Stop. Stop command clears active fault.
1 = Coast, CF Coast to Stop. Stop command clears active fault.
2 = DC Brake,CF DC Injection Braking Stop. Stop command clears active fault.
3 = DCBrkAuto, CF DC injection Braking with Auto Shutoff.
Standard DC Injection Braking for value set in Parameter 180 (DC Brake Time) or
Drive shuts off if the drive detects that the motor is stopped. Stop command clears active fault.
4 = Ramp, Ramp to Stop
5 = Coast, Coast to Stop
6 = DC Brake, DC Injection Braking Stop
7 = DC BrakeAuto, DC Injection Stop with Auto Shutoff
Standard DC Injection Braking for value set in Parameter 180 (DC Brake Time) or
Drive shuts off if current limit is exceeded.
8 = Ramp + EM B, CF Ramp to Stop with EM Brake Control. Stop command clears active fault.
9 = Ramp + EM Brk Ramp to Stop with EM Brake Control.
Parameter Number
Related Parameter
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
135
101, 102, 113, 134, 135, 178,
185…187
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Setup
0.1 Hz
0.0
400
60.0
136
112 and 137
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Setup
—
0
5
5
137
136, 180…182, 205, 260, 261
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Setup
9
9
—
0
162
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
Speed Reference
Valid Speed References for the
Bulletin 284E ArmorStart are the following:
1 = Internal Freq
2 = Reserved
4 = Preset Freq
5 = Comm Port
6 = StpLogic
9 = Jog Freq
Accel Time 1
Sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases.
Maximum Freq
Accel Time
= Accel Rate
Decel Time 1
Sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases.
Maximum Freq
Decel Time
= Decel Rate
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
138
101, 102, 112, 139, 140,
151…154, 169, 170…177, 232,
240…247, and 250…257
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Setup
—
0
7
5
139
138, 140, 151…154, 167,
170…177, and 240…247
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Setup
0.1 sec
0.0 sec
600.0 sec
10.0 sec
140
138, 139, 151…154, 168,
170…177, and 240…247
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Setup
0.1 sec
0.1 sec
600.0 sec
10.0 sec
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
163
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Reset To Defaults
O
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Resets all parameter values to factory defaults.
0 = Ready/Idle (Default)
1 = Factory Rset
Motor OL Ret
Enables/disables the Motor overload
Retention function. When Enabled, the value held in the motor overload counter is saved at power-down and restored at power-up. A change to this parameter setting resets the counter.
0 = Disabled (Default)
1 = Enabled
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
143
GET/SET
BOOL
Drive Setup
1
0
—
0
141
GET/SET
BOOL
Drive Setup
1
0
—
0
Drive Advanced Setup Group (Bulletin 284E only)
Digital In 1 SEL (151)
Digital In 2 SEL (152)
Digital In 3 SEL (153)
Digital In 4 SEL (154)
O
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Selects the function for the digital inputs.
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
151…154
112, 114, 138…140, 167, 168,
170…179, 240…247
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
See Table 20 for details.
164
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
Table 20 - Digital Input Options
Option
0
1
2
3
4
5
Name Description
Not Used
Terminal has no function but can be read over network communication via Parameter 114 (Dig In Status).
Acc2 & Dec2
Jog
• When active, Parameter 167 (Accel Time 2) and Parameter 168 (Decel Time 2) are used for all ramp rates except Jog.
• Can only be tied to one input.
• When input is present, drive accelerates according to the value set in Parameter 179 (Jog Accel/Decel) and ramps to the value set in
Parameter 178 (Jog Frequency).
• When the input is removed, drive ramps to a stop according to the value set in Parameter 179 (Jog Accel/Decel).
• A valid Start command will override this input.
When enable, an F2, Auxiliary Input fault will occur when the input is removed.
Aux Fault
Preset Freq
(Parameters 151 and
152 Default)
Refer to Parameters 170…173 and 174…177.
Local (Parameter 153
Default)
Option not valid for Bulletin 284E ArmorStart.
6
7
8
9
10
11
Comm Port
Clear Fault
RampStop,CF
CoastStop,CF
DCInjStop,CF
Jog Forward
(Parameter 154
Default)
This option is the default setting.
When active, clears active fault.
Causes drive to immediately ramp to stop regardless of how Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is set.
Causes drive to immediately ramp to stop regardless of how Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is set.
Causes drive to immediately begin a DC Injection stop regardless of how Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is set.
Drive accelerates to Parameter 178 (Jog Frequency) according to Parameter 179 (Jog Accel/Decel) and ramps to stop when input becomes inactive. A valid start will override this command.
12
19
20
17
18
21
22
15
16
13
14
23
24
Jog Reverse
10V In Ctrl
20MA In Ctrl
PID Disable
MOP Up
MOP Down
Timer Start
Counter In
Reset Timer
Reset Countr
Rset Tim & Cnt
Logic In1
Logic In2
Drive accelerates to Parameter 178 (Jog Frequency) according to Parameter 179 (Jog Accel/Decel) and ramps to stop when input becomes inactive. A valid start will override this command.
Option not valid for Bulletin 284E ArmorStart.
Option not valid for Bulletin 284E ArmorStart.
Disabled PID function. Drive uses the next valid non-PID speed reference.
Increases the value of Parameter 169 (Internal Freq) at a rate 2 Hz per second. Default of Parameter 169 is 60 Hz.
Decreases the value of Parameter 169 (Internal Freq) at a rate 2 Hz per second. Default of Parameter 169 is 60 Hz.
Clears and starts the timer function. May be used to control the relay
Starts the counter function. May be used to control the relay.
Clears the active timer.
Clears the active counter.
Clear active timer and counter.
Logic Function input number 1. May be used to control the relay (see Parameter 155, Options 11…14). May be used in conjunction with
StepLogic Parameters 240…247 (StpLogic X).
Logic Function input number 2. May be used to control the relay (see Parameter 155, Options 11…14). May be used in conjunction with
StepLogic Parameters 240…247 (StpLogic X).
25
26
Current Lmt2
Anlg Invert
When active, Parameter 218 (Current Limit 2) determines the drive current limit level.
Option not valid for Bulletin 284E ArmorStart.
27 ➊ Em Brk Rise If EM Brake function enabled, this input releases the brake.
➊ Provides programmable control of Em Brk via digital input (1...4)
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
165
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Options
0
15
16
13
14
11
12
9
10
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
23
24
21
22
19
20
17
18
Relay Out Sel
Sets the condition that changes the state of the output relay contacts.
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
155
133, 156, 192, 240…247,
250…257, 260, 261
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
—
0
22
22
Table 21 - Options for the Output Relay Contacts
At Frequency
MotorRunning
Reverse
Motor Overld
Ramp Reg
Above Freq
Above Cur
Above DCVolt
Retries Exst
Above Anlg V
Logic In 1
Logic In 2
Logic In 1 & 2
Logic In 1 or 2
StpLogic Out
Timer Out
Counter Out
Above PF Ang
Anlg In Loss
ParamControl
NonRec Fault
EM Brk Cntrl
Above Fcmd
Msg Control
Name
Ready/Fault (Default)
Description
Relay changes state when power is applied. This indicates the drive is ready for operation. Relay returns drive to shelf state when power is removed or a fault occurs.
Drive reached commanded frequency.
Motor is receiving power from drive.
Drive is commanded to run in reverse direction.
Motor overload condition exists.
Ramp regulator is modifying the programmed accel/decal times to avoid overcurrent or overvoltage fault from occurring.
Drive exceeds the frequency (Hz) value set in Parameter 156 (Relay Out Level) Use Parameter 156 to set threshold.
Drive exceeds the current (% Amps) value set in Parameter 156 (Relay Out Level) Use Parameter 156 to set threshold.
Drive exceeds the DC bus voltage value set in Parameter 156 (Relay Out Level). Use Parameter 156 to set threshold.
Value set in Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries) is exceeded.
Option not valid for Bulletin 284E ArmorStart.
An input is programmed as Logic In 1 and is active.
An input is programmed as Logic In 2 and is active.
Both Logic inputs are programmed and active.
One or both Logic inputs are programmed and one or both is active.
Drive enters StepLogic step with Digit 3 of Command Word (Parameters 240…247).
Timer has reached value set in Parameter 156 (Relay Out Level). Use Parameter 156 to set threshold.
Counter has reached value set in Parameter 156 (Relay Out Level). Use Parameter 156 to set threshold.
Power factor angle has exceeded the value set in Parameter 156 (Relay Out Level). Use Parameter 156 to set threshold.
Option not valid for Bulletin 284E ArmorStart.
Enables the output to be controlled over the network communications by writing to Parameter 156 (Relay Out Level) (0 = OFF, 1 = ON).
Value set in Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries) is exceeded.
EM Brake is energized. Program Parameter 260 (EM Brk OFF Delay) and Parameter 261 (EM Brk On Delay) for desired action.
The Current Command Frequency exceeds the value set in Parameter 156 (Relay Out Level).
With Drive FRN4.01 or later, this option enables the output to be controlled over the network communication.
166
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
Relay Out Level
Sets the trip point for the digital output relay if the value of Parameter
155 (Relay Out Sel) is 6, 7, 8, 10, 16, 17, 18, or 20.
Parameters 155 Setting
6
7
8
17
18
10
16
20
Parameter 156 Min./Max.
0/400 Hz
0/180%
0/815V
0/100%
0.1/9999 sec
1/9999 counts
1/180
°
0/1
Accel Time 2
When active, sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases except for jog.
Maximum Freq
Accel Time
= Accel Rate
Parameter 135
(Maximum Freq)
Dec eler ation
Speed
Ac celer ation
0
0
Param.
139 or
167
(Accel
Time x)
Time Param.
140 or
168
(Decel
Time x)
Decel Time 2
When active, sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases except for jog.
Maximum Freq
Decel Time
= Decel Rate
Parameter 135
(Maximum Freq)
Dec eler ation
Speed
Ac celer ation
0
0
Param.
139 or
167
(Accel
Time x)
Time Param.
140 or
168
(Decel
Time x)
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
156
155
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.1
0.0
9999
0.0
167
139, 151…154, 170…177,
240…247
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.1 sec
0.0
600.0
20.0
168
140, 151…154, 170…177,
240…247
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.1 sec
0.0
600.0
20.0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
167
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
168
Internal Freq
Provide the frequency command to drive when Parameter 138 (Speed
Reference) is set to “1” (Internal Freq).
When enabled, this parameter will change the frequency command in real time.
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
170 (Preset Freq 0) ➊
171 (Preset Freq 1)
172 (Preset Freq 2)
173 (Preset Freq 3)
174 (Preset Freq 4)
175 (Preset Freq 5)
176 (Preset Freq 6)
177 (Preset Freq 7)
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
.
Table 22 - Parameters 170…177 Preset Freq Options
Values
Provides a fixed frequency command value when Parameters 151…154 (Digital In x
Sel) is set to Option 4 (Preset Frequencies).
170 Default ➊
171 Default
172 Default
173 Default
174 Default
175 Default
176 Default
177 Default
Min./Max.
Display
Input State of Digital In 1 (I/
O Terminal 05 when
Parameter 151 = 4)
0
1
0
1
0
Input State of Digital In 2 (I/
O Terminal 06 when
Parameter 152 = 4)
0
0
1
1
0
Input State of Digital In 3 (I/
O Terminal 07 when
Parameter 153 = 4)
0
0
0
0
1
Frequency
Source
170 (Preset Freq 0)
171 (Preset Freq 1)
172 (Preset Freq 2)
173 (Preset Freq 3)
174 (Preset Freq 4)
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
169
138
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.1 Hz
0.0
400.0
60.0
170…173, 174…177
138…140, 151…154, 167, 168,
240…247, 250…257
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.1 Hz
0.0
400.0
See Table 22
0.0 Hz
5.0 Hz
10.0 Hz
20.0 Hz
30.0 Hz
40.0 Hz
50.0 Hz
60.0 Hz
0.0/400.0 Hz
0.1 Hz
Accel/Decel
Parameter
Used ➋
(Accel Time 1)/(Decel Time 1)
(Accel Time 1)/(Decel Time 1)
(Accel Time 2)/(Decel Time 2)
(Accel Time 2)/(Decel Time 2)
(Accel Time 3)/(Decel Time 3)
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
Input State of Digital In 1 (I/
O Terminal 05 when
Parameter 151 = 4)
1
0
1
Input State of Digital In 2 (I/
O Terminal 06 when
Parameter 152 = 4)
0
1
1
Input State of Digital In 3 (I/
O Terminal 07 when
Parameter 153 = 4)
1
1
1
Frequency
Source
175 (Preset Freq 5)
176 (Preset Freq 6)
177 (Preset Freq 7)
Accel/Decel
Parameter
Used ➋
(Accel Time 3)/(Decel Time 3)
(Accel Time 4)/(Decel Time 4)
(Accel Time 4)/(Decel Time 4)
➋When a Digital Input is set to "Accel 2 & Decel 2", and the input is active, that input overrides the settings in this table.
Jog Frequency
Sets the output frequency when the jog command is issued.
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
178
135, 151…154, 179
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.1 Hz
0.0
400.0
10.0
Jog Accel/Decel
Sets the acceleration and deceleration time when a jog command is issued.
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
179
151…154, 178
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.1 sec
0.1
600.0
10.0
DC Brake Time
Sets the length of time that DC brake current is injected into the motor.
Refer to Parameter 181 (DC Brake
Level).
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
180
137, 181
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.1 sec
0.0
99.9
(Setting of 99.9 = Continuous)
0.0
➊To activate 170 (Preset Freq 0) set 138 (Speed Reference) to "4" (Preset Freq).
➋When a Digital Input is set to "Accel 2 & Decel 2", and the input is active, that input overrides the settings in this table.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
169
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
DC Brake Level
Defines the maximum DC brake current, in amps, applied to the motor when Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is set to either "Ramp" or "DC Brake".
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
181
137, 180
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.1 A
0.0
Drive rated amps X 1.8
Drive rated amps X 0.05
ATTENTION:
Ramp-to-Stop Mode DC Injection Braking Mode
Voltage
Stop Command
Voltage
Speed
Time
[DC Brake Time]
}
[DC Brake Level]
Speed
[DC Brake Time]
Stop Command
Time
}
[DC Brake Level]
•
If a hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material exists, an auxiliary mechanical braking device must be used.
•
This feature should not be used with synchronous or permanent magnet motors.
Motors may be demagnetized during braking.
DB Resistor Sel
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Enables/disables external dynamic braking.
Setting
0
1
2
3…99
Min./Max.
Disabled
Normal RA Res (5% Duty Cycle)
No Protection (100% Duty Cycle) x% Duty Cycle Limited (3…99% of Duty Cycle)
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
182
137
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
1
0
99
0
170
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
S Curve %
Sets the percentage of acceleration or deceleration time that is applied to ramp as S Curve. Time is added, half at the beginning and half at the end of the ramp.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Figure 68 - S Curve
Example:
Accel Time = 10 Seconds
S Curve Setting = 50%
S Curve Time = 10 x 0.5 = 5 Seconds
Total Time = 10 + 5 = 15 Seconds
Target
Target 2
50% S Curve
183
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
1%
0
100
0% disabled
1/2 S Curve Time
2.5 Seconds
Accel Time
10 Seconds
Total Time to Accelerate = Accel Time + S Curve Time
1/2 S Curve Time
2.5 Seconds
Boost Select
Sets the boost voltage (% of
Parameter 131 (Motor NP Volts)) and redefines the Volts per Hz curve.
Active when Parameter 225 (Torque
Perf Mode) = 0 (V/Hz). Drive may add additional voltage unless Option 5 is selected.
See Table 23 for details.
Table 23 - Boost Select Options
Options
0
1
2
3
4
Custom V/Hz
30.0, VT
35.0, VT
40.0, VT
45.0, VT
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Description
184
104, 131, 132, 185…187, 225
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
—
0
14
8
Variable Torque
(Typical fan/pump curves)
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
171
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Table 23 - Boost Select Options
Options
5
6
9
10
7
8
13
14
11
12
Description
0.0 no IR
0.0
2.5, CT (default for 5 Hp/4.0 kW Drive)
5.0, CT (default)
7.5, CT
10.0, CT
12.5, CT
15.0, CT
17.5, CT
20.0, CT
Figure 69 - Boost Select
100
Constant Torque
50
1/2 [Motor NP Volts]
2
1
4
3
Settings
5-14
0 50
% P132 [Motor NP Hertz]
100
Start Boost
Sets the boost voltage (% of
Parameter 131 (Motor NP Volts)) and redefines the Volts per Hz curve when
Parameter 184 (Boost Select) = 0
(Custom V/Hz) and Parameter 225
(Torque Perf Mode) = 0 (V/Hz)
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
185
131, 132, 134, 135, 184,
186…188, 225
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
1.1%
0.0%
25.0%
2.5%
172
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Figure 70 - Start Boost
Parameter 188 (Maximum Voltage)
Parameter 131 (Motor NP Volts)
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
Parameter 187 (Break Frequency)
Parameter 134 (Minimum Freq) Frequency
Parameter 132 (Motor NP Hertz)
Parameter 135 (Maximum Freq)
Brake Voltage
Sets the frequency where brake voltage is applied when Parameter
184 (Boost Select) = 0 (Custom
V/Hz) and Parameter 225 (Torque Perf
Mode) = 0 (V/Hz).
Brake Frequency
Sets the frequency where brake frequency is applied when Parameter
184 (Boost Select) = 0 (Custom V/Hz) and Parameter 225 (Torque Perf
Mode) = 0 (V/Hz).
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
186
131, 132, 134, 135, 184, 185, 187,
188, 225
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
1.1%
0.0%
100.0%
25.0%
187
131, 132, 134, 135, 184, 185, 186,
188, 225
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.1 Hz
0.0 Hz
400.0 Hz
15.0 Hz
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
173
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Maximum Voltage
Sets the highest voltage the drive will output.
Current Limit 1
Maximum output current allowed before current limiting occurs
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Motor OL Select
Drive provides Class 10 motor overload protection. Settings 0…2, select the derating factor for I
2 t overload function.
0 = No Derate
1 = Min. Derate
2 = Max. Derate
No Derate
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200
% of P132 [Motor NP Hertz]
Figure 71 - Overload Trip Curves
Min Derate
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200
% of P132 [Motor NP Hertz]
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
190
132, 133
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
1
0
2
0
Max Derate
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200
% of P132 [Motor NP Hertz]
188
104, 185, 186, 187
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
1V AC
20V AC
Drive Rated Volts
Drive Rated Volts
189
133, 218
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.1 A
0.1 A
Drive rated amps X 1.8
Drive rated amps X 1.5
174
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
PWM Frequency
Sets the carrier frequency the PWM output waveform. The Figure 72 provides derating guidelines based on the PWM frequency setting.
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Figure 72 - Derating Guidelines Based on the PWM Frequency Setting
100
96
92
88
84
80
76
72
68
64
60
56
52
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Carrier Frequency (kHz)
191
224
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.l Hz
2.0 Hz
16.0 Hz
4.0 Hz
Auto Rstrt Tries
Set the maximum number of times the drive attempts to reset a fault and restart.
Parameter Number
Related Parameter
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
192
155, 193
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
1
0
9
0
Clear a Type 1 Fault and Restart the Drive
1.
Set Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries) to a value other than 0.
2.
Set Parameter 193 (Auto Rstrt Delay) to a value other than 0.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
175
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Clear an Overvoltage, Undervoltage, or Heatsink OvrTmp Fault without Restarting the Drive
1.
Set Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries) to a value other than 0.
2.
Set Parameter 193 (Auto Rstrt Delay) to 0.
ATTENTION: Equipment damage and/or personal injury may result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application. Do not use this function without considering applicable local, national, and international codes, standards, regulations, or industry guidelines.
Auto Rstrt Delay
Sets time between restart attempts when Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries) is set to a value other than zero.
Start at PowerUp
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Enables/disables a feature that allows a Start or Run command to automatically cause the drive to resume running at command speed after the drive input is restored. Requires a digital input configured Run or Start and a valid start contact.
This parameter will not function if Parameter 136 (Start Source) is set to Option 4,
(2-W High Speed).
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
ATTENTION: Equipment damage and/or personal injury may result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application. Do not use this function without considering applicable local, national, and international codes, standards, regulations, or industry guidelines.
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
193
192
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.1 sec
0.0
300.0 sec
1.0 sec
194
192
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
—
0
1
0
176
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
Reverse Disable
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Enables/disables the function that allows the direction of the motor rotation to be changed. The reverse command may come from a digital command or serial command. All reverse inputs including two-wire Run
Reverse will be ignored with reverse disabled.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Flying Start En
Sets the condition that allows the drive to reconnect to a spinning motor at actual RPM.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Compensation
Enables/disables correction options that may improve problems with motor instability,
0 = Disabled
1 = Electrical (Default)
Some drive/motor combinations have inherent instabilities which are exhibited as non-sinusoidal motor currents. This setting attempts to correct this condition
2 = Mechanical
Some motor/load combinations have mechanical resonances which can be excited by the drive current regulator.
This setting slows down the current regulator response and attempts to correct this condition.
3 = Both
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
195
106
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
—
0
1
0
196
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
1
0
—
0
197
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
—
0
3
1
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
177
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
SW Current Trip
Enables/disables a software instantaneous (within 100 ms) current trip.
Process Factor
Scales the output frequency value displayed by Parameter 110 (Process
Display).
Output Freq x Process Factor = Process
Display
Fault Clear
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Resets a fault and clears the fault queue. Used primarily to clear a fault over network communications.
0 = Ready/Idle (Default)
1 = Reset Fault
2 = Clear Buffer (Parameters
107…109 (Fault x Code))
Program Lock
Protects parameters against change by unauthorized personnel.
0 = Unlocked
1 = Locked
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
200
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
2
0
—
0
201
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
1
0
—
0
198
133
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.1 A
0.0
Drive rated amps x 2
0.0 (Disabled)
199
110
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.1
0.1
999.9
30.0
178
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
Testpoint Sel
Used by Rockwell Automation field service personnel.
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Comm Data Rate
This parameter is not available for use with the ArmorStart Distributed
Motor Controller.
CommNode Addr
This parameter is not available for use with the ArmorStart Distributed
Motor Controller.
Comm Loss Action
Selects the drive’s response to a loss of the communication connection or excessive communication errors.
0 = Fault (Default)
Drive will fault on an F81 Comm Loss and coast to stop
1 = Coast Stop
Stops drive via coast to stop
2 = Stop
Stops via Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) setting
3 = Continue Last
Drive continues operating at communication commanded speed saved in RAM.
Parameter Number
Parameter Number
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
202
119
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
1 Hex
0
FFFF
400
203
204
205
115, 137, 206
GET/SET
UINT
Advanced Program Group
—
0
3
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
179
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
180
Comm Loss Time
Sets the time that the drive remain in communication loss before implanting the option selected in
Parameter 205 (Comm Loss Action).
Slip Hertz @ FLA
Compensates for the inherent slip in an induction motor. This frequency is added to the commanded output frequency based on motor current.
Process Time Lo
Scales the time value when the drive is running at Parameter 134
(Minimum Freq). When set to a value other than zero, Parameter 110
(Process Display) indicates the duration of the process.
Process Time Hi
Scales the time value when the drive is running at Parameter 135
(Maximum Freq). When set to a value other than zero, Parameter 110
(Process Display) indicates the duration of the process.
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
206
115, 205
GET/SET
UINT
Advanced Program Group
0.1 sec
0.1 sec
60.0 sec
15.0 sec
214
133
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.1 Hz
0.0 Hz
10.0 Hz
2.0 Hz
215
110, 134
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
Hz
0.00
99.99
0.00
216
110, 135
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
Hz
0.0
99.99
0.00
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
Bus Reg Mode
Enables the bus regulator.
0 = Disable
1 = Enabled
Current Limit 2
Maximum output current allowed before current limiting occurs. This parameter is only active if Parameters
151…154 (Digital In x Sel) is set to
Option 25 (Current Lmt2) and is active.
Skip Frequency
Sets the frequency at which the drive will not operate.
Skip Freq Band
Determines the band width around
Parameter 219 (Skip Frequency).
Parameter 220 (Skip Freq Band) is split applying 1/2 above and 1/2 below the actual skip frequency. A setting of 0.0 disables this parameter.
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
217
—
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
—
0
1
1
218
133, 151…154, 189
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.1 A
0.0 A
Drive rated amps x 1.8
Drive rated amps x 1.5
219
220
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.1 Hz
0.0
400.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
220
219
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.1 Hz
0.0 Hz
30.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
181
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Figure 73 - Skip Frequency Band
Frequency
Command
Frequency
Drive Output
Frequency
Skip Frequency
182
2x Skip
Frequency Band
Time
Stall Fault Time
Sets for the fault time that the drive will remain in stall mode before a fault is issued.
0 = 60 sec (Default)
1 = 120 sec
2 = 240 sec
3 = 360 sec
4 = 480 sec
5 = Flt Disabled
Var PWM Disable
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Enables/disables a feature that varies the carrier frequency for the PWM output waveform defined by
Parameter 191 (PWM Frequency).
0 = Enabled
1 = Disabled
Disabling this feature when low frequency condition exists may result in IGBT stress and nuisance tripping.
Torque Perf Mode
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Enables/disables sensorless vector control operation.
0 = V/Hz
1 = Sensrls Vect
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
221
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
—
0
5
0
224
191
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
1
0
—
0
225
184…187, 227
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
—
0
1
1
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
Motor NP FLA
Set to the motor nameplate full load amps.
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Autotune
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Provides an automatic method for setting Parameter 228 (IR Voltage Drop) and Parameter
229 (Flux Current Ref), which affect sensorless vector performance. Parameter 226 (Motor
NP FLA) must be set to the motor nameplate full load amps before running the Autotune procedure.
0 = Ready/Idle (Default)
1 = Static Tune
2 = Rotate Tune
Ready (0) – Parameter returns to this setting following a Static Tune or Rotate Tune.
Static Tune (1) – A temporary command that initiates a non-rotational motor stator resistance test for the best possible automatic setting of Parameter 228 (IR Voltage Drop). A start command is required following initiation of this setting. The parameter returns to
Ready (0) following the test, at which time another start transition is required to operate the drive in normal mode. Used when motor cannot be uncoupled from the load.
Rotate Tune (2) – A temporary command that initiates a Static Tune followed by a rotational test for the best possible automatic setting of Parameter 229 (Flux Current Ref). A start command is required following initiation of this setting. The parameter returns to
Ready (0) following the test, at which time another start transition is required to operate the drive in normal mode.
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
IMPORTANT
Used when motor is uncoupled from the load. Results may not be valid if a load is coupled to the motor during this procedure.
226
227
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.1 A
0.1
Drive rated amps x 2
Drive rated amps
227
225, 226, 228, 229
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
—
0
3
0
ATTENTION: Rotation of the motor in an undesired direction can occur during this procedure. To guard against possible injury and/or equipment damage, it is recommended that the motor be disconnected from the load before proceeding.
If the Autotune routine fails, an F80 SVC Autotune fault is displayed.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
183
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
IR Voltage Drop
Value of volts dropped across the resistance of the motor stator.
Flux Current Ref
Value of amps for full motor flux.
PID Trim Hi
Sets the maximum positive value that is added to a PID reference when PID trim is used.
PID Trim Lo
Sets the minimum positive value that is added to a PID reference when PID trim is used.
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameter
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
228
227
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.1V AC
0.0
230
Based on Drive Rating
229
227
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.01 A
0.00
Motor NP Volts
Based on Drive Rating
230
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.1
0.0
400.0
60.0
231
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.1
0.0
400.0
0.1
184
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
PID Ref Sel
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Enables/disables PID mode and selects the source of the PID reference.
Valid PID Ref Select for the Bulletin
284E ArmorStart are the following:
0 = PID Disable
1 = PID Setpoint
4 = Comm Port
5 = Setpnt Trim
8 = Comm Trim
PID Feedback Sel
Valid PID Feedback Sel command for the Bulletin 284E ArmorStart is the following;
2 = Comm Port
PID Prop Gain
Sets the value for the PID proportional component when the PID mode is enabled by Parameter 232 (PID Ref
Sel).
PID Integ Time
Sets the value for the PID integral component when the PID mode is enabled by Parameter 232 (PID Ref
Sel).
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
232
138
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
—
0
9
0
233
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
2
0
—
0
234
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.01
0.00
99.99
0.01
235
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.1 sec
0.0 sec
999.9 sec
0.1 sec
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
185
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
PID Diff Rate
Sets the value for the PID differential component when the PID mode is enabled by Parameter 232 (PID Rel
Sel).
PID Setpoint
Provides an internal fixed value for process setpoint when the PID mode is enabled by Parameter 232 (PID Ref
Sel).
PID Deadband
Sets the lower limit of the PID output.
PID Preload
Sets the value used to preload the integral component on start or enable.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
238
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.1%
0.0%
10.0%
0.0%
239
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
400.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
236
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.01 (1/sec)
0.00 (1/sec)
99.99 (1/sec)
0.01 (1/sec)
237
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.1%
0.0%
10.0%
0.0%
186
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
StpLogic 0 (240) (see Table 25)
StpLogic 1 (241) (see Table 25)
StpLogic 2 (242) (see Table 26)
StpLogic 3 (243) (see Table 27)
StpLogic 4 (244)
StpLogic 5 (245)
StpLogic 6 (246)
StpLogic 7 (247)
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
240…247
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
—
0001 baFF
00F1
Parameters 240…247 are only active if Parameter 138 (Speed Reference) is set to “6” (StpLogic).
These parameters can be used to create a custom profile of frequency commands.
Each step can be based on time, status of a Logic input, or a combination of time and the status of a Logic input.
Digits 0…3 for each (StpLogic x) parameter must be programmed according to the desired profile. Refer to Tables 25, 26 and 27.
A Logic input is established by setting a digital input, Parameters 151…154
(Digital In x Sel), to 23 (Logic In1) and/or 24 (Logic In2).
A time interval between steps can be programmed using Parameters 250…257
(StpLogic Time x). See Table 24 for related parameters.
The speed for any step is programmed using Parameters 170…177 (Preset Freq x).
Table 24 - Parameters 240…257
StepLogic Parameter (Active when
138 = 6 (StpLogic))
240 (StpLogic 0)
241 (StpLogic 1)
242 (StpLogic 2)
243 (StpLogic 3)
244 (StpLogic 4)
245 (StpLogic 5)
246 (StpLogic 6)
247 (StpLogic 7)
Related Preset Frequency
Parameter (Can be activated independent of
StepLogic Parameters)
170 (Preset Freq 0)
171 (Preset Freq 1)
172 (Preset Freq 2)
173 (Preset Freq 3)
174 (Preset Freq 4)
175 (Preset Freq 5)
176 (Preset Freq 6)
177 (Preset Freq 7)
Related StepLogic Time Parameter
(Active when 240…247 Digit 0 or 1 are set to 1, b, C, d, or E)
250 (StpLogic Time 0)
251 (StpLogic Time 1)
252 (StpLogic Time 2)
253 (StpLogic Time 3)
254 (StpLogic Time 4)
255 (StpLogic Time 5)
256 (StpLogic Time 6)
257 (StpLogic Time 7)
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
187
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
188
How StepLogic Works
The StepLogic sequence begins with a valid start command. A normal sequence always begins with 240 (StpLogic 0).
Digit 0: Logic For Next Step —
This digit defines the logic for the next step, as defined in Table 13. When the condition is met the program advances to the next step, Step 0 follows Step 7. For example, Digit 0 is set 3. program advances to next step if Parameters 151…154 (Digital In x Sel), is set to Option 24 (Logic In2) and becomes active.
Digit 1: Logic to Jump to a Different Step —
For all settings other than F, when the condition is met, the program overrides Digit 0 and jumps to the step defined by Digit 2.
Digit 2: Different Step to Jump —
When the condition for Digit 1 is met, the
Digit 2 setting determines the next step or to end the program, refer to Table 26.
Digit 3: Step Settings —
This digit defines what accel/decel profile the speed command will follow and the direction of the command for the current step. In addition, if a relay (Parameter 155) is set to Option 15 (StpLogic Out), this parameter can control the status of that output.
Any StepLogic parameter can be programmed to control a relay, but you cannot control different outputs based on the condition of different StepLogic commands.
StepLogic Settings
The logic for each function is determined by the four digits for each StepLogic parameter. The following is a listing of the available settings for each digit. Refer
Table 25 - Digit 0 and Digit 1 Settings
5
6
3
4
0
1
2
7
8
9
Skip Step (Jump Immediately)
Step Based on (StpLogic Time x)
Step if Logic In1 is Active
Step if Logic In2 is Active
Step if Logic In1 is Not Active
Step if Logic In2 is Not Active
Stop if either Logic In1 and Logic In2 is Active
Stop if both Logic In1 and Logic In2 is Active
Stop if neither Logic In1 and Logic In2 is Active
Step if Logic In1 is Active and Logic In2 is Not Active
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
Table 25 - Digit 0 and Digit 1 Settings
C d
A b
E
F
Step if Logic In2 is Active and Logic In1 is Not Active
Step after (StpLogic Time x) and Logic In1 is Active
Step after (StpLogic Time x) and Logic In2 is Active
Step after (StpLogic Time x) and Logic In1 is Not Active
Step after (StpLogic Time x) and Logic In2 is Not Active
Do Not Stop/Ignore Digit 2 Settings
Table 26 - Digit 2 Settings
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
8
9
A
Jump to Step 0
Jump to Step 1
Jump to Step 2
Jump to Step 3
Jump to Step 4
Jump to Step 5
Jump to Step 6
Jump to Step 7
End Program (Normal Stop)
End Program (Coast to Stop)
End Program and Fault (F2)
Table 27 - Digit 3 Settings
8
9
6
7
A b
Required
Setting
0
1
4
5
2
3
Accel/Decel Parameter
Used
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
StepLogic
Output State
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Commanded Direction
FWD
REV
No Output
FWD
REV
No Output
FWD
REV
No Output
FWD
REV
No Output
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
189
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
StpLogic Time 0 (250)
StpLogic Time 1 (251)
StpLogic Time 2 (252)
StpLogic Time 3 (253)
StpLogic Time 4 (254)
StpLogic Time 5 (255)
StpLogic Time 6 (256)
StpLogic Time 7 (257)
Sets the time to remain in each step if the corresponding Parameter 138
(Speed Reference) is set to “6”
(StpLogic), Parameter 240-247
(StpLogic x), digits 0…3 set to b, C, d or E (Step after (StpLogic Time x).
EM Brk OFF Delay
Sets the time the drive will remain at minimum frequency before ramping to the commanded frequency and energizing the brake coil relay when
Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is set to
Option 8 or 9.
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Figure 74 - EM Brk OFF Delay
Frequency
260 [EM Brk Off Delay]
Ramp A cc el
Minimum Freq
Start
Commanded
EM Brk
Energized (Off)
Time
Stop
Commanded
Ramp D ecel
261 [EM Brk On Delay]
EM Brk
De-Energized (On)
Drive Stops
250…257
138, 155, 171…177, 240…247
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.1 sec
0.0 sec
999.9 sec
30.0 sec
260
134, 137
GET/SET
UNIT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.01 sec
0.01 sec
10 sec
0.0 sec
190
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
EM Brk On Delay
Sets the time the drive will remain at minimum frequency before stopping and de-energizing the brake coil relay when Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is set to Option 8 or 9.
MOP Reset Sel
Sets the drive to save the current MOP
Reference command.
0 = Zero MOP Ref
This option clamps Parameter 169
(Internal Freq) at 0.0 Hz when drive is not running.
1 = Save MOP Ref (Default)
Reference is saved in Parameter 169
(Internal Freq).
DB Threshold
Sets the DC bus Voltage Threshold for
Dynamic Brake operation. If the DC bus voltage falls below the value set in this parameter, the Dynamic Brake will not turn on. Lower values will make the Dynamic Braking function more responsive, but may result in nuisance Dynamic Brake activation.
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
261
134, 137
GET/SET
UNIT
Drive Advanced Setup
0.01 sec
0.01 sec
10.00 sec
0.0 sec
262
169
Get/Set
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
—
0
1
1
263
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup
—
0.0%
110.0%
100%
ATTENTION: Equipment damage may result if this parameter is set to a value that causes the dynamic braking resistor to dissipate excessive power. Parameter settings less than 100% should be carefully evaluated to ensure that the dynamic brake resistor’s wattage rating is not exceeded. In general, values less than 90% are not needed. This parameter’s setting is especially important if Parameter 182 (DB Resistor
Sel) is set to “2” (No Protection).
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
191
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Comm Write Mode
Determines whether parameter changes made over communication port are saved and stored in Non-
Volatile Storage (NVS) or RAM only. If they are stored in RAM, the values will be lost at power-down.
0 = Save (Default)
1 = RAM Only
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
264
GET/SET
BOOL
Drive Advanced Setup
—
0
1
0
ATTENTION: Risk of equipment damage exists. If a controller is programmed to write parameter data to Non-Volatile Storage (NVS) frequently, the NVS will quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction. Do not create a program that frequently uses configurable outputs to write parameter data to NVS unless Parameter 264 (Comm
Write Mode) is set to Option 1.
PID Invert Error
When set to “Inverted”, changes the sign of the PID error. This causes an increase in the drive output frequency with PID Feedback greater than PID
Setpoint, and a decrease in drive output frequency with PID Feedback less than PID Setpoint.
0 = Not Inverted (Default)
1 = Inverted
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
267
GET/SET
BOOL
Drive Advanced Setup
1
0
—
0
192
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
Linear List of Parameters for Bulletin 280E/281E and
Bulletin 284E
Table 28 - ArmorStart Common Parameters
9
10
11
12
13
16
19
20
17
18
21
22
Parameter
Number
1
4
5
2
3
6
7
8
14
15
23
24
25
Parameter Name
Hdw Inputs
Network Inputs
Network Outputs
Trip Status
Starter Status
InternalLinkStat
Starter Command
Network Override
Description
This parameter provides status of hardware inputs.
This parameter provides status of network inputs.
This parameter provides status of network outputs.
This parameter provides trip identification.
This parameter provides the status of the starter.
Status of the internal network connections.
The parameter provides the status of the starter command.
This parameter allows for the local logic to override a
Network fault.
This parameter allows for local logic to override a absence of an I/O connection.
Comm Override
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Prod Assy Word 0
Prod Assy Word 1
Prod Assy Word 2
—
—
This parameter is used to build bytes 0…1 for produced assembly 150 or 151.
This parameter is used to build bytes 2…3 for produced assembly 150 or 151.
This parameter is used to build bytes 4…5 for produced assembly 150 or 151.
This parameter is used to build bytes 6…7 for produced assembly 150 or 151.
Prod Assy Word 3
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Breaker Type
Pr FltReset Mode
Pr Fault Enable
Pr Fault Reset
—
—
—
This parameter identifies the Bulletin 140M used in this product.
This parameter configures the Protection Fault reset mode.
This parameter enables the Protection Fault by setting the bit to 1.
This parameter resets the Protection Fault on a transition 0 > 1.
Factory Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
0 =
140M-D8N-C10
0 = Manual
12419
0
Group
Basic Status
Basic Status
Basic Status
Basic Status
Basic Status
Basic Status
Basic Status
Misc. Configuration
Misc. Configuration
Network Configuration
Network Configuration
Network Configuration
Network Configuration
Network Configuration
Network Configuration
Basic Status
Network Configuration
Network Configuration
Basic Status
Starter Protection
Starter Protection
Starter Protection
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Controller
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
193
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Table 28 - ArmorStart Common Parameters
Parameter
Number
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Parameter Name
Str Net FltState
Str Net FltValue
Str Net IdlState
Str Net IdlValue
Off-to-On Delay
On-to-Off Delay
In Sink/Source
OutA Pr FltState
OutA Pr FltValue
OutA Net FltState
OutA Net FltValue
OutA Net IdlState
OutA Net IdlValue
OutB Pr FltState
OutB Pr FltValue
OutB Net FltState
OutB Net FltValue
OutB Net IdlState
Description
This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 27 (Str
Net FltValue) defines how the starter will respond when a fault occurs as determined by Parameter 27.
This parameter determines how the starter will be commanded in the event of a fault.
This parameter determines response when Idle fault occurs.
This parameter determines the state that starter assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 28
(Str Net IdlState) is set to “Goto Fault Value”.
This parameter allows the installer to program a time duration before being reported ON.
This parameter allows the installer to program a time duration before being reported OFF.
This parameter allows the installer to program the inputs to be sink or source.
This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 34 (OutA
Pr FltValue) defines how Output A will respond when a trip occurs.
This parameter determines the state the Output A.
This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 36 (OutA
Net FltValue) defines how Output A will respond.
This parameter determines the state that Output.
This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 38 (OutA
Net IdlValue) defines how Output A will respond when the network is idle.
This parameter determines the state that Output A assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 37
(OutA Net IdlState) is set to “0”.
This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 40 (OutB
Pr FltValue) defines how Output B will respond when a protection trip occurs.
This parameter determines the state the Out B assumes when a protection trip occurs and Parameter 39 (OutB
Pr FltState) is set to “0”.
This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 42 (OutB
Net FltValue) defines how Output B will respond when a network fault occurs.
This parameter determines the state that Output B assumes when a network fault occurs and Parameter
41 (OutB Net FltState) is set to “0”.
This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 44 (OutB
Net IdlValue) defines how Output B will respond when the network is idle.
Factory Default
0 =
Goto Fault Value
0 = OFF
0 =
Goto Fault Value
0 = OFF
0
0
0 = Sink
0 =
Goto PrFlt Value
0 = Open
0 =
Goto Fault Value
0 = Open
0 =
Goto Idle Value
0 = Open
0 =
Goto PrFlt Value
0 = Open
0 =
Goto Idle Value
0 = Open
0 =
Goto PrFlt Value
Group
Starter Protection
Starter Protection
Starter Protection
Starter Protection
User I/O Configuration
User I/O Configuration
User I/O Configuration
User I/O Configuration
User I/O Configuration
User I/O Configuration
User I/O Configuration
User I/O Configuration
User I/O Configuration
User I/O Configuration
User I/O Configuration
User I/O Configuration
User I/O Configuration
User I/O Configuration
Controller
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
194
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
Table 28 - ArmorStart Common Parameters
55
61
62
59
60
56
57
58
63
101
102
103
104
Parameter
Number
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
Base Enclosure
Base Options
Wiring Options
Starter Enclosure
Starter Options
Last PR Fault
Warning Status
Base Trip
Phase A Current
Phase B Current
Phase C Current
Average Current
Parameter Name
OutB Net IdlValue
Keypad Mode
Keypad Disable
Set To Defaults
Drive Control
DrvIn Pr FltState
DrvIn Pr FltValue
DrvIn Net FltState
DrvIn Net FltValue
DrvIn Net FItState
DrvIn Net FItValue
High Speed Enaable
Description
This parameter determines the state that Output B assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 43
(OutB Net IdlState) is set to “0”.
This parameter selects if the keypad operation is maintained or momentary.
This parameter disables all keypad function except for the OFF and RESET buttons.
This parameter if set to 1 will set the device to the factory defaults.
This parameter provides the status of drive parameters.
This parameter, in conjunction with Parameter 50
(DrvIn Pr FltValue), defines how the Drive Digital Inputs
1…4 will respond when a protection trip occurs.
This parameter determines the state of Drive Digital
Inputs 1…4, assumes when a trip occurs.
This parameter, in conjunction with Parameter 52
(DrvIn Net FltValue), defines how the Drive Digital
Inputs 1…4 will respond when a network fault occurs.
This parameter determines the state of Drive Digital
Inputs 1…4 when a network fault occurs and
Parameter 51 (DrvIn Net FltState) is set to “0”.
This parameter, in conjunction with Parameter 54
(DrvIn Net FItValue), defines how the Drive Digital
Inputs 1…4 will respond when a DeviceNet™ network is idle.
This parameter determines the state that Drive Digital
Inputs 1…4 assume when the network is idle and
Parameter 53 (DrvIn Net FItState) is set to “0”.
This parameter enable High Speed Inverter control thru the terminal block.
Indicates the ArmorStart Base unit enclosure rating.
Indicates the options for the ArmorStart Base unit.
This parameter provides the Wiring Options.
This parameter provides the Starter Enclosure.
This parameter provides the Starter Options.
This parameter provides the Last PR Fault.
This parameter provides the Warning Status.
This parameter provides the Base Module Trip Status.
This parameter provides the current of Phase A.
This parameter provides the current of Phase B.
This parameter provides the current of Phase C.
This parameter provides the average current.
Factory Default
0 = Open
0 = Maintained
0 = Not Disabled
0 = No Operation
0
0 =
Go to PrFlt Value
0 = Open
0 =
Go to Fault Value
0 = OFF
0 =
Go to Fault Value
0 = OFF
0 = Disabled
1
0
0
1
0
0 = None
0
0
0
0
0
0
Group
User I/O Configuration
Misc. Configuration
Misc. Configuration
Misc. Configuration
Drive I/O Configuration
Drive I/O Configuration
Drive I/O Configuration
Drive I/O Configuration
Drive I/O Configuration
Drive I/O Configuration
Drive I/O Configuration
Drive I/O Configuration
Basic Status
Basic Status
Basic Status
Basic Status
Basic Status
Basic Status
Basic Status
Basic Status
Starter Display
Starter Display
Starter Display
Starter Display
Controller
Common
284E
284E
284E
284E
284E
284E
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
Common
DOL
DOL
DOL
DOL
Common
Common
Common
284E
284E
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
195
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Table 28 - ArmorStart Common Parameters
108
101
102
103
104
105
106
107…109
110
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
Parameter
Number
105
106
107
124
125
126
128
Parameter Name
Therm Utilized
FLA Setting
Overload Class
OL Reset Level
Output Freq
Commanded Freq
Output Current
Output Voltage
DC Bus Voltage
Drive Status
Fault x Code
Process Display
Control Source
Dig In Status
Comm Status
Control SW Ver
Drive Type
Elapsed Run Time
Testpoint Data
Output Power
Output Power Fctr
Drive Temp
Counter Status
Timer Status
StpLogic Status
Description
This parameter displays the % Thermal Capacity used.
The motor’s full load current rating
Selects the overload class.
Factory Default
0
See Table 19.
1 =
Overload Class 10
Selects the % Thermal Capacity which an overload can be cleared.
Output frequency present at T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W)
Value of the active frequency command
75
Read Only
Read Only
Output current present at T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W)
Output voltage present at T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W)
Present DC bus voltage level
Present operating condition of the drive.
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
A code that represents a drive fault.
The output frequency scaled by Parameter 199 (Process
Factor).
Read Only
Read Only
Displays the source of the Start Command and Speed
Reference.
5 =
RS485 (DSI) Port
Option not valid for Bulletin 284E ArmorStart.
Status of the control terminal block digital inputs.
0
Status of the communications ports
Main Control Board software version for AC Drive.
Used by Rockwell Automation field service personnel.
Accumulated time drive is outputting power.
The present value of the function selected in Parameter
202 (Testpoint Sel).
0
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Option not valid for Bulletin 284E ArmorStart.
Option not valid for Bulletin 284E ArmorStart.
Output power present at T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W).
The angle in electrical degrees between motor voltage and motor current.
Read Only
Read Only
Present operating temperature of the drive power section.
The current value of the counter when counter is enabled.
The current value of the timer when timer is enabled.
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
When Parameter 138 (Speed Reference) is set to "6"
(StpLogic), this parameter will display the current
StepLogic profile as defined by Parameters 240-247
(StpLogic x).
Read Only
Drive Display
Drive Display
Drive Display
Drive Display
Drive Display
Drive Display
Controller
DOL
DOL
DOL
DOL
284E
284E
284E
284E
284E
284E
284E
284E
284E
284E
284E
284E
284E
284E
284E
Group
Starter Display
Starter Setup
Starter Setup
Starter Setup
Drive Display
Drive Display
Drive Display
Drive Display
Drive Display
Drive Display
Drive Display
Drive Display
Drive Display
Drive Display
Drive Display
Drive Display
Drive Display
Drive Display
Drive Display
284E
284E
284E
284E
284E
284E
196
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
155
156
158
159
161
162
164
165
166
Table 28 - ArmorStart Common Parameters
138
139
140
141
142
143
Parameter
Number
129
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
Parameter Name
Torque Current
Motor NP Volts
Motor NP Hertz
Motor OL Current
Minimum Freq
Maximum Freq
Start Source
Stop Mode
Speed Reference
Accel Time 1
Decel Time 1
Reset To Defaults
Motor OL Ret
Description
Displays the current value of the motor torque current as measured by the drive.
Set to the motor name plate rated volts.
Set to the motor nameplate rated frequency.
Set to the maximum allowable current.
Sets the lowest frequency the drive will output continuously.
Sets the highest frequency the drive will output continuously.
Sets the control scheme used to start the Bulletin 284E
ArmorStart.
Sets the Valid Stop Mode for the Bulletin 284E
ArmorStart.
Factory Default
Read Only
Based on Drive Rating
60 Hz
Based on Drive Rating
0.0 Hz
60 Hz
5 = Comm Port
(RS485 (DSI))
9 =
Ramp + EM Brk
Sets the Valid Speed References for the Bulletin 284E
ArmorStart.
Sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases.
Sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases.
5 = Comm Port
10.0 Secs
10.0 Secs
Used to reset drive to factory default settings
0 = Ready/Idle
Option not valid for Bulletin 284E ArmorStart.
Enables/Disables the Motor Overload Retention function.
0 = Disabled
Parameter
Number
151…154
Parameter
Name
Digital In 1 Sel
Digital In 2 Sel
Digital In 3 Sel
Digital In 4 Sel
Relay Out Sel
Table 29 - Parameter Descriptions
Description
Selects the function for the digital inputs.
Relay Out Level
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Sets the condition that changes the state of the output relay contacts.
Sets the trip point for the digital output relay if the value of
Parameter 155 (Relay Out Sel) is 6, 7, 8, 10, 16, 17, 18, or 20.
—
—
—
Option not valid for Bulletin 284E ArmorStart.
Option not valid for Bulletin 284E ArmorStart.
Factory Default
See Table 20.
0 = Ready/Fault
See Table 21.
0.0
—
—
—
Group
Drive Display
Drive Setup
Drive Setup
Drive Setup
Drive Setup
Drive Setup
Drive Setup
Drive Setup
Drive Setup
Drive Setup
Drive Setup
Drive Setup
Drive Setup
Group
284E
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Controller
284E
284E
284E
284E
284E
284E
284E
284E
284E
284E
284E
284E
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
197
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
198
170…177
181
182
183
187
188
189
190
Parameter
Number
167
168
169
178
179
180
184
185
186
Table 29 - Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Name
Accel Time 2
Decel Time 2
Description
When active, sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases except for jog.
When active, sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases except for jog.
Provide the frequency command to drive when Parameter 138
(Speed Reference) is set to “1” (Internal Freq).
Factory Default
20.0 Secs
20.0 Secs
Internal Freq
Preset Freq 0
Preset Freq 1
Preset Freq 2
Preset Freq 3
Preset Freq 4
Preset Freq 5
Preset Freq 6
Preset Freq 7
Jog Frequency
Jog Accel/Decel
Provides a fixed frequency command value when Parameters
151…154 (Digital In x Sel) is set to Option 4 (Preset
Frequencies).
60.0 Hz
See Table 22.
DC Brake Time
DC Brake Level
DB Resistor Sel
S Curve %
Boost Select
Start Boost
Brake Voltage
Brake Frequency
Maximum Voltage
Current Limit 1
Motor OL Select
Sets the output frequency when the jog command is issued.
Sets the acceleration and deceleration time when a jog command is issued.
Sets the length of time that DC brake current is injected into the motor. Refer to Parameter 181 (DC Brake Level).
Defines the maximum DC brake current, in amps, applied to the motor when Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is set to either Ramp or
DC Brake.
Used to set percent duty cycle for external dynamic braking.
Sets the percentage of acceleration or deceleration time that is applied to ramp as S Curve. Time is added, half at the beginning and half at the end of the ramp.
Sets the boost voltage (% of Parameter 131 (Motor NP Volts)) and redefines the Volts per Hz curve. Active when Parameter 225
(Torque Perf Mode) = 0 (V/Hz). Drive may add additional voltage unless Option 5 is selected.
Sets the boost voltage (% of Parameter 131 (Motor NP Volts)) and redefines the Volts per Hz curve when Parameter 184 (Boost
Select) = 0 (Custom V/Hz) and Parameter 225 (Torque Perf Mode)
= 0 (V/Hz).
Sets the frequency where brake voltage is applied when
Parameter 184 (Boost Select) = 0 (Custom V/Hz) and Parameter
225 (Torque Perf Mode) = 0 (V/Hz).
Sets the frequency where brake frequency is applied when
Parameter 184 (Boost Select) = 0 (Custom V/Hz) and Parameter
225 (Torque Perf Mode) = 0 (V/Hz).
Sets the highest voltage the drive will output.
10.0 Hz
10.0 Secs
0.0 Secs
Drive Rated Amps x
0.05
0 = Disabled
0% (Disabled)
8 = 5.0 (2.5 for 5 Hp drives)
2.5%
25.0%
15.0 Hz
Maximum output current allowed before current limiting occurs.
Drive Rated Volts
Drive Rated Amps x
1.5
Drive provides Class 10 motor overload protection. Setting 0…2 select the derating factor for I
2 t overload function.
0 = No Derate
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
206
211
212
213
207
208
209
210
214
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
195
196
Parameter
Number
191
192
193
194
Table 29 - Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Name
PWM Frequency
Auto Rstrt Tries
Auto Rstrt Delay
Start At PowerUp
Reverse Disable
Flying Start En
Compensation
SW Current Trip
Process Factor
Fault Clear
Program Lock
Testpoint Sel
Comm Loss Action
Comm Loss Time
Slip Hertz @ FLA
Description Factory Default
Sets the carrier frequency the PWM output waveform.
Figure 72 provides derating guidelines based on the PWM frequency setting.
Set the maximum number of times the drive attempts to reset a fault and restart.
Sets time between restart attempts when Parameter 192 (Auto
Rstrt Tries) is set to a value other than zero.
Enables/disables a feature that allows a Start or Run command to automatically cause the drive to resume running at command speed after the drive input is restored.
Enables/disables the function that allows the direction of the motor rotation to be changed.
Sets the condition that allows the drive to reconnect to a spinning motor at actual RPM.
Enables/disables correction options that may improve problems with motor instability.
Enables/disables a software instantaneous (within 100 ms) current trip.
Scales the output frequency value displayed by Parameter 110
(Process Display).
Resets a fault and clears the fault queue.
Protects parameters against change by unauthorized personnel.
Used by Rockwell Automation field service personnel.
Option not valid for Bulletin 284E ArmorStart.
Option not valid for Bulletin 284E ArmorStart.
Selects the drive’s response to a loss of the communication connection or excessive communication errors.
Sets the time that the drive remain in communication loss before implanting the option selected in Parameter 205 (Comm Loss
Action).
Option not valid for Bulletin 284E ArmorStart.
Option not valid for Bulletin 284E ArmorStart.
Option not valid for Bulletin 284E ArmorStart.
Option not valid for Bulletin 284E ArmorStart.
Option not valid for Bulletin 284E ArmorStart.
Option not valid for Bulletin 284E ArmorStart.
Option not valid for Bulletin 284E ArmorStart.
Compensates for the inherent slip in an induction motor. This frequency is added to the commanded output frequency based on motor current.
4.0 Hz
0
1.0 Secs
0 = Disabled
0 = Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Electrical
0.0 (Disabled)
30.0
0 = Ready/Idle
0 = Unlocked
400
0 = Fault
15.0 Secs
2.0 Hz
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
199
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
200
216
217
218
219
220
224
225
226
227
221
222
223
235
236
233
234
231
232
228
229
230
Parameter
Number
215
Table 29 - Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Name
Process Time Lo
Process Time Hi
Bus Reg Mode
Current Limit 2
Skip Frequency
Skip Freq Band
Stall Fault Time
Var PWM Disable
Torque Perf Mode
Motor NP FLA
Autotune
IR Voltage Drop
Flux Current Ref
PID Trim Hi
PID Trim Lo
PID Ref Sel
PID Feedback Sel
PID Prop Gain
PID Integ Time
PID Diff Rate
Description Factory Default
Scales the time value when the drive is running at Parameter 134
(Minimum Freq). When set to a value other than zero, Parameter
110 (Process Display) indicates the duration of the process.
Scales the time value when the drive is running at Parameter 135
(Maximum Freq). When set to a value other than zero, Parameter
110 (Process Display) indicates the duration of the process.
Enables the bus regulator.
0.00
0.00
Maximum output current allowed before current limiting occurs.
1 = Enabled
Drive Rated
Amps x 1.5
0.0 Hz
Sets the frequency at which the drive will not operate.
Determines the brand width around Parameter 219 (Skip
Frequency). Parameter 220 (Skip Freq Band) is split applying 1/2 above and 1/2 below the actual skip frequency.
Sets for the fault time that the drive will remain in stall mode before a fault is issued.
Option not valid for Bulletin 284E ArmorStart.
Option not valid for Bulletin 284E ArmorStart.
Enables/disables a feature that varies the carrier frequency for the PWM output waveform defined by Parameter 191 (PWM
Frequency).
0.0 Hz
0 = 60 Seconds
0 = Enabled
Enables/disables sensorless vector control operation.
Set to the motor nameplate full load amps.
Provides an automatic method for setting Parameter 228
(IR Voltage Drop) and Parameter 229 (Flux Current Ref), which affect sensorless vector performance.
1 = Sensrls Vect
Drive Rated Amps
0 = Ready/Idle
Value of volts dropped across the resistance of the motor stator.
Value of amps for full motor flux.
Based on Drive
Rating
Based on Drive
Rating
Sets the maximum positive value that is added to a PID reference when PID trim is used.
Sets the minimum positive value that is added to a PID reference when PID trim is used.
Enables/disables PID mode and selects the source of the PID reference.
Valid PID Feedback Sel command for the Bulletin 284E
ArmorStart.
Sets the value for the PID proportional component when the PID mode is enabled by Parameter 232 (PID Ref Sel).
Sets the value for the PID integral component when the PID mode is enabled by Parameter 232 (PID Ref Sel).
Sets the value for the PID differential component when the PID mode is enabled by Parameter 232 (PID Rel Sel).
60.0
0.1
0 = PID Disabled
0 = 0-10V Input
0.01
0.1 Secs
0.01 (1/Secs)
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7
Parameter
Number
237
238
239
240…247
250…257
260
261
262
263
264
Table 29 - Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Name
PID Setpoint
PID Deadband
PID Preload
StpLogic 0…7
StpLogic Time 0…7
EM Brk OFF Delay
EM Brk On Delay
MOP Reset Sel
DB Threshold
Comm Write Mode
Description
Provides an internal fixed value for process setpoint when the PID mode is enabled by Parameter 232 (PID Ref Sel).
Sets the lower limit of the PID output.
Sets the value used to preload the integral component on start or enable.
These parameters can be used to create a custom profile of frequency commands.
Sets the time to remain in each step if the corresponding
Parameter 138 (Speed Reference) is set to "6" (StpLogic),
Parameter 240-247 (StpLogic x), digits 0…3 set to b, C, d or E
(Step after (StpLogic Time x).
Sets the time the drive will remain at minimum frequency before ramping to the commanded frequency and energizing the brake coil relay when Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is set to Option 8 or 9.
Sets the time the drive will remain at minimum frequency before stopping and de-energizing the brake coil relay when Parameter
137 (Stop Mode) is set to Option 8 or 9.
Sets the drive to save the current MOP Reference command.
Sets the DC bus Voltage Threshold for Dynamic Brake operation.
Determines whether parameter changes made over the communication port are saved and stored in Non-Volatile Storage
(NVS) or RAM only.
Factory Default
0.0%
0.0%
0.0 Hz
00F1
30.0 Secs
0.0 Secs
0.0 Secs
1 = Save MOP Ref
100%
0 = Save
Group
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Advanced Setup
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
201
Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters
Notes:
202
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
How to Configure an Explicit Message
Chapter
8
Programming ControlLogix®
Explicit Message
Explicit Messaging with ControlLogix
In the ControlLogix platform, explicit messaging can be done easily from within a logic program. The request and response is configured within the MSG function. The MSG function can be found in the Input/Output tab of
RSLogix 5000.
Setting Up the MSG Instruction
A tag name must be given to the MSG function before the rest of the information can be defined. In this example a tag was created with the name explicit_mess.
After the instruction has been named, click on the gray box to define the rest of the instruction.
Figure 75 - MSG Function Found in the Input/Output Tab
Formatting an Explicit
Message
ControlLogix scanners and bridges accommodate both downloading Explicit
Message Requests and uploading Explicit Message Responses. The message
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
203
Chapter 8 How to Configure an Explicit Message
Figure 76 - ControlLogix Message Format in RSLogix 5000
204
Box
➊
Message Type
The message type is usually CIP Generic.
Description
➋
Service Type
The service type indicates the service (for example, Get Attribute Single or Set Attribute Single) that you want to perform.
➌
Service Code
The service code is the code for the requested EtherNet/IP service. This value changes based on the Service
Type that has been selected. In most cases, this is a read-only box.
If you select “Custom” in the Service Type box, then you need to specify a service code in this box (for example, 4B for a Get Attributes Scattered service or 4C for a Set Attributes Scattered service).
➍
Class
The class is an EtherNet/IP class.
➎
Instance
The instance is an instance (or object) of an EtherNet/IP class.
➏
Attribute
The attribute is a class or instance attribute.
➐
Source Element
This box contains the name of the tag for any service data to be sent from the scanner or bridge to the module and drive.
➑
Source Length
This box contains the number of bytes of service data to be sent in the message.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
How to Configure an Explicit Message Chapter 8
Box Description
➒
Destination
This box contains the name of the tag that will receive service response data from the module and drive.
➓
Path
The path is the route that the message will follow.
Note: Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of a module that you previously mapped.
Name
The name for the message.
Performing Explicit
Messages
IMPORTANT
There are five basic events in the Explicit Messaging process defined below. The details of each step will vary depending on the controller. Refer to the documentation for your controller.
Figure 77 - Explicit Message Process
Box Description
➊
Format the required data and set up the ladder logic program to send an Explicit Message Request to the scanner or bridge module (download).
➋
The scanner or bridge module transmits the Explicit Message Request to the slave device over the
EtherNet/IP network.
➌
The slave device transmits the Explicit Message Response back to the scanner. The data is stored in the scanner buffer.
➍
The controller retrieves the Explicit Message Response from the scanner’s buffer (upload).
➎
The Explicit Message is complete.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
205
Chapter 8 How to Configure an Explicit Message
The MSG (message) instruction handles all explicit messaging initiated by a
Logix Controller program.
It will automatically create and manage TCP connections and CIP encapsulation sessions. The user has no direct influence on this process.
Figure 78 - Example — Message Configuration Tab
The Class, Instance, and Attribute define the actual information being requested.
Additional configurations of these parameters can be found in the CIP
Appendix.
206
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Overview
Fault Display
Chapter
9
Diagnostics
This chapter describes the fault diagnostics of the ArmorStart® Distributed
Motor Controller and the conditions that cause various faults to occur.
Protection Programming
Many of the protective features available with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor
Controller can be enabled and adjusted through the programming parameters provided. For further details on programming, refer to
281E/284E Programmable Parameters.
The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller comes equipped with a built-in
LED status indication which provides four status LEDs and a Reset button.
Figure 79 - LED Status Indication and Reset
Clear Fault
Fault Codes
You may clear a fault using the following methods:
• Remotely via network communications
• A remote reset will be attempted upon detection of a rising edge (0 to 1 transition) of the “Fault Reset” bit in the various I/O assemblies. A remote reset will also be attempted upon detection of the rising edge of the “Fault
Reset” parameter.
• Locally via the “Reset” button on the LED Status indication keypad.
Table 30 provides a reference of the Fault LED indications for Bulletin 280E/
281E and Bulletin 284E Distributed Motor Controllers.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
207
Chapter 9 Diagnostics
Fault Definitions
208
Blink Pattern
15
16
13
14
11
12
9
10
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Table 30 - Fault Indication
Bulletin 280E/281E
Short Circuit
Overload Trip
Phase Loss
Reserved
Reserved
Control Power
I/O Fault
Over Temperature
Phase Imbalance
A3 Power Loss
Reserved
Reserved
EEPROM Fault
Hardware Fault
Reserved
Reserved
Fault Types
Bulletin 284E
Short Circuit
Overload Trip
Phase Short
Ground Fault
Stall
Control Power
I/O Fault
Over Temperature
Over Current
A3 Power Loss
Internal Communications
DC Bus Fault
EEPROM Fault
Hardware Fault
Restart Retries
Misc. Fault
Short Circuit
Short Circuit indicates that the Bulletin 140M motor protector has tripped, or that the internal wiring protection algorithm has detected an unsafe current surge. This fault cannot be disabled.
Overload Trip
The load has drawn excessive current and based on the overload trip class selected, the device has tripped. This fault cannot be disabled.
Phase Loss
Indicates a missing supply phase. This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Diagnostics Chapter 9
Phase Short
Indicates the drive has detected a phase short. This fault cannot be disabled.
Ground Fault
Indicates the drive has detected a ground fault. This fault cannot be disabled.
Stall
Indicates the drive has detected a stall condition, indicating the motor has not reached full speed. This fault cannot be disabled.
Control Power
Indicates a loss of control power voltage or a blown control power circuit. This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default.
I/O Fault
This error can indicate a shorted sensor, shorted input device, or input wiring mistakes
.
It can also indicate a blown output fuse. This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default.
Over Temperature
Indicates that the operating temperature has been exceeded. This fault cannot be disabled.
Phase Imbalance
Indicates an imbalance supply voltage. This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default.
Over Current
Indicates the drive has detected an over current fault. This fault cannot be disabled.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
209
Chapter 9 Diagnostics
210
A3 Power Loss
Power has been lost or has dropped below the 12V threshold
.
This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default.
Internal Communication Fault
Indicates an internal communication fault has been detected. This fault cannot be disabled.
DC Bus Fault
Indicates the drive has detected a DC Bus Fault. This fault cannot be disabled.
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
EEPROM Fault
This is a major fault, which renders the ArmorStart inoperable. This fault cannot be disabled.
Hardware Fault
Indicates incorrect base/starter assembly or other hardware fault. This fault cannot be disabled.
Restart Retries
This fault is generated when the drive detects that the auto retries count has been exceeded. This fault cannot be disabled.
Miscellaneous Faults
• For Bulletin 284E units, this fault is actually the logical of several drive faults not specifically enumerated.
• This fault cannot be disabled.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Diagnostics Chapter 9
EtherNet/IP LED Status
Indication
Figure 80 - EtherNet/IP LED
EtherNet/IP LED status and diagnostics consists of four LEDs.
• Link Activity/Status LEDS
– Link1 Activity/Status (Port 1) – LED Color: Bicolor (Green/Yellow).
– Link2 Activity/Status (Port 2) – LED Color: Bicolor (Green/Yellow).
• “MOD” LED – Bicolor Red/Green represents the Ethernet Module
• “NET” LED – Bicolor Red/Green represents the Ethernet Network
Link 1 or 2 Status LED
OFF
Green
Flashing green
Yellow
Flashing yellow
Table 31 - Link 1 or Link 2 Port Activity/Status
Description
No link established
Link established at 100 Mbps
Transmit or receive activity present at 100 Mbps
Link established at 10 Mbps
Transmit or receive activity present at 10 Mbps
Recommended Action
Verify network cabling, and correct, as needed.
None
None
None
None
MOD Status LED
Steady OFF
Steady Green
Flashing Green
Flashing Red
Steady Red
Flashing Green/Red
Table 32 - Module Status Indicator
No power
Summary
Device operational
Standby
Minor fault
Major fault
Self-test
Requirement
If no power is supplied to the device, the module status indicator shall be steady OFF.
If the device is operating correctly, the module status indicator shall be steady green.
If the device has not been configured, the module status indicator shall be flashing green.
If the device has detected a recoverable minor fault, the module status indicator shall be flashing red.
Note: An incorrect or inconsistent configuration would be considered a minor fault.
If the device has detected a non-recoverable major fault, refer to Table 33.
While the device is performing its power up testing, the module status indicator shall be flashing green/red.
Refer to Parameter 63 “Base Trip” for the Base Module Trip Status.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
211
Chapter 9 Diagnostics
Control Module LED
Status and Reset
212
Figure 81 - LED Status
Indication and Reset
Table 33 - “Steady Red” MOD LED Status (Refer to Table 32.)
0
Fault Type
EEPROM Fault
Description
Non-volatile memory value out of range for a local parameter, or a write failure detected. This fault is also reflected by a solid red MOD status LED.
1
2
3
4…15
Internal Comm2 The Internal communication connection has timed out. This fault is also reflected by a flashing red MOD status LED.
Hardware Fault Internal diagnostics checks failed. This fault is also reflected by a solid red MOD status LED.
Control Module
Reserved
An illegal or unsupported Control Module product code or revision has been detected. Also reported if no Control
Module is detected on power up. This fault is also reflected by a solid red MOD status LED.
Reserved
Indicator State
Steady OFF
Flashing Green
Steady Green
Flashing Red
Steady Red
Flashing Red/Green
Table 34 - Network Status Indicator
Summary
Not powered, no IP address
No connections
Connected
Connection timeout
Duplicate IP
Self-test
Requirement
If the device does not have an IP address (or is powered OFF), the network status indicator shall be steady OFF.
If the device has no established connections, but has obtained an IP address, the network status indicator shall be flashing green.
If the device has at least one established connection (even to the Message Router), the network status indicator shall be steady green.
If one or more of the connections in which this device is the target has timed out, the network status indicator shall be flashing red. This shall be left if only all timed out connections are reestablished or if the device is reset.
If the device has detected that the IP addtress is already in use, the network status indicator shal be steady red.
While the device is performing its power up testing, the network status indicator shall be flashing green/red.
The Control Module LED status and diagnostics consists of four status LEDs and a Reset button. The following is a brief explanation of the operation of each
LED found on the Control Module.
Table 35 - Control Module LED Status Indication
LED
Power
Definition
This LED will be illuminated solid green when switched control power is present and with the proper polarity.
This LED will be illuminated solid green when a start command and control power is present.
Recommended Action
Ensure 24V DC is present on A1 and A2. Check if the local disconnect is in the OFF position.
Run
Network This bicolor LED is used to indicate the status of the internal network connection.
Fault This LED is used to indicate the fault status of the
ArmorStart. When the unit is faulted, the unit will respond with a specific blink pattern to identify the fault.
Ensure 24V DC is present on A1 and A3. Check if the user is properly commanding to RUN via Instance
162 or 166.
See Table 34, Network Status Indicator table above
for additional information.
See Table 36 and Table 37 below for additional
information.
The “Reset Button” is a local trip reset.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Diagnostics Chapter 9
Control Module Fault
LED Indications
Blink
Pattern
1
2
3
11
12
13
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
14
15
16
Table 36 - Fault LED Indicators for Bulletin 280E/281E
Auto-
Resettable
No
Yes
Yes
—
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
—
No
No
—
—
Bulletin 280E/281E Trip
Short Circuit
Overload
Phase Loss
Reserved
Reserved
Input Fault
Status
Control Pwr Loss (Switched
Power)
Over Temperature
Phase Imbalance
Not Used
Not Used
The ArmorStart has detected a loss of the control power voltage.
Description
The circuit breaker (140M) has tripped.
The load has drawn excessive current and based on the trip class selected, the device has tripped.
The ArmorStart has detected a missing phase.
This error indicates a shorted sensor, shorted input device, wiring input mistakes, or a blown output fuse.
This fault is generated when the operating temperature has been exceeded. This fault cannot be disabled.
The ArmorStart has detected a voltage imbalance.
Action
Determine cause of trip. Try to reset the circuit breaker using the disconnect handle. If the conditions continue, check power wiring or replace based module. This cannot be disabled.
Verify that the load is operating correctly and the
ArmorStart is properly set-up. the fault cannot be disabled.
Verify that 3-phase voltage is present at the line side connections. This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default.
—
—
Check control voltage, wiring, and proper polarity (A1/A2 terminal). Also, check and replace the control voltage fuse, if necessary. This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default.
Correct, isolated or remove wiring error prior to restarting the system. This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default.
Check for blocked or dirty heat sink fins. Verify that ambient temperature has not exceeded 40 °C (104 °F). 1.
Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive.
Check the power system and correct if necessary. This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default.
Control Power (24V DC) Lost
(Unswitched Power)
The 24V DC power supply is below tolerance threshold.
Check the state of the network power supply (A3/A1 terminal) and look for media problems. This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default.
Reserved
Reserved
EEprom
Hdw Flt
Not Used
Not Used
This is a major fault, which renders the ArmorStart inoperable. Possible causes of this fault are transients induced during EEprom storage routines.
This fault indicates that a serious hardware problem exists.
—
—
If the fault was initiated by a transient, power cycling should clear the problem, otherwise replacement of the
ArmorStart may be required. This fault cannot be disabled.
Check for a base/starter module mismatch. If no mismatch exists, the ArmorStart may need to be replaced. (Hdw Flt is the factory-enabled default setting.) This fault cannot be disabled.
Reserved
Reserved
Not Used
Not Used
—
—
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
213
Chapter 9 Diagnostics
Bit/Blink
Pattern
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Table 37 - Fault LED Indicators for 284E
Auto-
Resettable
No
Drive
Controlled
Drive
Controlled
Drive
Controlled
Drive
Controlled
Parameter 23
(PrFlt Reset
Mode)
Parameter 23
(PrFlt Reset
Mode)
Parameter 23
(PrFlt Reset
Mode)
Drive
Controlled
Parameter 23
(PrFlt Reset
Mode)
No
Drive
Controlled
No
284E Trip Status
Short Circuit
Overload
(Drive Codes 7 and 64)
Phase Short
(Drive Codes 38…43)
Ground Fault
(Drive Code 13)
Stall
(Drive Code 6)
Control Pwr Loss (Switched
Power)
Input Fault
Description
The circuit breaker (140M) has tripped.
An excessive motor load exists
Action
Determine cause of trip. Try to reset the circuit breaker using the disconnect handle. If the conditions continue, check power wiring or replace based module. This cannot be disabled.
1. Reduce load so drive output current does not exceed the current set by Parameter 133 (Motor OL Current).
2. Verify Parameter 184 (Boost Select) setting.
3. Drive rating of 150% for 1 minute.
4. Reduce load or extend Accel Time two hundred percent or when 3 seconds has been exceeded.
Check the wiring between the drive and motor. Check motor for grounded phase. Check the motor and drive output terminal wiring for a shorted condition. Replace drive if fault cannot be cleared.
1. Phase U, V, or W to Gnd. A phase to ground fault has been detected between the drive and motor in this phase.
2. Phase UV, UW, or VW Short. Excessive current has been detected between these two output terminals.
A current path to earth ground has been detected at one or more of the drive output terminals.
Drive is unable to accelerate motor.
The ArmorStart has detected a loss of the control power voltage.
This error indicates a shorted sensor, shorted input device, wiring input mistakes, or a blown output fuse.
Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition.
Increase Parameters 139…167 (Accel Time x) or reduce load so drive output current does not exceed the current set by Parameter 189 (Current Limit 1).
Check control voltage, wiring, and proper polarity (A1/A2 terminal). Also, check and replace the control voltage fuse, if necessary. This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default.
If this fault occurs, the offending problem should be isolated or removed prior to restarting the system. This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default.
Over Temperature
Over Current
(Drive Codes 12 and 63)
DC Bus Fault
(Drive Codes Reference 3, 4 and 5)
EEprom
(PF Drive Code Reference
100)
This fault is generated when the operating temperature has been exceeded. This fault cannot be disabled.
The drive output current has exceeded the hardware current limit.
Control Power (24V DC) Lost
(Unswitched Power)
The 24V DC power supply is below tolerance threshold.
Check the state of the network power supply (A3/A1 terminal) and look for media problems. This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default.
Internal Comm
(Refer to Parameter 61 for details on this fault. F81 is a
VFD fault. This could also happen if control power is lost.)
Communication with either the control module (VFD) or
Control module has stopped.
Refer to section Fault 11 Detail. If the problem persists replace the unit.
Power Loss - DC bus voltage remained below 85% of nominal. UnderVoltage - DC but voltage fell below the minimum value. OverVoltage - DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value.
The checksum read from the board does not match the checksum calculated.
Check for blocked or dirty heat sink fins. Verify that ambient temperature has not exceeded 40 °C (104 °F).
1. Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive.
Check programming. Check for excess load, improper
Parameter 184 (Boost Select) setting. DC brake volts set too high or other causes of excess current. Parameter 198
(SW Current Trip) has been exceeded, check load requirements and Parameter 198 setting.
Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption. Check the input fuses. Monitor the
AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions. Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration.
Extend the decel time or install dynamic brake option.
Set Parameter 141 (Reset to Defaults) to Option 1 “Reset
Defaults”.
214
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Diagnostics Chapter 9
Table 37 - Fault LED Indicators for 284E
Bit/Blink
Pattern
14
15
16
Auto-
Resettable
No
Drive
Controlled
284E Trip Status
Hdw Flt (PF Drive Codes
Reference 70 and 122)
Restart Retries (PF Drive
Code Reference 33)
Drive
Controlled
Misc. Fault (PF Drive Code
Reference 2, 8, 29, 48 and
80)
Description
Failure has been detected in the drive power section or drive control and I/O section.
Drive unsuccessfully attempted to reset a fault and resume running for the programmed number of
Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries).
Heatsink temperature exceeds a predefined value. The drive was commanded to write default values to EEprom.
The autotune function was either cancelled by the user or failed. If DB1 option installed refer to P61 for additional diagnostics.
Action
1. Cycle power.
2. Replace drive if fault cannot be cleared.
Correct the cause of the fault and manually clear.
Check for blocked or dirty heat sink fins. Verify that ambient temperature has not exceeded 40 °C (104 °F) and mounted properly.
1. Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive.
2. Program the drive parameters as needed. Restart procedure.
3. Check for DB1 fault
Fault 11 Detail
Parameter 61 provides a more granular description of the faults that occur.
• An F11 protection fault indicates that the internal communication has stopped
• There is a 10 second delay before an F11 Internal Comm. fault is present
• Common causes of an Internal Comm. fault:
– The local ArmorStart Disconnect switch is in the OFF position.
– 3-Phase line power feeding the ArmorStart is not connected or is turned OFF.
– Switched Control Power is not connected or is turned OFF.
– Poor power quality (Brown Out)
• First things to check:
– Verify that the local disconnect is in the ON position.
– Verify that the unit has 3-Phase Line Voltage present and it is within specified tolerances.
– Verify that the ArmorStart unit has Control Voltage present and it is within specified tolerances.
– Attempt to clear the fault by pressing the local reset or sending the
ArmorStart a network reset.
– Cycle power to the ArmorStart unit and try to clear the fault again.
• If an Internal Comm. fault persists, refer to Parameter 61 – LastPR Fault for additional details on the last protection fault. Refer to the following table for troubleshooting information based on what Parameter 61 returns.
Also refer to Parameters 107…109 to get the VFD fault code that can be referenced below.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
215
Chapter 9 Diagnostics
Parameter 61 Fault Code
13 = Control Power Loss
14 = Control Power Fuse
21 = A3 Power Loss
22 = Internal Comm
24 = Power Loss (3-Phase)
25 = Under Voltage (3-Phase)
Description
Control power was lost or dipped below the lower threshold long enough to cause the Internal Comm. fault.
The control power fuse has blown and the control power circuit no longer is a closed circuit.
Unswitched (A3/A2) control power was lost or dipped below the lower threshold long enough to cause the
Internal Comm. fault.
• DeviceNet power loss
• The ArmorStart's MCB lost communications with the
VFD. This is most likely due to a loss of 3-phase power.
• PF Fault Code 3 or 4
Recommended Action
• Check that control power is turned on and within specified tolerances.
• Check the Control Power fuse, replace if necessary.
• Press the local reset or send the unit a network reset once control power is restored.
• Additional investigation as to why the fuse blew is needed. Take corrective action accordingly.
• Replace the fuse and reset the ArmorStart either locally or over the network.
• Check that the A3 or DNet power terminal does not have any loose connections.
• Press the local reset or send the unit a network reset once the unswitched control power is restored
• Check that the local disconnect is in the ON position.
• Check for a power quality issue, take appropriate corrective actions.
• Check that 3-phase power is present.
• Press the local reset or send the unit anetwork reset
• Check that control power and the network power are both present.
• Press the local reset or send the unit a network reset.
23 = Drive Comm Loss (PF Fault Code 81) The PowerFlex VFD lost communications with the MCB.
This is most likely due to a loss of control power or network power.
28 = Base EEPROM The MCB can't read the base module's EEPROM or isn't communicating correctly with the base module. In the
EtherNet/IP units, Parameter 63 – Base Trip provides more detail as to why the base module may not be communicating properly with the control module
41 = DB1 Comm The MCB has lost communications with the Dynamic
Brake (DB1) board or the EEPROM on the DB1 board may be corrupt.
• Cycle power to the ArmorStart unit.
• Ensure that the control module is seated correctly in the base module
• Check the connector on the control module for bent or broken pins
• Press the local reset or send the unit a network reset
• Cycle power to the ArmorStart unit.
Resetting Device to
Factory Defaults
To factory reset the base and control module refer to parameter 47 “Set to
Defaults”. To reset only the VFD in the control module for Bulletin 284 refer to
Parameter 141 “Reset To Defaults”. Both these resets are limited and do not put the product completely in the “out of box” configuration. The Type 1 Reset will perform a full product reset to the “out of box” status.
SERVICE CODE 0X05
Class Code 0x0001
INSTANCE 1
Data (USINT) 1
You will need to perform a Type 1 Reset in the event that the login and password for the product is lost and forgotten.
WARNING: A Type 1 Reset will cause all parameters and web page login to revert to their factory defaults. No user date will be saved.
WARNING: A Type 1 Reset should only be executed when necessary or when the login and password must be cleared and set to the factory default setting.
216
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Diagnostics Chapter 9
In the following example, the user will utilize Rockwell Automation
RSLogix 5000 PLC programming software to create a Type 1 Reset. Other tools can be used, provided the class, instance, and attribute values can be sent to the product’s identify object.
1.
Within RSLogix 5000, select File > New to create a new project. Ensure the project is offline.
2.
If an Add-On-Profile (AOP) window is open, click the Cancel button to close it at the bottom of the AOP screen.
3.
Close any internet browser windows, including Internet Explorer that are being used to view the ArmorStart web browser.
IMPORTANT
For those using an Internet Browser with multiple tabs open, you will need to close the entire browser window, not just the tab within the ArmorStart browser.
4.
Unplug any inputs and outputs that are connected to the ArmorStart unit.
WARNING: A Type 1 Reset cannot be done if there is an I/O device plugged into the product port. This may cause an unsafe state to occur in the ArmorStart or the environment around the ArmorStart.
5.
Create a new Controller Tag of data type DINT and assign it a value of 1.
a. Double click on Controller Tags in the Controller Organizer.
b. Select the Edit Tags tab at the bottom of the tag list screen.
c. Create another new tag, the example used below is named Data1. d. Assign Data1 a value of 1 by clicking on the Monitor Tags tab and enter a 1 in the Value field.
e. Create a tag for reset input.
1. Double click on Program Tags in the Controller Organizer
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
217
Chapter 9 Diagnostics
218
2. Select the Edit Tags tab at the bottom of the screen and create a tag named Reset of the type BOOL (Boolean).
6.
Create a rung in ladder logic for executing the Type 1 Reset. a. Add an XIC Input and assign it the BOOL tag Reset.
b. Add a Message (MSG) instruction that will be used to execute the reset. The message instruction can be found in the Input/Output instruction set tab.
c. The completed rung should look like the one below.
7.
Configure the message instruction: a. Begin by double clicking on the tag name field and entering AS_Reset. b. Right click on the tag name AS_Reset and select New “AS_Reset”.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Diagnostics Chapter 9 c. Verify the tag data type and options with the figure below and click OK.
d. Bring up the Configuration Dialog screen by clicking the box next to the tag name AS_Reset.
e. Select CIP Generic from the Message Type drop-down menu and
Custom
from the Service Type drop-down menu.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
219
Chapter 9 Diagnostics f. Click on the Source Element drop-down box and select the Data1 tag that was created earlier and press Enter.
g. Enter 5 for the Service Code, 1 for the Class, and 1 for the Instance.
Leave the Attribute value at 0. Once you have added these values, the
Service Type
should automatically change to Device Reset.
220
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Diagnostics Chapter 9 h. Click on the Communication tab at the top of the window. Click on the Browse button, select the ArmorStart that is in your project, and click OK. This selects the ArmorStart as the device you are going to send the reset message to.
i. You do not need to configure anything in the Tag tab. Click Apply and then OK.
8.
Save your project. Download the project to the PLC and go Online.
9.
Inhibit the ArmorStart using the AOP: a. Once online, open the ArmorStart's AOP and click on the Connection tab. Select Inhibit Module from the options. b. Click Apply, the following screen should pop-up. Click Yes. Then click
OK
to close out the AOP.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
221
Chapter 9 Diagnostics c. You should see the yellow inhibit symbol next to the ArmorStart in the
I/O Configuration tree showing that the module is inhibited.
10.
Execute the instruction by toggling the Reset input that was created earlier. a. Energize the bit by left mouse clicking on the input and pushing
CTRL+T
. De-energize the bit with CTRL+T again.
b. You should see the status LEDs on the ArmorStart display the Reset and Power Cycle sequence. You should also see the Done (DN) bit of the message turn green indicating that the reset was successful.
11.
Verify the reset worked by bringing the ArmorStart's web browser back up and verifying that the User Name is Administrator and that there is no set password.
12.
Uninhibit the ArmorStart module through the AOP and plug any I/O connections back into the ArmorStart.
222
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Introduction
Chapter
10
Troubleshooting
The purpose of this chapter is to assist in troubleshooting the ArmorStart®
Distributed Motor Controller using the LED status display and diagnostic parameters.
ATTENTION: Servicing energized industrial control equipment can be hazardous.
Electrical shock, burns or unintentional actuation of controlled industrial equipment may cause death or serious injury. For safety of maintenance personnel as well as others who might be exposed to electrical hazards associated with maintenance activities, follow the local safety related work practices (for example, the NFPA70E, Part II in the
United States). Maintenance personnel must be trained in the safety practices, procedures, and requirements that pertain to their respective job assignments.
ATTENTION: Do not attempt to defeat or override fault circuits. The cause of the fault indication must be determined and corrected before attempting operation. Failure to correct a control system of mechanical malfunction may result in personal injury and / or equipment damage due to uncontrolled machine system operation.
ATTENTION: The drive contains high voltage capacitors that take time to discharge after removal of mains supply. Before working on drive, ensure isolation of mains supply from line inputs (R, S, T, [L1, L2, L3]). Wait three minutes for capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or death.
Darkened display LEDs is not an indication that capacitors have discharged to safe voltage levels.
ATTENTION: Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation, startup, and subsequent maintenance of the system. Failure to comply may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage.
ATTENTION: This drive contains electrostatic discharge (ESD) – sensitive parts and assemblies. Static control precautions are required when installing, testing, servicing, or repairing this assembly. Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed. If you are not familiar with static control procedures, refer to Allen-Bradley Publication 8000-4.5.2
, Guarding against Electrostatic Damage, or any other applicable ESD protection handbook.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
223
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
Bulletin 280E/281E
Troubleshooting
ATTENTION: An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life. Wiring or application errors, such as undersizing of the motor, incorrect or inadequate AC supply, or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system.
The following flowchart for Bulletin 280E/281E units is provided to aid in quick troubleshooting.
Figure 82 - Bulletin 280E/281E Control Module LED Status
Yes
Faulted Display
No
Bulletin 284E
Troubleshooting
Fault
LED
See
Network
LED
See
Motor will not
Start
See
Fault Definitions
Some of the Bulletin 284E ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller faults are detected by the internal hardware of the ArmorStart, while others are detected by the internal drive. For internal drive faults, the internal hardware of the
ArmorStart simply polls the drive for the existence of faults and reports the fault state. No fault latching is done by the internal hardware of the ArmorStart for these faults. The PrFlt ResetMode parameter (Parameter 23) determines the
Auto Resettability of only the faults that are detected on the main control board.
The Auto Resettability of the faults that are detected in the internal drive is
controlled by internal drive parameters, refer to Table 38 . The following
flowchart for Bulletin 284E units is provided to aid in quick troubleshooting.
224
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
DB1 Faults
Fault
LED
See
Network
LED
See
Figure 83 - Bulletin 284E Control Module LED Status
Yes
Faulted Display
No
Define Nature of the Problem
Motor will not start
See
Actions
Troubleshooting Chapter 10
Operation and Troubleshooting of the DB1 - Dynamic Brake
Eight types of DB1 faults are detected and reported in Parameter 61 as either a
“DB1 Flt”, “DB1 Comm Fault” or DB1 Switch Short”. DB1 faults are also reported in Attribute 158 “DB1 Fault” of the Control Supervisor Object (Class
Code: 29 Hex). See
for Control Supervisor information.
If the ArmorStart Fault LED blinks 11x's check parameter 61. If value is 41, check the following:
• DB1 Comm Fault
If the ArmorStart Fault LED blinks 16x's check parameter 61. If value is 42, check the following:
• DB1 Resistor Overtemperature Fault
• DB1 Overcurrent Fault
• DB1 Undercurrent Fault
• DB1 Open Fault
• DB1 VBus Link Fault
If the ArmorStart Fault LED blinks 16x's check parameter 61. If value is 43, check the following:
• DB1 Switch Fault
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
225
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
226
The DB1 option provides the following warning:
• DB1 Thermal Warning
DB1 Resistor Overtemperature Fault
Control Supervisor Object “DB1 Fault” Attribute Bit 0.
The DB1 measures current continuously, and models resistor body temperature based on measured current and resistor model parameters. The DB1 not only calculates the present resistor body temperature, but also predicts the future resistor body temperature. The resistor overtemperature level is based on the predicted future resistor body temperature, not on the present resistor body temperature. This fault is disabled when Parameter 182 (DB1 Resistor Sel) is
“Disabled”.
Troubleshooting
– DB1 Resistor body temperature is too hot. Allow resistor to cool.
DB1 Overcurrent Fault
Control Supervisor Object “DB1 Fault” Attribute Bit 1.
The DB1 compares each current measurement against the Max Current Level. If
5 consecutive samples are above the Max Current Level, then a fault is recorded.
This fault is intended to notify the user if the DB1 resistance is lower than expected. This fault is disabled when Parameter 182 (DB1 Resistor Sel) is
“Disabled”.
Troubleshooting
– DB1 monitor has measured a DB1 current higher than expected. Turn off all power to unit. Allow at least 3 minutes for capacitors to discharge. Disconnect DB1 resistor from ArmorStart control module. Caution:
DB1 resistor may still be hot.
Measure DB1 resistor value at the connector with an ohmmeter. Refer to the specification for minimum DB1 resistor values. If DB1 resistance value is within limits, replace control module. If not, replace DB1 resistor.
DB1 Undercurrent Fault
Control Supervisor Object “DB1 Fault” Attribute Bit 2.
The DB1 compares each current measurement against the Min Current Level.
The Min Current Level = Min DB1 Voltage Level/Max DB1 Resistance. If 5 consecutive samples are below the Min Current Level and the DB1 is ON, then a fault is recorded. This fault is intended to notify the user if the DB1 resistance is
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Troubleshooting Chapter 10 higher than expected. This fault is disabled when Parameter 182 (DB1 Resistor
Sel) is “Disabled”.
Troubleshooting
– DB1 monitor has measured a DB1 current lower than expected. Turn off all power to unit. Allow at least 3 minutes for capacitors to discharge. Disconnect DB1 resistor from ArmorStart control module. Caution:
DB1 resistor may still be hot.
Measure DB1 resistor value at the connector with an ohmmeter. Refer to the specification for minimum DB1 resistor values.
If DB1 resistance value is within limits, replace control module. If not, replace
DB1 resistor.
DB1 Switch Fault
Control Supervisor Object “DB1 Fault” Attribute Bit 3.
A DB1 Switch fault is issued when continuous DB1 resistor current is detected when the Drive Bus Voltage level is less than the DB1 Voltage Level. If 5 consecutive samples of Drive Bus Voltage less than DB1 Level is detected along with continuous DB1 resistor current flow, then a shorted DB1 IGBT fault
(DB1 Switch) is recorded.
It is the user’s responsibility to provide an input power contactor to each
ArmorStart with a drive. The user must write logic to control (open) the input contactor to the ArmorStart in the event of a DB1 Switch Fault. The Instruction
Literature provides information on how to connect the input contactor, and how to implement the logic.
Troubleshooting
– Attempt to reset the fault by removing all power to the unit and restarting. If the fault persists, replace control module.
DB1 Open Fault
Control Supervisor Object “DB1 Fault” Attribute Bit 4.
A DB1 Open fault is issued when Bus Voltage is greater than the DB1 Voltage
Level, and no DB1 resistor current has been detected. If 5 consecutive samples of Drive Bus Voltage greater than the DB1 Level is detected along with no DB1 resistor current flow, then an open DB1 fault is recorded. This fault is intended to notify the customer of an open DB1 resistor, or open wire. The fault is disabled when the DB1 Resistor Sel, Parameter (182) is “Disabled”.
Troubleshooting
– DB1 monitor expected to see current flow and measured none. Likely cause is an open DB1 resistor, loose DB1 resistor connector, or open wire in DB1 cable. Check DB1 cable connector for tightness. If problem persists, remove DB1 resistor cable connector from unit and check DB1 resistance. If
DB1 resistor is open, replace DB1 resistor. Otherwise replace control module.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
227
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
DB1 VBus Link Fault
Control Supervisor Object “DB1 Fault” Attribute Bit 6.
For proper operation, the DB1 monitors parameters from the Drive internally inside the ArmorStart. If the internal communications to the drive is lost, then this fault is issued. Since the DB1 can no longer provide resistor protection, the user must implement logic to open the input contactor.
Troubleshooting
– Make sure that 3-phase line power and control power is applied to unit. Attempt to reset fault. If fault persists, replace control module.
DB1 Comm Fault
Control Supervisor Object “DB1 Fault” Attribute Bit 8.
The communications link is monitored continuously. If the DB1 stops responding, then the MCB issues this fault. Since the DB1 can no longer provide resistor protection, the user must implement logic to open the input contactor.
Troubleshooting
– Replace control module.
DB1 Thermal Warning
Control Supervisor Object “DB1 Status” Attribute Bit 1.
A DB1 Thermal Warning is issued if the predicted future resistor body temperature is greater than the Max DB1 resistor temperature x DB1 Thermal
Warning Percent.
Troubleshooting
– None. DB1 resistor thermal value has exceeded the preset threshold of 90% of thermal value.
228
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Troubleshooting Chapter 10
Internal Drive Faults
A fault is a condition that stops the drive. There are two fault types.
Table 38 - Internal Drive Faults
Type
1
2
Description
Auto-Reset/Run
When this type of fault occurs, Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries) and related Parameter(s): 155 (Relay Out
Sel), 193 (Auto Rstrt Delay) are set to a value greater than 0, a user-configurable timer, Parameter 193 (Auto
Rstrt Delay) and related Parameter: 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries), begins. When the timer reaches zero, the drive attempts to automatically reset the fault. If the condition that caused the fault is no longer present, the fault will be reset and the drive will be restarted
Non-Resettable
This type of fault may require drive or motor repair, or is caused by wiring or programing errors. The cause of the fault must be corrected before the fault can be cleared.
Automatically Clearing Faults (Option/Step)
Clear a Type 1 Fault and Restart the Drive:
1.
Set Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries) to a value other than 0.
2.
Set Parameter 193 (Auto Rstrt Delay) to a value other than 0.
Clear an Overvoltage, Undervoltage or Heatsink OvrTmp Fault without
Restarting the Drive:
1.
Set Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries) to a value other than 0.
2.
Set Parameter 193 (Auto Rstrt Delay) to 0.
Auto Restart (Reset/Run)
The Auto Restart feature provides the ability for the drive to automatically perform a fault reset followed by a start attempt without user or application intervention. This allows remote or unattended operation. Only certain faults are allowed to be reset. Certain faults (Type 2) that indicate possible drive component malfunction are not resettable. Caution should be used when enabling this feature, since the drive will attempt to issue its own start command based on user selected programming.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
229
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
The following table describes Bulletin 284E Faults as seen in Parameters 107,
108, and 109 (Fault 1, 2 or 3).
No.
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F12
F13
F33
Fault
Auxiliary Input
Power Loss
UnderVoltage
OverVoltage
Motor Stalled
Motor Overload
Heatsink OvrTmp
HW OverCurrent
Ground Fault
Auto Rstrt Tries
F38
F39
F40
F41
F42
F43
Phase U to Gnd
Phase V to Gnd
Phase W to Gnd
Phase UV Short
Phase UW Short
Phase VW Short
F48 Params Defaulted
Table 39 - Bulletin 284E Faults – Parameters 107, 108, and 109 (Fault 1, 2 or 3)
Type
➊
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
Description
Auxiliary input interlock is open.
DC bus voltage remained below 85% of nominal.
DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value.
DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value.
Drive is unable to accelerate motor.
Internal electronic overload trip
4.
Check remote wiring.
5.
Verify communications.
6.
7.
Check input fuses.
8.
Action
Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption.
Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption.
9.
Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions. Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration. Extend the decel time or install dynamic brake option.
10. Increase Parameters 139 or 167 (Accel Time x) or reduce load so drive output current does not exceed the current set by Parameter 189 (Current Limit 1).
11. An excessive motor load exists. Reduce load so drive output current does not exceed the current set by Parameter 133 (Motor OL Current).
12. Verify Parameter 184 (Boost Select) setting
Heatsink temperature exceeds a predefined value.
The drive output current has exceeded the hardware current limit.
A current path to earth ground has been detected at one or more of the drive output terminals.
13. Check for blocked or dirty heat sink fins. Verify that ambient temperature has not exceeded 40
°C.
14. Replace internal fan.
15. Check programming. Check for excess load, improper programming of Parameter 184
(Boost Select), DC brake volts set too high, or other causes of excess current.
16. Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition.
Drive unsuccessfully attempted to reset a fault and resume running for the programmed number of Parameter 192
(Auto Rstrt Tries).
17. Correct the cause of the fault and manually clear.
A phase to ground fault has been detected between the drive and motor in this phase .
18. Check the wiring between the drive and motor.
19. Check motor for grounded phase.
20. Replace starter module if fault cannot be cleared.
2 Excessive current has been detected between these two output terminals.
21. Check the motor and drive output terminal wiring for a shorted condition.
22. Replace starter module if fault cannot be cleared.
2
F63
F64
F70
F80
SW OverCurrent
Drive Overload
Power Unit
SVC Autotune
2
2
2
The drive was commanded to write default values to EEPROM.
23. Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive.
24. Program the drive parameters as needed.
Programmed Parameter 198 (SW Current
Trip) has been exceeded.
25. Check load requirements and Parameter 198 (SW Current Trip) setting.
26. Reduce load or extend Accel Time.
Drive rating of 150% for 1 min. or 200% for 3 sec. has been exceeded.
Failure has been detected in the drive power section.
The autotune function was either cancelled by the user or failed.
27. Cycle power.
28. Replace starter module if fault cannot be cleared.
29. Restart procedure.
230
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Troubleshooting Chapter 10
No.
F81
F100
F122
Fault
Comm Loss
Parameter
Checksum
I/O Board Fail
Table 39 - Bulletin 284E Faults – Parameters 107, 108, and 109 (Fault 1, 2 or 3)
Type
➊
2
2
Description
RS485 (DSI) port stopped communicating.
The checksum read from the board does not match the checksum calculated.
2
Action
30. Turn off using Parameter 205 (Comm Loss Action).
31. Replace starter module if fault cannot be cleared.
32. Set Parameter 141 (Reset To Defaults) to Option 1 (Reset Defaults).
Failure has been detected in the drive control and I/O section.
33. Cycle power.
34. Replace starter module if fault cannot be cleared.
Table 38 for Type description.
Drive is Faulted
Table 40 - Motor Does Not Start
Cause(s)
No output voltage to the motor.
None
Indication
Flashing red status light
Corrective Action
Check the power circuit.
• Check the supply voltage.
• Check all fuses and disconnects
Check the motor.
• Verify that the motor is connected properly.
• Verify that I/O Terminal 01 is active.
• Verify that Parameter 136 (Start Source) matches your configuration.
• Verify that Parameter 195 (Reverse Disable) is not prohibiting movement.
Clear fault.
• Press Stop
• Cycle power
• Set Parameter 200 (Fault Clear) to Option 1 (Clear Faults).
• Cycle digital input is Parameters 151…154 (Digital In x Sel) is set to Option 7, (Clear
Faults).
Table 41 - Drive Does Not Respond to Changes in Speed Command
Cause(s)
No value is coming form the source of the command.
Indication
The drive Run indicator is lit and output is 0 Hz.
Incorrect reference source is being selected via remote device or digital inputs.
None
Corrective Action
• Check Parameter 112 (Control Source) for correct source.
• If the source is an analog input, check wiring and use a meter to check for presence of signal.
• Check Parameter 102 (Commanded Freq) to verify correct command.
• Check Parameter 112 (Control Source) for correct source.
• Check Parameter 114 (Dig In Status) to see if inputs are selecting an alternate source. Verify settings for Parameters 151…154 (Digital In x Sel).
• Check Parameter 138 (Speed Reference) for the source of the speed reference. Reprogram as necessary.
Table 42 - Motor and/or Drive Will Not Accelerate to Commanded Speed
Cause(s)
Acceleration time is excessive.
Excess load or short acceleration times force the drive into current limit, slowing, or stopping acceleration.
None
None
Indication Corrective Action
Reprogram Parameter 139 (Accel Time 1) or Parameter 167 (Accel Time 2).
• Compare Parameter 103 (Output Current) with Parameter 189 (Current Limit1).
• Remove excess load or reprogram Parameter 139 (Accel Time 1) or Parameter 167 (Accel
Time 2).
• Check for improper setting of Parameter 184 (Boost Select).
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
231
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
Table 42 - Motor and/or Drive Will Not Accelerate to Commanded Speed
Cause(s)
Speed command source or value is not as expected.
Programming is preventing the drive output from exceeding limiting values.
Torque performance does not match motor characteristics.
None
None
None
Indication Corrective Action
• Verify Parameter 102 (Commanded Freq).
• Check Parameter 112 (Control Source) for the proper Speed Command.
Check Parameter 135 (Maximum Freq) to insure that speed is not limited by programming.
• Set motor nameplate full load amps in Parameter 226 (Motor NP FLA).
• Use Parameter 227 (Autotune) to perform Static Tune or Rotate Tune procedure.
• Set Parameter 225 (Torque Perf Mode) to Option 0 (V/Hz).
Cause(s)
Motor data was incorrectly entered.
None
Table 43 - Motor Operation is Unstable
Indication Corrective Action
1. Correctly enter motor nameplate data into Parameters 131, 132, and 133.
2. Enable Parameter 197 (Compensation).
3. Use Parameter 184 (Boost Select) to reduce boost level.
Cause(s)
Digital input is not selected for reversing control.
Motor wiring is improperly phased for reverse.
Reverse is disabled.
None
None
None
Table 44 - Drive Will Not Reverse Motor Direction
Indication Corrective Action
Check Parameters 151…154 (Digital In x Sel). Choose correct input and program for reversing mode.
Switch two motor leads.
Check Parameter 195 (Reverse Disable).
Cause(s)
No input power to drive.
None
Jumper between I/O Terminals P2 and P1 not installed and/or DC
Bus Inductor not connected.
None
Table 45 - Drive Does Not Power Up
Indication Corrective Action
Check the power circuit.
• Check the supply voltage.
• Check all fuses and disconnects.
Install jumper or connect DC Bus Inductor.
232
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Troubleshooting Chapter 10
Control Module Removal
ATTENTION: To avoid shock hazard, disconnect main power before working on the controller, motor, or control devices.
1.
Disconnect power by going to the control module and turning OFF the
At-Motor disconnect and performing lockout-tagout per your company policy.
2.
Remove motor cable.
3.
Loosen the four mounting screws.
4.
Unplug the Control module from the base by pulling forward.
Installation of Control Module
5.
Install control module.
6.
Tighten four mounting screws.
7.
Install motor cable.
Figure 84 - Control Module Replacement
1
Motor Cable
2
3
4
Note: DeviceNet™ base module is shown.
5
30 lb•in./
3.39 N•m
6
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
7
233
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
Figure 85 - Control Voltage and Output Fuse Replacement
Output Fuse
Cat. No. 25176-155-03
Figure 86 - Source Brake Fuse Replacement (Bulletin 284E only)
Control Voltage Fuse
Cat. No. 25172-260-17
234
Source Control Brake Fuses
Cat. No. W25172-260-12
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Troubleshooting Chapter 10
Troubleshoot and General
Solutions for Linear or DLR
Networks
Before you attempt to correct specific faults on your linear or DLR network, we recommend that you first take the following actions when a fault appears.
• For a DLR network:
– verify that you have configured at least one node as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = Ring.
– verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device.
– verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly.
– check the Network Status field on the active supervisor node’s status page to determine the fault type.
• For a linear network:
– verify that none of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and that Network Topology = Linear.
– If any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor, it may impact communication to other devices connected to the network.
– verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device.
– verify that all devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly.
If the fault is not cleared once you have completed the actions listed above, use the tables in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a linear network.
Specific Issues on Your DLR or Linear Network
Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on your DLR or linear network that are not solved by the actions described above.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
235
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
Issue
Table 46 - Troubleshoot DLR or Linear Network
Description Solution
A link on the DLR network may be broken:
• Intentionally, for example, because you are adding or deleting nodes but have not made all physical connections to restore the set up of the network with/without the node.
• Unintentionally, for example, because a cable is broken or a device malfunctions.
When this fault occurs, the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring
Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring Fault.
The screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active nodes. The faulted node is between nodes 10.88.80.115 and 10.88.80.208. If the IP address of either node is not available, the software will display the node’s MAC ID.
Determine where the fault condition exists and correct it.
You may need to click the Refresh Communication link to update the Ring Fault information to determine where the fault condition exists.
Figure 87 - Ring Fault Section
Supervisor Reports a Ring Fault
Once the fault is corrected, the ring is automatically restored, and the Network Status field returns to
Normal.
236
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Troubleshooting Chapter 10
Issue
Rapid Ring Fault
Partial Fault
Condition
Table 46 - Troubleshoot DLR or Linear Network
Description Solution
When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs, the following events occur:
• The active supervisor will block traffic on port 2, resulting in possible network segmentation, that is, some nodes may become unreachable.
• The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is off.
• As soon as the fault occurs, for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx communication software, the Status field = Rapid Fault/Restore Cycles.
Figure 88 - Rapid Fault/Restore Cycles Status
Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Fault:
• 5 intentional disconnections/reconnections of a node from the network within 30 s
• A duplex mismatch between two connected devices
• Electromagnetic noise on the network
• Unstable physical connections, such as intermittent connectors
Given the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault, the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a
Rapid Ring Fault condition is present
A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for some reason, such as because of a component failure.
The active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab.
When a partial fault is detected, the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port. At this point, the ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition. The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC ID’s for each node displayed.
When this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault Condition.
Once the fault is corrected, it automatically clears, and the Network Status field returns to Normal.
Multiple possible solutions exist.
• For the disconnections and reconnections issue, no solution is required.
Clear the fault when you have reconnected the device to the network permanently.
• For the duplex mismatch issue, reconfigure the duplex parameters to make sure they match between the devices.
• For the electromagnetic noise issue, determine where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location.
• For the unstable connections issue, determine where they exist on the network and correct them.
• Check the media counters for all devices on the network. The device with the highest media counter count is most likely causing the Rapid
Ring Fault.
• Remove devices from the network one by one.
When you see the Rapid Ring Fault disappear after a device is removed, that device is causing the fault.
• Finally, your Beacon Interval or Timeout configuration may not be appropriate for your network.
However, if you think you need to change these values, we recommend that you call
Rockwell Automation technical support.
Once the fault is fixed, click Clear Fault.
Determine where the fault condition exists and correct it.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
237
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
Issue
Table 46 - Troubleshoot DLR or Linear Network
Description
The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions. The screen below indicates where to check for errors encountered. Error levels are displayed depending on what caused the error. For example, an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field.
Figure 89 - Media Counter Screen
Solution
Some example solutions include:
• Check for a mismatch of speed and/or duplex between two linked nodes.
• Verify that all cables on the network are securely connected to each device.
• Check for electromagnetic noise on the network. If you find it, eliminate it or use a protective shield in that location.
Media Counter
Errors or Collisions
On a DLR network, it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors. For example, if the network breaks, a low level of media counter errors appear. With a low level of media counter errors, the value typically does not continuously increase and often clears.
A high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear. For example, there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes, a high level of media counter errors appears, steadily increasing and not clearing.
To access the RSLinx screen above, browse the network, right-click on the device, select Module
Properties and click the Port Diagnostics tab.
238
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Chapter
11
Specifications for EtherNet/IP
Bulletin 280E/281E
Power Circuit
Control Circuit
Short Circuit
Protection
Electrical Ratings
Rated Operation Voltage
Rate Insulation Voltage
Rated Impulsed Voltage
Dielectric Withstand
Operating Frequency
Utilization Category
Protection Against Shock
Rated Operating Current Max.
Rated Operation Voltage
Rate Insulation Voltage
Rated Impulsed Voltage
Dielectric Withstand
Overvoltage Category
Operating Frequency
Short Circuit Protection Device
(SCPD) Performance Type 1
SCPD List
Contactor Life Load Curves on page 244
UL/NEMA
200…575V
600V
6 kV
2200V AC
50/60 Hz
N/A
N/A
480Y/277V 480Y/480V
IEC
200…575V
600V
6 kV
2500V AC
50/60 Hz
AC-3
IP2X
280_-____-10A-* ➊
280_-____-10B-* ➊
280_-____-10C-* ➊
280_-____-25D-* ➊
1.2 A
2.5 A
5.5 A
16 A
24V DC (+10%, –15%) A2 (should be grounded at voltage source)
250V 250V
—
1500V AC
4kV
2000V AC
—
50/60 Hz
Voltage
III
—
600Y/347V Current Rating
0.24…1.2 A
0.5…2.5 A
1.1…5.5 A
3.2…16 A
Sym. Amps rms
65 kA
30 kA
65 kA
30 kA
30 kA
30 kA
Size per NFPA 70 (NEC) or NFPA 79 for Group Motor Applications
600V
30 kA
30 kA
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
239
Chapter 11 Specifications for EtherNet/IP
Environmental
Operating Temperature Range
Storage and Transportation
Temperature Range
Altitude
Humidity
Pollution Degree
Enclosure Ratings
Approximate Shipping Weight
UL/NEMA
NEMA 4/12
Resistance to Shock
–20…40 °C (–4…104 °F)
–25….85 °C (–13…185 °F)
1000 m
5…95% (on-condensing)
3
18.1 kg (40 lbs)
IEC
IP67
Mechanical
Contactor Mechanical Life
Other Rating
Other Rating
Operational
Non-Operational
Wire Size
Tightening Torque
Wire Strip Length
WireSize
Tightening Torque
Wire Strip Length
Disconnect Lock Out
Resistance to Vibration
1 G, 0.15 mm (0.006 in.) Displacement
2.5 G, 0.38 mm (0.015 in.) Displacement
Power and Ground Terminals
Primary/Secondary Terminal:
#16…#10 AWG
Primary Terminal: 10.8 lb·in.
Secondary Terminal: 4.5 lb·in.
Primary/Secondary Terminal:
1.0…4.0 mm2
Primary Terminal: 1.2 N·m
Secondary Terminal: 0.5 N·m
0.35 in. (9 mm)
Control Terminals
#18…#10 AWG
6.2 lb·in.
1.0…4.0 mm2
0.7 N·m
0.35 in. (9 mm)
Maximum of 5/16 in. (8 mm) lock shackle or hasp. The hasp should not exceed
5/16 in. (8 mm) when closed, or damage will occur to disconnect guard.
C23
—
13
CatNo 100Ops
280/1_-_12* Mil
C12
13
280/1_-_23* Mil
EMC Emission Levels
—
Conducted Radio Frequency Emissions
Radiated Emissions
Electrostatic Discharge
10V rms Communications Cables
10V rms (PE)
150 kHz…80 MHz
Class A
EMC Immunity Levels
4 kV contact and 8 kV Air
Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field
Fast Transient
Surge Transient
Overload Current Range
Trip Classes ➊
Trip Rating
Number of poles
280_-____-10A-*
280_-____-10B-*
280_-____-10C-*
280_-____-25D-*
10V/m, 80 MHz…1 GHz
3V/m, 1.4 GHz…2 GHz
1V/m, 2.0 GHz …2.7 GHz
2 kV (Power)
2 kV (PE)
1 kV (Communications and Control)
1 kV (12) L-L, 2 kV (2) L-N (Earth)
0.24…1.2 A
0.5…2.5 A
1.1…5.5 A
3.2…16 A
10, 15, 20
120% of Full Load current (FLC) Setting
3
Motor Overload Trip Curves on page 243
240
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Specifications for EtherNet/IP Chapter 11
Standards Compliance
Control Voltage
Module Inrush
Module Steady
Certifications
Total Control Power (Pick Up)
Total Control Power (Running)
Input Ratings – Sourced from
Control Circuit
(A3/A2)
UL/NEMA
UL 508
CSA C22.2, No. 14
EN/IEC 60947-4
EN/IEC 60947-4-1
CE Marked per Low Voltage 2006/95/EC
EMC Directive 2004/108/EC
CCC
ODVA for EtherNet/IP cULus (File No. E3125, Guides NLDX, NLDX7)
IEC
Units
Volts
EtherNet/IP Version – Control and I/O Power Requirements
A1/A2
➊
A3/A2
➋
A1/A2 A3/A2
➋
W/O HOA W/ HOA
Amps
Amps
Watts
Watts
0.92
0.06
22.08
1.44
0.30
0.30
7.20
7.20
24V DC
1.09
0.23
26.16
5.52
0.125
0.125
3.00
3.00
➊ Add power requirements for outputs (1 A max.) to A1/A2.
➋ Add power requirements for inputs (200 mA max.) to A3/A2.
➌ If A1 power is disconnected.
Rated Operation Voltage
Input On-State Voltage Range
Input On-State Current
Input Off-State Voltage Range
Input Off-State Current
Off to On
On to Off
Input Compatibility
Number of Inputs
Voltage Status Only
Current Available
UL/NEMA IEC
24V DC
10…26V DC
3.0 mA @ 10V DC
7.2 mA @ 24V DC
0…5V DC
<1.5 mA
Input Filter – Software Selectable
Settable from 0…64 ms in 1 ms increments
Settable from 0…64 ms in 1 ms increments
N/A IEC 1+
4
Sensor Source
11…26.4V DC from DeviceNet
50 mA max. per input, 200 mA total
A3/A2
➌
0.295
0.295
7.08
7.08
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
241
Chapter 11 Specifications for EtherNet/IP
Output Ratings – Sourced from Control Circuit (A1/A2)
Device Level Ring (DLR)
Ethernet Port
Web Server
Device Connections
Rated Operation Voltage
Rate Insulation Voltage
Dielectric Withstand
Operating Frequency
Type of Current
Conventional Thermal Current Ith
Peak Output Current
Type of Contacts
Number of Contacts
Load Types
Surge Suppression
Thermo-Protection
Maximum Cycle Rate
Maximum Blocking Voltage
Maximum On-State Voltage @
Maximum Output
Maximum Off-State Leakage Current
UL/NEMA IEC
26.4V DC
250V
1500V AC (UL)
Solid state sourcing output
24V DC
2000V AC (IEC)
0.5 A each, 1 A max. combined
Current limited 2-8 amps (5 amps nominal) @ 24V DC
Normally open (N.O.)
2
Resistive or light inductive
Integrated diode, clamps @ 35V DC
Integrated short circuit and over current protection
30 operations/minute capacitive and inductive loads
35V DC
1.5V DC
Fault Recovery
EtherNet Receptacles
Ports
IP Address
DHCP Timeout
Communication Rate
Data
10 μA
Beacon-based performance including IEEE 1588 end to end transparent clock
Ring recovery time is less than 3 ms for a 50 node network
2 D-coded, 4-pin female M12 connectors
Embedded switch with 2 ports
DHCP enabled by default
30 s
10/100 Mbs with auto negotiate half duplex and full duplex
• Transported over both TCP and UDP
• Min. of 500 I/O packets/second (pps)
• Supports up to 150 concurrent TCP sockets
Security
Configuration
Embedded web server
Login and password configurable
Support Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
Status, diagnostics, and configuration tabs
Supports scheduled (Class 1) and unscheduled (Class 3 & UCMM) connections
6 - Class 3 connections are supported simultaneously
Supports up to 2 Class 1 CIP connections [Exclusive owner (data) or listen-only]. One connection per PLC.
Listen only connection requires a data connection to be established.
Class 1 Connection API: 2…3200 ms, Class 3 Connection API: 100…10 000 ms
20 ms default (2 ms minimum)
3 concurrent Encapsulation sessions
TCP port supports 5 concurrent incoming connections
242
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Specifications for EtherNet/IP Chapter 11
Motor Overload Trip Curves
Figure 90 - Bulletin 280E/281E Overload Trip Curves
10000
10000
1000
100
10
1
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
Cold
Hot
100
1
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
% of
Cold
Hot
10000
100
1
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
% of
Cold
Hot
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
243
Chapter 11 Specifications for EtherNet/IP
Contactor Life Load Curves
280/1_-_12* = 100-C12*
280/1_-_23* = 100-C23*
Life Load Curves:
AC-3 Switching of squirrel-cage motors while starting
U
e
= 230…400…460V
AC-4 Switching of squirrel-cage motors
Ue = 400…460V
244
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
AC-3 & AC-4 10% AC-4 Mixed operation of squirrel-cage motors
U
e
= 400…460V
Specifications for EtherNet/IP Chapter 11
Maximum Operating Rates:
AC-3 Switching of squirrel-cage motors while starting
U
e
= 230…460V, Relative operating time 40%, Starting time tA = 0.25 s
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
245
Chapter 11 Specifications for EtherNet/IP
AC-4 Inching of squirrel-cage motors
Ue = 230…460V, Starting time tA = 0.25 s
246
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Specifications for EtherNet/IP Chapter 11
Bulletin 284E
Power Circuit
Control
Circuit
Electrical Ratings
Rated Operation Voltage
Rate Insulation Voltage
Rated Impulsed Voltage
Dielectric Withstand
Operating Frequency
Utilization Category
Protection Against Shock
Rated Operation Voltage
Rate Insulation Voltage
Rated Impulsed Voltage
Dielectric Withstand
Overvoltage Category
Operating Frequency
Short Circuit
Protection
SCPD Performance Type 1
SCPD List
Current Rating
10 A
25 A
UL/NEMA
200…575V
600V
6 kV
2200V AC
50/60 Hz
N/A
IEC
200…500V
600 V
6 kV
2500V AC
50/60 Hz
AC-3
N/A IP2X
24V DC (+10%, –15%) A2 (should be grounded at voltage source)
250V
—
250V
4 kV
1500V AC
—
50/60 Hz
Voltage
2000V AC
III
50/60 Hz
600Y/347V
Sym. Amps rms
480Y/277V
65 kA
30 kA
480Y/480V
65 kA
30 kA
30 kA
30 kA
Size per NFPA 70 (NEC) or NFPA 79 for Group Motor Applications
Environmental
Operating Temperature Range
Storage and Transportation
Temperature Range
Altitude
Humidity
Pollution Degree
Enclosure Ratings
Approximate Shipping Weight
UL/NEMA
NEMA 4/12
Resistance to Shock
–20…40°C (–4…104°F)
–25….85°C (–13…185°F)
1000 m
5…95% (on-condensing)
3
13.6 kg (30 lb)
IEC
IP67
600V
30 kA
30 kA
Mechanical
Operational
Non-Operational
Wire Size
Tightening Torque
Wire Strip Length
WireSize
Tightening Torque
Wire Strip Length
Disconnect Lock Out
Resistance to Vibration
1 G, 0.15 mm (0.006 in.) Displacement
2.5 G, 0.38 mm (0.015 in.) Displacement
Power and Ground Terminals
Primary/Secondary Terminal:
#16…#10 AWG
Primary Terminal: 10.8 lb·in.
Secondary Terminal: 4.5 lb·in.
Primary/Secondary Terminal:
1.0…4.0 mm2
Primary Terminal: 1.2 N·m
Secondary Terminal: 0.5 N·m
0.35 in. (9 mm)
Control and Safety Monitor Inputs
#18…#10 AWG
6.2 lb·in.
1.0…4.0 mm2
0.7 N·m
0.35 in. (9 mm)
Maximum of 5/16 in. (8 mm) lock shackle or hasp. The hasp should not exceed
5/16 in. (8 mm) when closed, or damage will occur to disconnect guard.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
247
Chapter 11 Specifications for EtherNet/IP
Other Rating
Certifications
Conducted Radio Frequency Emissions
Radiated Emissions
Electrostatic Discharge
Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field
Fast Transient
Surge Transient
Standards Compliance
UL/NEMA
EMC Emission Levels
10V rms Communications Cables
10V rms (PE)
150 kHz…80 MHz
Class A
EMC Immunity Levels
4 kV contact and 8 kV Air
10V/m, 80 KHz…1 GHz
3V/m, 1.4 GHz…2 GHz
1V/m, 2.0 GHz …2.7 GHz
2 kV (Power)
2 kV (PE)
1 kV (Communications and Control)
1 kV (12) L-L, 2 kV (2) L-N (Earth)
IEC
UL/NEMA
UL 508C
CSA C22.2, No. 14
EN50178
EN61800-3
EN/IEC 60947-4-2
CE Marked per Low Voltage 2006/95/EC
EMC Directive 2004/108/EC
CCC
ODVA for EtherNet/IP cULus (File No. E207834,
Guide NMMS, NMMS7)
IEC
EtherNet/IP Version – Control and I/O Power Requirements
Control Voltage
Current
Total Control Power (no options)
Total Control Power (with Dynamic Brake or Output Contactor option)
Total Control Power (with Dynamic Brake and Output Contactor option)
Volts
Amps 0.375
Watts
Watts
Watts
➊ Add power requirements for outputs (1 A max.) to A1/A2.
➋ Add power requirements for inputs (200 mA max.) to A3/A2.
➌ If A1 power is disconnected.
9
12
15
Drive Characteristics
Maximum (kW) Hp Rating/Input Voltage
Overload Capacity
Preset Speeds
Carrier Frequency
A3/A2
0.125
3
3
3
➋
24V DC
Sensorless Vector Control
5 Hp (3.3 kW)/480V AC
150% for 60 s
200% for 3 s
8
2…16 kHz
A3/A2
0.35
8.4
8.4
8.4
248
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Specifications for EtherNet/IP Chapter 11
Drive Characteristics
Skip Frequency
StepLogic Functionality
Timer/Counter Functions
Line Voltage [V]
Frequency
[Hz]
380
460
50
60
Drive Ratings – VFD Output Current vs. Input Current
3-Phase kW
Rating
0.4
3-Phase Hp
Rating
—
Output Current [A]
Sensorless Vector
Control
1.4
—
—
—
—
—
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.0
—
—
—
—
0.5
1
2
3
5
1.4
2.3
4.0
6.0
7.6
2.3
4.0
6.0
7.6
Sensorless Vector Control
✓
✓
✓
Input Current [A]
Sensorless Vector
Control
2.15
3.80
6.40
9.00
12.40
1.85
3.45
5.57
8.20
12.5
Output Frequency
Efficiency
Motor Protection
Overcurrent
Over Voltage
Under Voltage
Faultless Power Ride Through
I
2
PowerFlex 40
0…400 Hz (Programmable)
97.5% (Typical)
Sensorless Vector Control (SVC)
Protective Specifications – Sensorless Vector Control
t overload protection – 150% for 60 seconds, 200% for 3 seconds (provides Class 10 protection)
200% hardware limit, 300% instantaneous fault
200…240V AC Input – Trip occurs @ 405V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 290V AC incoming line)
380…460V AC Input – Trip occurs @ 810V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 575V AC incoming line)
460…600V AC Input – Trip occurs @ 1005V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 711V AC incoming line)
200…240V AC Input – Trip occurs @ 210V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 150V AC incoming line)
380…480V AC Input – Trip occurs @ 390V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 275V AC incoming line)
460…600V AC Input – If 600V rated trip occurs @ 487V DC bus voltage (344V AC incoming line);
If 480V rated trip occurs @ 390V DC bus voltage (275V AC incoming line)
100 milliseconds
Carrier Frequency
Frequency Accuracy – Digital Input
Speed Regulation – Open Loop with Slip Compensation
Stop Modes
Control Specifications – Sensorless Vector Control
2…16 kHz. Drive rating based on 4 kHz.
Within ±0.05% of set output frequency.
±1% of base speed across a 60:1 speed range
Multiple programmable stop modes including – Ramp, Coast, DC-Brake, Ramp-to-Hold and S Curve.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
249
Chapter 11 Specifications for EtherNet/IP
Accel/Decel
Intermittent Overload
Electronic Motor Overload Protection
Control Specifications – Sensorless Vector Control
Two independently programmable accel and decel times. Each time may be programmed from 0…600 s in 0.1 s increments.
150% Overload capability for up to 1 m
200% Overload capability for up to 3 s
Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response
Input Voltage
480V, 50/60 Hz,
Three-Phase
Drive Rating
[kW]
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
4.0
Minimum DB Resistance
2
3
5
[Hp]
0.5
1
Minimum DB Resistance
[
Ω]
97
97
97
97
77
Motor Overload Trip Curves
Motor OL Current parameter provides class 10 overload protection. Ambient insensitivity is inherent in the electronic design of the overload.
No Derate
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200
% of P132 [Motor NP Hertz]
Figure 91 - 284E Overload Trip Curves
Min Derate
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200
% of P132 [Motor NP Hertz]
Max Derate
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200
% of P132 [Motor NP Hertz]
250
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Specifications for EtherNet/IP Chapter 11
Input Ratings – Sourced from Control
Circuit (A3/A2)
Output Ratings – Sourced from Control Circuit (A1/
A2)
Device Level Ring (DLR)
Ethernet Port
Rated Operation Voltage
Input On-State Voltage Range
Input On-State Current
Input Off-State Voltage Range
Input Off-State Current
Off to On
On to Off
Input Compatibility
Number of Inputs
Voltage Status Only
Current Available
Rated Operation Voltage
Rate Insulation Voltage
Dielectric Withstand
Type of Control Circuit
Type of Current
Conventional Thermal Current Ith
Peak Output Current
Type of Contacts
Number of Contacts
Load Types
Surge Suppression
Thermo-Protection
Maximum Cycle Rate
Maximum Blocking Voltage
Maximum On-State Voltage @
Maximum Output
Maximum Off-State Leakage Current
Fault Recovery
Ports
IP Address
DHCP Timeout
Communication Rate
Data
Web Server
Security
Configuration
UL/NEMA
24V DC
10…26V DC
3.0 mA @ 10V DC
7.2 mA @ 24V DC
0…5V DC
<1.5 mA
Input Filter – Software Selectable
Settable from 0…64 ms in 1 ms increments
IEC
N/A
Settable from 0…64 ms in 1 ms increments
IEC 1+
4
Sensor Source
11…26.4V DC from DeviceNet
50 mA max. per input, 200 mA total
26.4V DC
250V
1500V AC (UL) 2000V AC (IEC)
Solid state sourcing output
24V DC
0.5 A each, 1 A max. combined
Current limited 2-8 amps (5 amps nominal) @ 24V DC
Normally open (N.O.)
2
Resistive or light inductive
Integrated diode, clamps @ 35V DC
Integrated short circuit and over current protection
30 operations/minute capacitive and inductive loads
35V DC
1.5V DC
10 μA
Beacon-based performance including IEEE 1588 end to end transparent clock
Ring recovery time is less than 3 ms for a 50 node network
2 D-coded, 4-pin female M12 connectors
Embedded switch with 2 ports
DHCP enabled by default
30 s
10/100 Mbs with auto negotiate half duplex and full duplex
•Transported over both TCP and UDP
• Min. of 500 I/O packets/second (pps)
• Supports up to 150 concurrent TCP sockets
Embedded web server
Login and password configurable
Support Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
Status, diagnostics, and configuration tabs
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
251
Chapter 11 Specifications for EtherNet/IP
Device Connections
UL/NEMA
Supports scheduled (Class 1) and unscheduled (Class 3 & UCMM) connections
IEC
6 - Class 3 connections are supported simultaneously
Supports up to 2 Class 1 CIP connections [Exclusive owner (data) or listen-only]. One connection per PLC.
Listen only connection requires a data connection to be established.
Class 1 Connection API: 2…3200 ms
Class 3 Connection API: 100…10 000 ms
20 ms default (2 ms minimum)
3 concurrent Encapsulation sessions
TCP port supports 5 concurrent incoming connections
252
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Chapter
12
Accessories
Industrial Ethernet Media
D Code Connectivity (M12) – 1585D
M12 D Code
Patchcords and Cordsets IP67
Connector Type
Male Straight to
Male Straight
Male Straight to
Male Right Angle
Male Right Angle to
Male Right Angle
Male Straight to
Female Straight
➊ Available in 0.3, 0.6, 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, and increments of 5 meters up to 75 meters.
Cat. No.
Unshielded
1585D-M4TBDM-
➊
1585D-M4TBDE ➊
1585D-E4TBDE- ➊
1585D-M4TBDF ➊
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
253
Chapter 12 Accessories
Front Mount Receptacle
Patchcords and Cordsets IP20 to IP67
Connector Type
Transition Cable
Female Front Mount to
RJ45
Connector Type
Male Straight to
RJ45
Cat. No.
Unshielded
1585D-D4TBJM ➊
Unshielded
1585D-M4TBJM-
➊
➊ Available in 0.3, 0.6, 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, and increments of 5 meters up to 75 meters.
Note:
Refer to www.ab.com/networks/media/ethernet to learn more about
Industrial Ethernet Media.
M12 to RJ45 Bulkhead Adapter – 1585A Description
• Transition from IP20 environment to IP67 environment
• In-cabinet connectivity with RJ45 connector providing On-Machine solution with M12 D Code connector
• Differential 100 ohm terminators used for unused pairs
• Cat 5e
Cat. No.
1585A-DD4JD
254
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Accessories Chapter 12
Sensor Media
Description Description
EtherNet/IP
Communications
DC Micro
Patchcord
DC Micro V-
Cable
I/O Connection Pin Count
Input/Output
4-Pin
Connector
Straight Female
Straight Male
Straight Female
Right Angle Male
Straight Female
Input
Right Angle Female
Cat. No.
889D-F4ACDM-
➊
889D-F4ACDE- ➊
879D-F4ACDM-
➊
879D-R4ACM-
➊
➊ Replace symbol with desired length in meters (for example, Cat. No. 889D-F4ACDM-1 for a 1 m cable). Standard cable lengths: 1 m, 2 m, 5 m, and 10 m.
Sensor Wiring
Sensor Wiring
3
4
1
2
)
Brown
)
White
)
Black
)
Blue
Quick-Disconnect
+
−
Sensor Male
Connection
Female Input
ArmorStart
Connection
Pin 1: +24V (A3 or DNET)
Pin 2: Input 0
Pin 3: Common
Pin 4: Input 1
Pin 5: NC (No Connection)
Motor and Brake Cables
Description Rating Length m (ft) Cat. No.
Motor Cable Cordsets
90° M22 Motor Cordset IP67/NEMA Type 4
3 (9.8)
6 (19.6)
10 (32.8)
14 (45.9)
20 (65.6)
280-MTR22-M3
280-MTR22-M6
280-MTR22-M10
280-MTR22-M14
280-MTR22-M20
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
255
Chapter 12 Accessories
256
Description
90° M35 Motor Cordset
Rating Length m (ft)
3 (9.8)
6 (19.6)
10 (32.8)
14 (45.9)
20 (65.6)
Motor Cable Cordsets, High Flex
90° M22 Motor Cordset IP67/NEMA Type 4
Motor Cable Cordsets, Extended Source/Control Brake
90° M25 Source Brake Cable IP67/NEMA Type 4
Extended Source/Control Brake Cable Cordsets, High Flex
3 (9.8)
6 (19.6)
8 (26.2)
10 (32.8)
14 (45.9)
20 (65.6)
Motor Cable Cordsets, Shielded VFD Motor Cable Cordsets, Shielded (VFD)
90° M22 Motor Cordset IP67/NEMA Type 4
3 (9.8)
6 (19.6)
14 (45.9)
6 (19.6)
14 (45.9)
90° M25 Source Brake Cable IP67/NEMA Type 4
3 (9.8)
6 (19.6)
10 (32.8)
14 (45.9)
20 (65.6)
Dynamic Brake Cable
M22 Dynamic Brake Cable
(DB Option)
IP67/NEMA Type 4
IP67/NEMA Type 4 3 (9.8)
284-MTRS22-M3
284-MTRS22-M6
284-MTRS22-M14
285-BRC25-M6
285-BRC25-M14
285-BRCF25-M3
285-BRCF25-M6
285-BRCF25-M10
285-BRCF25-M14
285-BRCF25-M20
Cat. No.
280-MTR35-M3
280-MTR35-M6
280-MTR35-M10
280-MTR35-M14
280-MTR35-M20
280-MTRF22-M3
280-MTRF22-M6
280-MTRF22-M8
280-MTRF22-M10
280-MTRF22-M14
280-MTRF22-M20
285-DBK22-M3
Motor Cable Patchcords
90° Male/Straight Female M22 IP67/NEMA Type 4
90° Male/Straight Female M35
Motor Cable Patchcords, Shielded (VFD)
IP67/NEMA Type 4
90° Male/Straight Female M22 IP67/NEMA Type 4
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
1 (3.3)
3 (9.8)
1 (3.3)
3 (9.8)
1 (3.3)
3 (9.8)
280-MTR22-M1D
280-MTR22-M3D
280-MTR35-M1D
280-MTR35-M3D
284-MTRS22-M1D
284-MTRS22-M3D
Accessories Chapter 12
Sealing Caps
Other
Description
Plastic Sealing Cap (M12) ➊
Motor Connector Aluminum Sealing Cap
(M22) for 10A protection*
Motor Connector Aluminum Sealing Cap
(M35) for 25A protection
Dynamic Brake Connector (M22)
Source/Control Brake Cap (M25)
➊ To achieve IP67 rating, sealing caps must be installed on all unused I/O connections.
Input
1485A-M12
EtherNet/IP
Output
1485A-M12
— 1485A-C1
—
—
—
889A-QMCAP
1485A-C1
Contact Local Sales
Office
Description
Locking Tag
Padlock attachment to the lockable handles
Up to three padlocks 4…8 mm (5/16 in.) shackle
Replacement At-Motor Handle
Kit include (1) handle, (1) guard, and (3) screws
Replacement Fan for 284 Control Module
Cat. No.
140M-C-M3
280-DISHDL
284-FAN
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
257
Chapter 12 Accessories
Recommended Cord Grips
Description
Thomas & Betts Cord Grip
Cord grips for ArmorStart devices with 10 A short circuit protection rating
1 in. Stain Relief Cord Connector, 1 in. Lock Nut
Cable Range: 0.31…0.56 in.
Used with Control Power Media
Cordset – Example: Cat. No. 889N-M65GF-M2
Thomas & Betts Cord Grip
Cord grips for ArmorStart devices with 10 A short circuit protection rating
3/4 in. Stain Relief Cord Connector, 3/4 in. Lock Nut
Cable Range: 0.31…0.56 in.
Used with Three-Phase Power
Media Cordset – Example: Cat. No. 280-PWR22G-M1
Thomas & Betts Cord Grip
Cord grips for ArmorStart devices with 25 A short circuit protection rating
1 in. Stain Relief Cord Connector, 1 in. Lock Nut
Cable Range: 0.31…0.56 in.
Used with Control Power Media
Cordset – Example: Cat. No. 889N-M65GF-M2
Thomas & Betts Cord Grip
Cord grips for ArmorStart devices with 25 A short circuit protection rating
3/4 in. Stain Relief Cord Connector, 3/4 in. Lock Nut
Cable Range: 0.31…0.56 in.
Used with Three-Phase Power
Media Cordset – Example: Cat. No. 280-PWR22G-M1
Thomas & Betts
Part No.
2931NM
2940NM
2931NM
2942NM
258
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Accessories Chapter 12
Dynamic Braking Resistors
Sensorless Vector Control (SVC) Minimum Resistance and
Recommended Modules for Option DB
Resistance
Ohms ±5%
Table 47 - Dynamic Brake Specification for Option DB (IP20 Resistor)
Continuous
Power kW
Max Energy kJ
Max Braking
Torque % of
Motor
Application Type 1
Braking Torque
% of Motor Duty Cycle %
Application Type 2
Braking Torque
% of Motor Duty Cycle %
Drive and
Motor Size kW
(Hp)
Cat. No. ➊
380…480 Volt AC Input Drives
0.37 (0.5)
0.75 (1)
1.5 (2)
2.2 (3)
4 (5)
Note 1:
Always check resistor ohmic value against minimum resistance for drive being used.
Note 2:
Duty cycle listed is based on full speed to zero speed deceleration.
For constant regen at full speed, duty cycle capability is half of what is listed.
Application Type 1 represents maximum capability up to 100% braking torque where possible.
Application Type 2 represents more than 100% braking torque where possible, up to a maximum of 150%.
Note 3:
Dynamic brake modules have an IP20 rating.
ATTENTION: Resistor temperature may exceed 200°C.
ATTENTION: AC drives do not offer protection for externally mounted brake resistors, especially in the case of brake IGBT failure. A risk of fire exists if external braking resistors are not protected. External resistor packages must be protected from over temperature or the protective circuit shown, or equivalent, must be supplied.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
259
Chapter 12 Accessories
Bulletin 284E Option (-DB) – IP20 Resistor
Installation Dimensions
Cat. No.
AK-R2-091P500, AK-R2-047P500, AK-R2-360P500
AK-R2-030P1K2, AK-R2-120P1K2
Weight
1.1 (2.5)
2.7 (8)
Dimensions are in millimeters (inches) and weights are in kilograms (pounds).
Figure 92 - Bulletin 284E Dimensions
17.0
(0.67)
Frame A
30.0
(1.18)
60.0
(2.36)
31.0
(1.22)
61.0
(2.40)
Frame B
59.0
(2.32)
SURFACES MAY BE
316.0
(12.44)
335.0
(13.19)
13.0
(0.51)
AK-R2-091P500
AK-R2-047P500
AK-R2-360P500
386.0
(15.20)
405.0
(15.94)
AK-R2-030P1K2
AK-R2-120P1K2
Thermostat
260
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Accessories Chapter 12
Recommended thermostat control wiring to prevent dynamic brake overheating.
Figure 93 - Thermostat Control Wiring
3-Phase
Power
R (L1)
S (L2)
(M)
Contactor
T (L3)
Power Off Power On
Power Source
M
M
DB Resistor Thermostat
Sensorless Vector Control (SVC) Recommended Dynamic Brake
Modules for Option DB1 (IP67 Resistor)
Drive and
Motor Size kW Cat. No.
➊
380…480 Volt AC Input Drives
0.37 (0.5)
0.75 (1)
284R-360P500-M*
284R-360P500-M*
1.5 (2)
2.2 (3)
4 (5)
284R-360P500-M*
284R-120P1K2-M*
284R-120P1K2-M*
Resistance
Ohms ± 5%
Continuous
Power kW
Max Energy kJ
Max Braking
Torque % of
Motor
Application Type 1
Braking
Torque % of
Motor
Duty
Cycle %
360
360
360
120
120
Application Type 2
Braking
Torque % of
Motor
Duty
Cycle %
0.086
0.086
0.086
0.26
0.26
17
17
17
52
52
305%
220%
110%
197%
124%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
47%
23%
12%
24%
13%
150%
150%
110%
150%
124%
➊ Drive rating and DB part numbers are not interchangeable. Only use specified resistor. Customer is responsible to evaluate if performance meets application requirement.
31%
15%
11%
16%
10%
Note:
Duty Cycle listed is based on full speed to zero speed deceleration. For constant regen at full speed, duty cycle capability is half of what is listed.
Application Type 1 represents maximum capability up to 100% braking torque where possible.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
261
Chapter 12 Accessories
Application Type 2 represents more than 100% braking torque where possible, up to a maximum of 150%.
Installation Dimensions
Figure 94 - Bulletin 284 Dynamic Brake Module
A
H
C
B
D
J
E
F
G
Cat. No.
284R-091P500
284R-120P1K2
284R-120P1K2
A mm (in.)
89 ± 3
(3.5 ± 0.12)
B mm (in.)
215 ± 5
(8.46 ± 0.2)
420 ± 5
(16.54 ± 0.2)
C mm (in.)
D mm (in.)
235 ± 5
(9.25 ± 0.2)
E mm (in.)
F mm (in.)
G mm (in.)
H mm (in.)
M05 = 0.5 m
M1 = 1 m ➊
60 ± 2
(2.36 ± 0.08)
127
(5)
12.54
(0.49)
60 ± 2
(2.36 ± 0.08)
440 ± 5
(17.32 ± 0.2)
➊ Length is user-selectable based on the suffix added to the catalog number. For a length of 500±10mm, add
-M05 to the end of the catalog number. For a length of 1000±10mm, add -M1 to the end of the catalog number.
J mm (in.)
50 ± 1.5
(1.97 ± 0.06)
Note:
The customer must protect the resistor in the event of a shorted switch in the VFD. This is done via PLC control. An example ControlLogix program can be downloaded from http://samplecode.rockwellautomation.com
262
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Introduction
Appendix
A
Applying More Than One ArmorStart
Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Each ArmorStart motor controller is listed for group installation. This appendix explains how to use this listing to apply ArmorStart motor controllers in multiple-motor branch circuits according to 7.2.10.4(1) and 7.2.10.4(2) of
NFPA 79, Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery.
From the perspective of the ArmorStart product family, being listed for group installation means one set of fuses or one circuit breaker may protect a branch circuit that has two or more of these motor controllers connected to it. This appendix refers to this type of branch circuit as a multiple-motor branch circuit.
The circuit topology shown in
, is one configuration, but not the only possible configuration, of a multiple-motor branch circuit. In these circuits, a single set of fuses (or a single circuit breaker) protects multiple motors, their controllers and the circuit conductors. The motors may be any mixture of power ratings and the controllers may be any mixture of motor controller technologies (magnetic motor controllers and variable-frequency AC drive controllers).
This appendix addresses only NFPA 79 applications. This is not because these products are only suitable for industrial machinery, but because industrial machinery is their primary market. In fact, while all versions of the ArmorStart products may be applied on industrial machinery, the versions that have the
Conduit Entrance Gland Plate Option may also be used in applications governed by NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC), (see “ArmorStart Product
Family”).
In the 2012 Edition of NFPA 79, motor controllers that are listed for group installation may be installed in multiple-motor branch circuits according to either of two alternative sets of requirements. The first is found in 7.2.10.4(2), the second in 7.2.10.4(3). The requirements of 7.2.10.4(3) are similar to those in
430.53(C) of NFPA 70, while the requirements of 7.2.10.4(2) are found only in
NFPA 79. This appendix explains the requirements of 7.2.10.4(2), rather than those of 7.2.10.4(3), because this is the simpler method to use when applying the
ArmorStart family of motor controllers.
The user must determine the requirements – NFPA 79 or NFPA 70 – to use for the application. When making this determination, it is necessary to understand the ArmorStart LT product characteristics and useful to understand the definition of industrial machinery. The section of this appendix, “ArmorStart
Product Family”, specifies whether a motor controller is suitable for installation
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
263
Appendix A
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery according to NFPA 79 or NFPA 70 (or both). The definition of industrial machinery is found in 3.3.56 of NFPA 79 and 670.2 of Article 670, Industrial
Machinery, in NFPA 70.
These conventions are used throughout this appendix. First, although all of the equipment is connected to a three-phase electrical supply, all of the figures are shown as one-line diagrams. Second, although all of the ArmorStart LT motor controllers are listed for group installation with both fuses and a specific family of inverse time circuit breakers, this appendix considers only fuses. This is done to avoid repetitive explanations with minor, but necessary qualifications, for circuit breakers. Generally, the principles for selecting the fuses also apply to selecting inverse time circuit breakers. Third, all references, unless indicated otherwise, are to NFPA 79 – 2012.
Note:
The following example uses ArmorStart LT. This provides a more comprehensive example,
Figure 95 - ArmorStart LT NFPA 79 Multi-Motor Branch Circuit
Electrical Supply
Final
Overcurrent
Device
Disconnecting
Means
Single Set of Fuses
NFPA 79, 3.3.10 Branch Circuit. The Circuit
Conductors Between the Final Overcurrent Device
Protecting the Circuit and the Outlet(s). [70:100]
Any Mixture of Motor Controller
Technologies
* Each Controller is Listed for Group
Installation with Specified Maximum
Protection
½ HP
Bulletin 294
Overload
Class 10
Nameplate*
2 HP
Bulletin 294
Overload
Class 10
Nameplate*
5 HP
Bulletin 291
Overload
Class 10/15/20
Nameplate*
5 HP
Bulletin 290
Overload
Class 10/15/20
Nameplate*
1 HP
Bulletin 294
Overload
Class 10
Nameplate*
1/2 Hp 2 Hp 5 Hp 5 Hp 1 Hp
Two or More Motors with any
Mixture or Power Ratings
ArmorStart LT Product Family
This section contains a brief description of the attributes of the ArmorStart LT motor controllers that are relevant to applying them in multiple-motor branch circuits.
The term motor controller refers to the device that stops and starts the motor.
The ArmorStart LT product family consists of two types of motor controllers.
The Bulletin 290 and 291 controllers are magnetic motor controllers that use an electromechanical contactor to stop and start the motor. The Bulletin 294 motor
264
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Appendix A
controllers use a variable-frequency AC drive to stop, start and vary the speed of the motor. This appendix refers to the Bulletin 290, 291 and 294 products as either motor controllers or just controllers.
Each ArmorStart LT motor controller incorporates an integrated overload relay and motor disconnecting means. The Underwriters Laboratories’ (UL) listing for each motor controller confirms that the motor controller – including its integral overload relay and motor disconnecting means — is suitable for motor group installation.
The suitability of each ArmorStart LT motor controller for installation according to either NFPA 79 or NFPA 70 depends on the means of connecting the power circuit wiring. All of the controllers are suitable for installation in multiple-motor branch circuits on industrial machinery according to 7.2.10.4 of NFPA 79. The controllers that have the Conduit Entrance Gland Plate Option are also suitable for installation in multiple-motor branch circuits according to 430.53(C) and
430.53(D) of NFPA 70 (NEC). The controllers that have the Power Media
Gland Plate Option are suitable for installation only on industrial machinery.
These versions are limited to industrial machinery because the UL listing for the power media connectors themselves and their matching cable assemblies covers installation only on industrial machinery.
Multiple-Motor Branch
Circuits and Motor
Controllers Listed for Group
Installation – General
Multiple-motor branch circuits, like that shown in
fundamental tradeoff: protecting more than one controller with a single set of fuses requires more electrical and mechanical robustness in each controller.
In exchange for eliminating the cost and space necessary for a dedicated set of fuses in front of each controller, the construction of each controller itself must be more robust. For the circuit configuration shown in
the ampere rating of the fuse must be large enough to operate all of the motors, without opening, under normal starting and running conditions. This rating of fuse must be larger than the rating permitted to protect a circuit that supplies only a single motor and its controller. In general, as the rating of the fuse increases, so does the magnitude of fault currents that flow until the fuse opens.
This higher magnitude of fault current results in more damage to the controller.
Therefore, the additional controller robustness is necessary to withstand these higher fault currents, without controller damage, that could result in a shock or fire hazard.
Consequently, to the controller, being listed for group installation mostly means the UL testing is performed with fuses that have this practical, and higher, ampere rating. This testing verifies that it is safe to apply this controller in a multiple-motor branch circuit, provided the fuse is of the same class and does not have a rating exceeding that marked on the controller.
The example in
Figure 96 , illustrates this increase in the maximum ampere rating
of fuse that is permitted to protect a controller. This example compares the rating of the fuse used in the UL testing of two variable-frequency AC drive-based motor controllers. Both controllers have a rated power of ½ horsepower and a
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
265
Appendix A
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
266
rated output current of 1.5 amperes. The controller shown on the left is intended for installation in individual-motor branch circuits. The controller shown on the right is the ArmorStart LT Bulletin 294 controller that must be listed for group installation to be installed, as intended, in multiple-motor branch circuits. For this example, assume all testing is done with fuses of the same class.
The UL investigation of both controllers is done according to UL 508C, Power
Conversion Equipment. The controllers are connected to the test supply through the three-phase conductors and equipment grounding conductor and then covered with cotton in areas that are likely to vent hot gases and sparks during the tests. During the test, electrical faults are impressed on the output of, and internal to, these variable-frequency AC drive-based controllers. Increasing the ampere rating of the fuses increases the magnitude of the fault currents that flow through, and damage, the controller before the fuses open. Afterwards, the damage to the controller is evaluated to determine whether a potential shock or fire hazard exists when protected by fuses having this ampere rating. One criterion of the evaluation is the examination of the equipment grounding conductor that must not open during the test as this could leave exposed conductive parts in an energized state (shock hazard). Another criterion is that the cotton must not ignite as this indicates the expulsion from the controller of hot gases or molten metal fragments (fire hazard).
Referring to the controller on the left, UL 508C permits the individual-motor testing to be performed with the maximum rating of fuse that can be used to protect an individual-motor branch circuit. According to both NFPA 70 and
NFPA 79, this is 400 percent of the full-load current rating of the largest motor that the controller can supply. In UL 508C, this is taken to be 400 percent of the rated output current of the controller, or 6 amperes.
Referring to the controller on the right, UL 508C permits the group installation testing to be performed with the maximum rating of fuse that can be used to protect a multiple-motor branch circuit. According to both NFPA 70
(430.53(C)) and NFPA 79 (7.2.10.4(3)), this is 250 amperes. This value, derived from the installation requirements of 430.53(C) and 430.53(D) of NFPA 70, is determined by the largest size of power conductor that the ArmorStart LT controller can accept, 10 AWG. Because the UL 508C test covers all possibilities in NFPA 70 and NFPA 79, it permits the maximum value of 250 amperes. This covers 7.2.10.4(2), which permits only 100 amperes. However, in this case, the manufacturer, Rockwell Automation, chose to test and mark with the lower value of 45 amperes. This value was chosen as the tradeoff between the maximum number and type of controllers in the branch circuit – limited by the maximum fuse rating - and the electrical and mechanical robustness engineered into each controller.
Therefore, to make its use in the multiple-motor branch circuit of Figure 95
practical, the ½ horsepower Bulletin 294 controller was engineered to be robust enough to safely contain the damage when protected by a fuse having a rating of 45 amperes, rather than just 6 amperes.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Appendix A
Figure 96 - UL508C Variable-Frequency AC Drive Motor Controller Evaluation
Short-Circuit Test Circuit Short-Circuit Test Circuit
UL 508C – test with 6 ampere max
½ HP Motor
Controller
Max = 400% * Rated Output Current
= 400% * 1.5 A = 6 A
Rated Output
Current = 1.5 A
6A fuse max
Max permitted rating for test fuse based on
Rated Output
Current
Manufacturer’s choice -
Reduce rating for test to 45 A
Max rating for 10 AWG
= 250 A
Max permitted rating for test fuse based on maximum size of power conductors
Bulletin 294
½ HP Motor
Controller
Suitable for motor group installation
Rated Output
Current = 1.5 A
45 A fuse max
Maximum conductor size
= 10 AWG
Maximum conductor size
= 10 AWG
Motor Motor
Maximum Fuse Ampere
Rating According to
7.2.10.4(1) and 7.2.10.4(2)
This section uses
Figure 97 to explain the requirements from 7.2.10.4(1) and
7.2.10.4(2) that are relevant to, and permit, the multiple-motor branch circuit of
The following is the complete text of 7.2.10.4(1) and 7.2.10.4(2) and an
abbreviated version of Table 48 from the 2012 Edition of NFPA 79. The table
is abbreviated to cover the size of conductors that are generally relevant to the
ArmorStart LT motor controllers.
Complete Text
“7.2.10.4 Two or more motors or one or more motor(s) and other load(s), and their control equipment shall be permitted to be connected to a single branch circuit where short-circuit and ground-fault protection is provided by a single inverse time circuit breaker or a single set of fuses, provided the following conditions under (1) and either (2) or (3) are met:
(1) Each motor controller and overload device is either listed for group installation with specified maximum branch-circuit protection or selected such that the ampere rating of the motor branch short-circuit and ground-fault protective device does not exceed that permitted by 7.2.10.1 for that individual motor controller or overload device and corresponding motor load.
(2) The rating or setting of the branch short-circuit and ground-fault protection device does not exceed the values in
for the smallest conductor in the circuit.”
(3) …(not considered in this appendix)
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
267
Appendix A
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Table 48 - Abbreviated Table 7.2.10.4
Table 7.2.10.4 Relationship Between Conductor Size and Maximum Rating or Setting of Short-Circuit
Protective Device for Power Circuits Group Installations
Conductor Size (AWG) Maximum Rating
Fuse or Inverse Time*
Circuit Breaker
(amperes)
…
…
14
12
…
…
60
80
10
8
6
…
100
150
200
…
The following text and
provide an explanation of 7.2.10.4(1) and (2). In the following, the text not relevant to
is replaced by ellipsis points (…). Then each individual requirement is underlined and followed by an underlined letter in parentheses. This underlined letter in the following text corresponds to the letter in
“7.2.10.4 Two or more motors (a)…and their control equipment (b) shall be permitted to be connected to a single branch circuit (c) where short-circuit and ground-fault protection is provided by a single inverse time circuit breaker or a single set of fuses (d), provided the following conditions under (1) and…(2)… are met:
(1) Each motor controller and overload device is… listed for group installation with specified maximum branch-circuit protection (e) …
(2) The rating or setting of the branch short-circuit and ground-fault protection device does not exceed the values in Table 7.2.10.4 for the smallest conductor in the circuit.” (f )
Summarizing the requirements relevant to
Figure 95 : 7.2.10.4(1) and 7.2.10.4(2)
permit two or more ArmorStart LT motor controllers to be installed in a single branch circuit provided (1) all the motor controllers are listed for group
installation, (2) the fuse does not exceed the maximum rating that Table 48
permits to protect the smallest conductor and (3) the fuse complies with the maximum fuse ratings of all of the controllers.
268
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Explanatory Example
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Appendix A
Figure 97 - ArmorStart LT NFPA 79 Multi-Motor Branch Circuit
d
“...a single set of fuses…” f
“The rating or setting of the branch short-circuit and ground-fault protection device does not exceed the values in Table 7.2.10.4 for the smallest conductor in the circuit.”
Branch circuit (shown as dotted lines) – all of the conductors on the load side of the single set of fuses c
“...shall be permitted to be connected to a single branch circuit…” e
“Each motor controller and overload device is ...
listed for group installation with specified maximum branch-circuit protection…”
“Suitable for Motor Group Installation”
Sym. Amps RMS
Fuse
Max. Ratings
5 KA 10 KA
45A 45A*
* Type CC, J and T fuses only b e
Markings that satisfy
7.2.10.4(1)
“... and their control equipment … ”
½ HP
Bulletin 294
Overload
Class 10
Nameplate*
2 HP
Bulletin 294
Overload
Class 10
Nameplate*
5 HP
Bulletin 291
Overload
Class 10/15/20
Nameplate*
5 HP
Bulletin 290
Overload
Class 10/15/20
Nameplate*
1 HP
Bulletin 294
Overload
Class 10
Nameplate* a
“Two or more motors ...”
1/2 HP
FLC =
1.1 A**
2 HP
FLC =
3.4 A**
5 HP
FLC =
7.6 A**
5 HP
FLC =
7.6 A**
* Each controller is listed for group installation with the same specified maximum protection
1 HP
FLC =
2.1 A**
The example addresses the overcurrent protection of the conductors, controllers and motors. Protection for three overcurrent conditions is considered: motor running overloads, short-circuit (line-to-line) faults, and ground-faults (line-toground). The short-circuit fault and ground-fault protection is governed by
7.2.10.4(1) and 7.2.10.4(2) and explained in Requirements 1,2 and 3 and
Figure 98 . The overload protection,explained in Requirement 4, is governed by
7.3.1 and 7.3.1.1. Overload coordination depends on each conductor having the minimum ampacity given by 12.5.3 and 12.5.4. The method for determining this minimum ampacity is explained in Requirement 5 and
.
The example branch circuit is shown in
Figure 98 and Figure 99 . The circuit
topology consists of a set of 10 AWG conductors that supply multiple sets of 14
AWG conductors. Each set of 14 AWG conductors supply a controller and motor. These conductor sizes are chosen to be the smallest conductors that have sufficient ampacity, without derating, for the loads each must carry. All of the wiring is customer-supplied, rather than the ArmorConnect Power Media, because all controllers have the Conduit Entrance Gland Plate Option. Fuses protect the branch circuit.
The example addresses five basic requirements that the motor controllers, fuses and conductors must satisfy. The letters in the circles on
and
are referenced in the explanations as letters in parentheses. Ellipses points (…) are used to replace NFPA 79 text that is not applicable to the multiple-motor branch circuit shown in
Figure 98 and Figure 99 . Unless indicated, all text is
from NFPA 79.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
269
Appendix A
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Figure 98 - ArmorStart LT NFPA 79 Multi-Motor Branch Circuit —
Conductor and Controller Protection
Electrical Supply -
480Y/277V
Available Fault Current
Sym. Amps RMS 9 KA
Disconnecting
Means
Fuses
45 A Max,
CC, J or T d a
Branch short-circuit and ground-fault protection device
Combined Load Conductors
Controller ratings further restrict the fuse
“Suitable for Motor Group Installation”
Sym. Amps RMS
Fuse
Max. Ratings
5 KA 10 KA
45A 45A*
* Type CC, J and T fuses only d
Compare to controller max fuse ratings a
½ HP
Bulletin 294
Overload
Class 10
Nameplate*
2 HP
Bulletin 294
Overload
Class 10
Nameplate*
5 HP
Bulletin 291
Overload
Class 10/15/20
Nameplate*
5 HP
Bulletin 290
Overload
Class 10/15/20
Nameplate*
Table 7.2.10.4
Max
Fuse
AWG (A)
- -
14 60
12 80
10 100
8 150
- -
Conductor protection -
60 A max, any class c
7.2.10.4(2) -
“smallest conductor in the circuit”
= 14 AWG b
Conductor protection
Determine fuse class and max rating for conductor protection
1/2 HP
FLC =
1.1 A**
“Smallest conductor”
2 HP
FLC =
3.4 A**
5 HP
FLC =
7.6 A**
5 HP
FLC =
7.6 A**
10 AWG
1 HP
Bulletin 294
Overload
Class 10
Nameplate*
* Each controller is suitable for group installation with the same maximum ratings of fuse.
** Table 430.250 of NFPA 70-2011
1 HP
FLC =
2.1 A**
Figure 99 - ArmorStart LT NFPA 79 Multi-Motor Branch Circuit Minimum
Conductor Ampacity
Electrical Supply
Min Amp. =
125% * 1.8 A
I1 =
1.8 A c
Min Amp. =
125% * 5.5 A
Minimum Required Ampacity (MRA)
MRA = 1.25 * Max {controller input currents} + Sum {remaining controller input currents}
Controller input currents = {I1,I2,I3,I4,I5}
Max controller input current = I3 = I4, choose I3 as Max (either is ok)
MRA = 1.25 * I3 + (I1 + I2 + I4 + I5}
= 1.25 * 7.6 A + (1.8 A + 5.5 A + 7.6 A + 3.0 A) = 27.4 A
Combined Load Conductors
10 AWG
Min Amp. =
125% * 7.6 A a
Min Amp. =
125% * 7.6 A
Min Amp. =
125% * 3.0 A
I2 =
5.5 A
I3 =
7.6 A
I4 =
7.6 A b
I5 =
3.0 A
Min Amp. =
125% * 1.1A
½ HP
Bulletin
294
1.1 A
1/2 HP
FLC =
1.1 A**
2 HP
Bulletin
294
3.4 A
Min Amp. =
125% * 7.6 A
5 HP
Bulletin
291
7.6 A a
Min Amp. =
125% * 7.6 A
5 HP
Bulletin
290
7.6 A b
Min Amp. =
125% * 2.1 A
1 HP
Bulletin
294
2.1 A
Min Amp. =
125% * 3.4 A
2 HP
FLC =
3.4 A**
5 HP
FLC =
7.6 A**
5 HP
FLC =
7.6 A**
1 HP
FLC =
2.1 A**
** Table 430.250 of NFPA 70-2011
270
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Appendix A
1. Requirement One: Controller Ratings
— The motor controllers and overload relays must be listed for group installation with specified maximum branch-circuit protection.
Text:
“7.2.10.4(1) Each motor controller and overload device is… listed for group installation with specified maximum branch-circuit protection…”
Analysis:
To apply the ArmorStart LT motor controllers in the multiple-motor branch circuit shown in
Figure 98 , 7.2.10.4(1) must be satisfied; each controller
must be listed for group installation with specified maximum branch-circuit protection. The UL listing for each ArmorStart LT motor controller confirms that it – including its integral overload relay and motor disconnecting means — is suitable for motor group installation with specified fuses, satisfying 7.2.10.4(1).
The Bulletin 290E and 291E controllers are listed for group installation according to UL 508, Industrial Control Equipment. The Bulletin 294E controllers are listed for group installation according to UL 508C, Power
Conversion Equipment.
Referring to
Figure 99 (a) indicates the markings on the nameplate that satisfy
7.2.10.4(1). The marking “Suitable for Motor Group Installation” satisfies the requirement to be listed for group installation. The ratings located beneath the description “Max. Ratings” are the specified maximum branch circuit protection.
The (a) beside the fuse(s) indicates that the maximum protection specified on the nameplate applies to these fuse(s).
2. Requirement Two: Conductor Short-circuit and Ground-Fault
Protection
— The fuse must protect the conductors for short-circuit faults and ground faults.
Text:
“7.2.10.4(2) The rating or setting of the branch short-circuit and groundfault protection device does not exceed the values in
for the smallest conductor in the circuit.”
Analysis:
Referring to
Figure 98 , 7.2.10.4(2) must be satisfied. The fuse, as indicated by the description in Figure 98
(a), is the branch short-circuit and ground-fault protection device. The word circuit means the branch circuit.
The conductors of the branch circuit start at the load side of the fuses and end at the input to the motor, including the conductors between the motor controllers and the motor. The smallest conductor in the circuit is any one of the 14 AWG conductors that supply each controller and motor. The note at (b) indicates the conductor protection is based on the smallest conductor,
14 AWG. Referring to
Table 48 a 14 AWG conductor may be used in a circuit
that is protected by a fuse of any class having a rating of 60 amperes or less (c).
Therefore, selecting a fuse of any class with a maximum rating of 60 amperes satisfies the conductor protection requirement of 7.2.10.4(2).
Supplementary Note 1:
The value specified in Table 48 is the maximum rating
of fuse that 7.2.10.4(2) permits to protect that size of conductor. The rating of
the fuse may be set to the maximum value given by Table 48 for the smallest
conductor without further justification. However, if any controller, or other
component, has a maximum rating of fuse that is less than the Table 48
value, the
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
271
Appendix A
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
272
maximum rating of the fuse protecting the branch circuit must be reduced to the lower value so that all components are applied according to their ratings. For example, as shown in Requirement Three, a lower value may be necessary to protect the motor controller within its ratings because its specified maximum
protection is less than the rating that Table 48 permits for the smallest circuit
conductor. Another reason to use a lower rating of fuse is to provide more conservative conductor and controller protection. However, in all cases it is important to ensure the ampere rating is sufficient to start and operate the motors without nuisance opening of the fuse(s).
Supplementary Note 2:
The note at (b) points to the conductor on the output of the ½ Hp Bulletin 294E controller in order to emphasize that the smallest conductor in the circuit includes the conductors between each controller and motor. This includes the output of the variable-frequency AC drive-based
Bulletin 294E controllers; even though these drives have electronic short-circuit protection. According to NFPA 79, the fuse, and not the drive’s electronic shortcircuit protection, provides the short-circuit fault and ground-fault protection for these output conductors.
Supplementary Note 3:
Generally, connecting a smaller conductor to a larger conductor requires the installation of fuses at the connection. This connection may be made without this fuse, in some cases, through the use of a tap rule that indirectly protects the smaller conductor by limiting two things: the ratio of the ampacity of the larger conductor to the ampacity of the smaller conductor and the maximum length of the smaller conductor (see, for example, 7.2.8.2). When applying 7.2.10.4(2), such a tap rule is neither applicable nor necessary. In
Figure 98 , the smaller 14 AWG conductors may be connected to combined load
conductors of any size because 7.2.10.4 does not indirectly protect the smaller conductor by limiting the ratio of the larger to smaller conductor ampacities and
the conductor length. Instead, Table 48 protects the smallest conductor directly
by specifying the maximum rating of fuse that may protect a branch circuit that contains a conductor of that size.
3. Requirement Three: Controller Short-Circuit and Ground-Fault
Protection
— Each motor controller must be protected according to its own ratings, that is, applied in accordance with its listing.
Text:
“(1) Each motor controller and overload device is… listed for group installation with specified maximum branch-circuit protection…”
Analysis:
See (d) in
Figure 98 . The characteristics of the fuse(s) permitted to
protect the conductors (see Requirement 2) must now be compared to those in the controller’s ratings. To comply with the listing of each motor controller and overload relay, the fuse(s) must comply with the maximum branch-circuit protection specified in the controller markings. Therefore, the fuse(s) must be of a class marked on all of the controllers and the rating of the fuse(s) must not exceed the rating marked on any of the controllers. The markings of each controller specify that a fuse having a maximum rating of 45 A may protect the motor controller. When connecting to an electrical supply having an available fault current of 5000 amperes or less, the class of the fuse is not specified and may be any class. When connecting to an electrical supply having an available fault
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Appendix A
current between 5000 and 10000 amperes, the class of the fuse must be CC, J or T. Since the electrical supply has an available fault current of 9000 amperes, selecting a Class CC, J or T fuse with a rating of 45 A or less ensures each motor controller is applied within its own ratings.
Supplementary Note 1:
The rating of the fuse must not exceed the rating permitted by 7.2.10.4(2) to protect the smallest conductor in the circuit.
Selecting a Class CC, J or T fuse with a rating of 45 amperes, being less than 60 amperes, also protects the conductors (see Requirement 2). Although the
ArmorStart LT products presently have a maximum fuse rating of 45 A, future controllers may have maximum fuse ratings that exceed 60 A. In this case, the maximum rating of fuse is limited by the rating to protect the 14 AWG conductors, 60 A. The maximum rating permitted for the controller, 45 A, is a maximum rating and can be reduced, for more conservative protection, provided nuisance opening of the fuses do not occur.
Supplementary Note 2:
In this appendix, a fuse having a rating of any class means a fuse having the let-through characteristics of an Class RK-5 fuse. Class
RK-5 fuses are assumed to have the maximum let-through of any class of fuse. For this reason, the ArmorStart LT motor controllers that are marked for use with fuses, without a restriction to a particular class, have been tested with and are intended to be used with fuses having a class of RK-5. Of course, fuses of a class that have lower let-throughs than Class RK-5, such as Class CC, J or T, are also acceptable. A fuse having a rating of any class also restricts the fuse to those that have been evaluated for use as branch-circuit protection devices. This means that semiconductor fuses, used to protect power electronic equipment, or supplemental fuses cannot be used to protect the multiple-motor branch circuit.
Supplementary Note 3:
There are four complementary ratings relevant to the
“specified maximum branch-circuit protection” of 7.2.10.4(1). They are: the fuse class, the maximum fuse rating, the voltage rating and connection of the source
(480Y/277 V), and the available fault current of the source. Applying the controllers according to these four ratings means that a fault on the output of all the controllers, and internal faults for Bulletin 294 controllers, will not result in a shock or fire hazard.
Supplementary Note 4:
In this example, the assumption is made that the available fault current at the controller is that of the source on the line side of the fuses. Although it is true that the wiring impedance between the fuses and the first controller reduce the fault current available at the controllers, this reduction is neglected by assuming the first controller, the ½ horsepower
Bulletin 294 controller, is very close to the fuses.
4. Requirement Four: Overload Protection
— The motors, conductors and controllers must be protected against motor overload conditions.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
273
Appendix A
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
274
Text:
“7.3.1 General. Overload devices shall be provided to protect each motor, motor controller, and branch-circuit conductor against excessive heating due to motor overloads or failure to start.”
“7.3.1.1 Motors. Motor overload protection shall be provided in accordance with
Article 430, Part III, of NFPA 70.”
Analysis:
Each ArmorStart LT motor controller incorporates an integral overload relay. This overload function must be set in accordance with Article 430,
Part III of NFPA 70. Selecting the ampacity of the circuit conductors appropriately (see Requirement 5) ensures the overload relays, when set according to 7.3.1.1, will protect the conductors against overheating due to motor overloads.
Supplementary Note:
Each individual controller overload relay directly protects the conductors connected to the input and output of that controller and the motor that the controller supplies. The combined load conductor is protected by the tripping of one or more of the controller overload relays, which remove(s) the overloaded motor(s) before the combined load conductor overheats.
5. Requirement: Conductor Ampacity
—The minimum ampacity of conductors.
Text:
“12.5.3 Motor circuit conductors supplying a single motor shall have an ampacity not less than 125 percent of the motor full-load current rating.”
“12.5.4 Combined load conductors shall have an ampacity not less than … 125 percent of the full-load current rating of the highest rated motor plus the sum of the full-load current ratings of all other connected motors…”
Analysis:
Referring to
Figure 99 , (a), (b) and (c) explain the method for
calculating the minimum required conductor ampacity for each of these conductors: input and output conductors of Bulletin 290E and 291E controllers
(a), input and output conductors of Bulletin 294E controllers (b) and combined load conductors that supply Bulletin 290E, 291E and 294E controllers (c). The currents I1 through I5 are the input currents to the controllers. For the Bulletin
290E and 291E controllers, these are the same as the output motor currents. For the Bulletin 294E controllers, these currents are the rated input currents.
The example does not address conditions of use such as an ambient temperature exceeding 30 °C or more than three current-carrying conductors in a cable or raceway. In a particular application, these conditions of use may require derating of the ampacity given in Table 12.5.1. This example assumes that, under the conditions of use, both conductors have sufficient ampacity for the application.
This means the 14 AWG conductors have an ampacity of no less than
9.5 A and the 10 AWG conductors have an ampacity of no less than
27.4 A.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Appendix A
Input and Output Conductors of Bulletin 290E and 291E
Controllers (a)
For Bulletin 290E and 291E controllers, which use an electromechanical contactor to control the motor, the input current, like the output current, is just the current to the motor. Therefore, the minimum conductor ampacity for both input and output conductors is 125 percent of the motor full-load current rating, as specified in the text of 12.5.3 (a).
Referring to
Figure 99 , the full-load current rating of a three-phase, 460 V, 5 Hp
induction motor is 7.6 amperes. Using this value, both the input and output conductors must have an ampacity that is not less than 125% of 7.6 A or 9.5 A.
Input and Output Conductors of Bulletin 294E Controllers
(b)
The Bulletin 294E controllers use a variable-frequency AC drive to control the motor. These drives use a power conversion method that generates input currents that are larger than the output currents. The input currents are larger because, unlike the output currents to the motor, they are not sinusoidal. Consequently, when determining the minimum ampacity of the input conductors, the requirement of 12.5.3 must be based on the rated input current of the controller, rather than the full-load current rating of the motor. Therefore, the minimum ampacity of the input conductors must be 125% of the controller rated input current, while that of the output conductors must be 125% of the motor full-load current rating.
Referring to
Figure 99 , the 1 Hp Bulletin 294E controller has a rated input
current of 3.0 amperes. Using the rated input current, the conductors from the combined load conductors to the controllers must have an ampacity of 125% of 3.0 A or 3.75 A. The output conductors must have an ampacity of 125% of
2.1 A or 2.6 A.
Combined Load Conductors
(c)
The requirement for the minimum ampacity of the combined load conductors is given by 12.5.4. When the combined load conductors supply one or more
Bulletin 294E controllers, the minimum ampacity calculation of 12.5.4 must be made by substituting the rated input current of the Bulletin 294E controllers for the full-load current rating of the motors that these controllers supply.
, the currents I1, I2, I3, I4 and I5 are the input currents to each controller. I3 and I4 are the full-load current ratings of the 5 Hp motors. I1, I2 and I5 are the rated input currents of the Bulletin 294E controllers. Referring to the explanatory text (c) in
Figure 99 , the method for calculating the minimum
ampacity of the combined load conductors follows: first, multiply the largest input current to any controller – Bulletin 290E, 291E or 294E - by 125%. In this case, the input currents to the Bulletin 290E and 291E controllers, I3 and I4, are the largest, 7.6 A. Because they are the same, either can be used. Choose I3 to calculate 125% of the maximum. 125% of 7.6 A is 9.5 A. Second, sum the remaining input currents (I1, I2, I4, I5) for a total of 17.9 A. Third, add the result from the first step to the result from the second for a total of 27.4 A. Finally, the minimum ampacity of the combined load conductors is 27.4 A.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
275
Appendix A
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Supplementary Note 1:
The input currents to the Bulletin 294E motor controllers are larger than the output currents to the motor because the input currents contain harmonics resulting from the power conversion process.
This harmonic content and the magnitude of the resulting non-sinusoidal input currents depend on the impedance of the electrical supply. The value specified for the rated input current is the maximum value over the range of possible supply impedances. For this reason, the magnitude of current measured on a particular electrical system may be less than the specified value.
276
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012
Appendix
B
CIP Information
High Level Product
Description
The ArmorStart EtherNet/IP is an extension of the ArmorStart DeviceNet.
Three product types offered:
Bulletin Number
280E
281E
284E
Distributed Starter Type
DOL
Reversing
Inverter
0x172
0x174
0x176
0x177
0x178
0xD1
0xD2
0xD3
0xDA
Product Codes and Name Strings
The following table lists the product codes and name strings that will be added to the ArmorStart product family for EtherNet/IP.
Product Code
(hex)
0x91
0x92
0x93
Product Code
(decimal)
145
146
147
Identity Object Name String
ArmorStart Bulletin 280E 0.5…2.5 A 24V DC
ArmorStart Bulletin 280E 1.1…5.5 A 24V DC
ArmorStart Bulletin 280E 3.2…16 A 24V DC
370
372
374
375
376
209
210
211
218
ArmorStart Bulletin 281E 0.5…2.5 A 24V DC
ArmorStart Bulletin 281E 1.1…5.5 A 24V DC
ArmorStart Bulletin 281E 3.2…16 A 24V DC
ArmorStart Bulletin 281E 0.3…1.5 A 24V DC
ArmorStart Bulletin 284E PF40 480V 0.5 Hp
ArmorStart Bulletin 284E PF40 480V 1 Hp
ArmorStart Bulletin 284E PF40 480V 2 Hp
ArmorStart Bulletin 284E PF40 480V 3 Hp
ArmorStart Bulletin 284E PF40 480V 5 Hp
CIP Explicit Connection
Behavior
The ArmorStart allows run, jog and user outputs to be driven by connected explicit messages when no I/O connection exists, or when a I/O connection exists in the idle state, a single EtherNet/IP Class 3 explicit connection will be allowed to send “explicit control” messages via an “Active Explicit” connection.
An EtherNet/IP Class 3 explicit connection becomes the “explicit control”
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
277
Appendix B CIP Information connection when it becomes the first EtherNet/IP Class 3 explicit connection to send a “set” service to one of the following:
• The “value” attribute of any DOP instance (class code 0x09).
• The “data” attribute of any output (consumed) Assembly instance (class code 0x04).
• Attribute 3 or 4 of the Control Supervisor Object (class code 0x29).
EDS Files
Most of the information contained in the EDS (Electronic Data Sheet) files for the ArmorStart EtherNet/IP product line will be able to be extracted via the network.
CIP Object Requirements
The following CIP objects will be covered in the following subsections.
0x001D
0x001E
0x0029
0x002C
0x0047
0x0048
0x0097
0x0098
Class
0x0001
0x0004
0x0006
0x0008
0x0009
0x000F
0x0010
0x00B4
0x00F5
0x00F6
Object
Identity Object
Assembly Object
Connection Manager Object
Discrete Input Point Object
Discrete Output Point Object
Parameter Object
Parameter Group Object
Discrete Input Group Object
Discrete Output Group Object
Control Supervisor Object
Overload Object
Device Level Ring Object
QoS Object
DPI Fault Object
DPI Alarm Object
Interface Object
TCP/IP Interface Object
Ethernet Link Object
For convenience, all objects that are accessible via the EtherNet/IP port are included.
278
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
CIP Information Appendix B
Identity Object
CLASS CODE 0x0001
The following class attributes are supported for the Identity Object:
Attribute ID
1
2
Access Rule
Get
Get
Name
Revision
Max Instance
Data Type
UINT
UINT
Value
1
9
Up to nine instances (Instance 1…9) of the Identity Object will be supported.
The following table shows what each instance will represent, and what the revision attribute will report:
5
6
7
8 ➊
9 ➊
Instance
1
2
3
4
Name
EtherNet/IP Module
EtherNet/IP Boot
FPGA
Control Module
Revision Attribute
The firmware rev of the EtherNet/IP board main firmware.
The firmware rev of the EtherNet/IP board boot firmware.
The rev of the FPGA program
A coded revision reflecting the revision attribute of the other various identity object instances (excluding boot code). Major revisions are coded as: 0SSSMMMM
• 0 = reserved by DeviceNet
• SSS = Revision of Soft-start or inverter. Initial release = 0; We will be limited to support for 8 major revisions.
• MMMM = Revision of Main ArmorStart board. Initial release = 1; We will be limited to support for 15 major revisions.
Main Control Board
Operating System
Main Control Board Boot Code
The Internal PF 40 Inverter
MCB IIC Daughter Board
BASE IIC Daughter Board
The firmware rev of the Main ArmorStart board OS stored in flash memory.
The firmware rev of the Main ArmorStart board boot code stored in flash memory.
The firmware rev of the Inverter as read from the RS485 connection.
The firmware rev of the MCB IIC Daughter Board
The firmware rev of the Base IIC Daughter Board
➊ These instance numbers will assume the next available instance base on the unit configuration. (If the unit is a DOL (No Drive) and there is a MCB Daughter board present it’s instance number will be 7.)
IMPORTANT
Attempts access Attribute 10 of all DeviceNet Main Control Board instances will be blocked. If Attribute 10 (Heartbeat Interval) is accessed, an “Attribute Not Supported” error will be generated.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
279
Appendix B CIP Information
Attribute ID Access Rule
2 Get Type
3 Get Product Code
Revision
Minor Revision
6 Get Serial Number
Product Name
7 Get
ASCII String
8 Get State
Instance 1 of the Identity Object will contain the following attributes:
Name
UINT
UINT
UINT
Structure of:
USINT
USINT
Data Type
WORD
UDINT
Structure of:
USINT
STRING
USINT
Value
1
22
Starter Rating specific
See table above.
Bit 0…0 = Not Owned; 1 = Owned by Master
Bit 2…0 = Factory Defaulted; 1 = Configured
Bit 8 - Minor Recoverable fault
Bit 9 - Minor Unrecoverable fault
Bit 10 - Major Recoverable fault
Bit 11 - Major Unrecoverable fault
Unique number for each device
Product Code specific
Returns the value "3 = Operational"
102
➊
UDINT
➊ Instance 1 only
The following common services will be implemented for Instance 1. Service requests to other instances are serviced through the bridge.
Service Code Class
Implemented for:
Instance Service Name
0x01 Yes Yes Get_Attributes_All
0x05 No Yes Reset
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attributes_Single
The Type 0 and 1 reset service types will reset the Control Module. The
EtherNet/IP module will perform the Type 0 or 1 reset on itself.
280
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
CIP Information Appendix B
Assembly Object
CLASS CODE 0x0004
The following class attributes are supported for the Assembly Object:
Attribute ID Access Rule
1 Get
Name
Revision
Data Type
UINT
Value
1
The following static Assembly instance attributes will be supported for each
Assembly instance.
Attribute ID
1
Access Rule
Get
Name
Number of Members in Member List UINT
Member List
Member Data Description
Data Type
Array of STRUCT
UINT
Member Path
UINT
Packed
EPATH
3
4
Conditional
Get
Data
Size
100 Get String
Array of BYTE
UINT
STRING
Array of CIP paths
Size of Member Data in bits
Value
—
Size of Member EPATA in bytes
Logically encoded member name
—
Number of bytes in attribute 3
—
The following services will be implemented for the Assembly Object.
Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single
0x18 No Yes Get_Member
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
281
Appendix B CIP Information
Byte
0
Bit 7
—
Byte
—
Bit 7
—
Bit 6
—
Bit 6
—
I/O Assemblies
The following table summarizes the Assembly instances that are supported in the
ArmrorStart EtherNet/IP Product:
Instance Type
3 Consumed
Description
Required ODVA Consumed Instance
150
151 ➊
162
166 ➊
191
192
Produced
Produced
Consumed
Consumed
Consumed
Consumed
Default Bulletin 280E/281E Produced Assembly
Default Bulletin 284E Produced Assembly
Default Consumed Instance for DOL and Reversing Starters
Default Consumed Instance for Inverter type Starters
Empty assembly for Input Only I/O Connection
Empty assembly for Listen Only I/O Connection
➊ These assemblies are selectable on Inverter Type ArmorStart units only.
Instances 3 and 52 are required by the ODVA Motor Starter Profile. When used as an EtherNet/IP Class 1 connection point, the I/O data attribute is simply passed through the bridge.
Instance 3
This is the required output (consumed) assembly.
Bit 5
—
Instance 3 ODVA Starter
Bit 4 Bit 3
— —
Bit 2
—
Instance 52
This is the required input (produced) assembly.
Bit 1
—
Bit 0
Run Fwd
Bit 5
—
Instance 52 ODVA Starter
Bit 4 Bit 3
— —
Bit 2
Running
Bit 1
—
Bit 0
Fault
282
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
CIP Information Appendix B
Instance 150
This is the default input (produced) assembly for Bulletin 280E/281E starters.
13
14
15
9
10
11
12
Byte
0
1
2
Bit 7
3
4 —
5 —
Instance 150 "Starter Stat" - Default Status Assembly for Bulletin 280E/281E Starters
Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2
Reserved (AOP Tag name: {name}:I.Fault)
Reserved (AOP Tag name: {name}:I.Fault)
—
—
Bit 1 Bit 0
—
DisconnectClosed
Reserved (AOP Tag name: {name}:I.Fault)
Reserved (AOP Tag name: {name}:I.Fault)
Hand
RunningReverse TripPresent
In3 In2 In1 In0
6 Pt07DeviceOut Pt06DeviceOut Pt05DeviceOut Pt04DeviceOut Pt03DeviceOut Pt02DeviceOut Pt01DeviceOut Pt00DeviceOut
Pt14DeviceOut
Pt13DeviceOut Pt12DeviceOut Pt11DeviceOut Pt10DeviceOut Pt09DeviceOut Pt08DeviceOut
8 Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter Int00DeviceOut Cfg” (low byte) - ProducedWord0Param
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter Int00DeviceOut Cfg” (high byte) - ProducedWord0Param
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter Int01DeviceOut Cfg” (low byte) - ProducedWord1Param
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter Int01DeviceOut Cfg” (high byte) - ProducedWord1Param
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter Int02DeviceOut Cfg” (low byte) - ProducedWord2Param
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter Int02DeviceOut Cfg” (high byte) - ProducedWord2Param
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter Int03DeviceOut Cfg” (low byte) - ProducedWord3Param
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter Int03DeviceOut Cfg” (high byte) - ProducedWord3Param
Note:
Byte 0 - 3 refers to PLC communication status. All 1s (bit high) indicates a connection fault (communication fault) exists or all 0s (bit low) connection is normal.
Instance 151
This is the default input (produced) assembly for Inverter Type Distributed
Starters.
Byte
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Bit 7
AtReference
OutputContactor
Status
Bit 6
Network
ReferenceStatus
BrakeContactor
Status
Produce Assembly - Instance 151 “Drive Status” - 284E Starters
Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2
Reserved - {name}:I.Fault
Reserved - {name}:I.Fault
NetControlStatus
Bit 1
Reserved - {name}:I.Fault
Reserved - {name}:I.Fault
Ready RunningReverse RunningForward WarningPresent
DisconnectClosed Hand In3 In2 In1
OutputFrequency (Low) (xxx.x Hz)
Bit 0
TripPresent
In0
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
283
Appendix B CIP Information
11
12
9
10
Byte
7
8
15
16
13
14
17
Bit 7 Bit 6
Produce Assembly - Instance 151 “Drive Status” - 284E Starters
Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
OutputFrequency (High) (xxx.x Hz)
Pt07DeviceOut Pt06DeviceOut Pt05DeviceOut Pt04DeviceOut Pt03DeviceOut Pt02DeviceOut Pt01DeviceOut Pt00DeviceOut
LogicEnable Pt14DeviceOut Pt14DeviceOut Pt13DeviceOut Pt11DeviceOut P10DeviceOut Pt09DeviceOut
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter 13 Prod Assy Word 0" (low byte)” - Int00DeviceOut
Pt08DeviceOut
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter 13 Prod Assy Word 0" (high byte)” - Int00DeviceOut
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter 14 Prod Assy Word 1" (low byte)” - Int01DeviceOut
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter 14 Prod Assy Word 1" (high byte)” - Int01DeviceOut
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter 15 Prod Assy Word 2" (low byte)” - Int02DeviceOut
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter 15 Prod Assy Word 2" (high byte)” - Int02DeviceOut
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter 16 Prod Assy Word 3" (low byte)” - Int03DeviceOut
Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter 16 Prod Assy Word 3" (high byte)” - Int03DeviceOut
Note:
Byte 0 - 3 refers to PLC communication status. All 1s (bit high) indicates a connection fault (communication fault) exists or all 0s (bit low) connection is normal.
** Contactor Reference
Contactor 1 Source Brake Contactor status
Contactor 2 Output Contactor status
Instance 162
This is the standard output (consumed) assembly with
Network Inputs.
Byte
0
1
2
Instance 162 Default Consumed DOL and Reversing Starter
Bit 7
OutB
Bit 6
OutA
Bit 5
—
Bit 4
—
Bit 3
—
Bit 2
ResetFault
Bit 1
RunReverse
Bit 0
RunForward
Pt07DeviceIn Pt06DeviceIn Pt05DeviceIn Pt04DeviceIn Pt03DeviceIn Pt02DeviceIn Pt01DeviceIn Pt00DeviceIn
Pt15DeviceIn Pt14DeviceIn Pt13DeviceIn Pt12DeviceIn Pt11DeviceIn Pt10DeviceIn Pt09DeviceIn Pt08DeviceIn
Instance 166
This is the standard output (consumed) assembly for Inverter Type Distributed
Starters with network inputs.
284
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
CIP Information Appendix B
3
4
5
Byte
0
Bit 7
Out B
1 DriveInput4
2
Pt07DeviceIn
Pt15DeviceIn
Bit 6
Out A
DriveInput3
Instance 166 Consumed Inverter Type Starter with Network Inputs
Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2
—
DriveInput2
JogReverse
DriveInput1
JogForward
DecelCtrl_1
ResetFault
DecelCtrl_0
Pt06DeviceIn
Pt14DeviceIn
Pt05DeviceIn
Pt13DeviceIn
FreqCommand (Low) (xxx.x Hz)
FreqCommand (High) (xxx.x Hz)
Pt04DeviceIn
Pt12DeviceIn
Pt03DeviceIn
Pt11DeviceIn
Pt02DeviceIn
Pt10DeviceIn
Bit 1
RunReverse
AccelCtrl_1
Bit 0
RunForward
AccelCtrl_0
Pt01DeviceIn
Pt9DeviceIn
Pt00DeviceIn
Pt8DeviceIn
Connection Manager Object
CLASS CODE 0x0006
The following class attributes will be supported for the Connection Manager
Object.
Attribute ID Access Rule
1 Get
Name
Revision
2 Get Max
3
4
6
Get
Get
Get
Number of Instances
Optional Attribute List
Max Number Class Attribs
Data Type
UINT
UINT
UINT
Array of UINT
UINT
Two Class 1 connections for I/O transfer will be supported.
Six Class 3 explicit connections will be supported.
The following instance attributes will be supported:
Value
1
—
—
—
—
Attribute ID
1
2
3
Access Rule
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Name
Open Requests
Open Format Rejects
Open Resource Rejects
Data Type
UINT
UINT
UINT
Value
Number of Forward Open service requests received.
Number of Forward Open service requests which were rejected due to bad format.
Number of Forward Open service requests which were rejected due to lack of resources.
4 Get/Set Open Other Rejects UINT
Number of Forward Open service requests which were rejected for reasons other than bad format or lack of resources.
5 Get/Set Close Requests UINT Number of Forward Close service requests received.
6 Get/Set Close
Number of Forward Close service requests which were rejected due to bad format.
UINT
Number of Forward Close service requests which were rejected for reasons other than bad format.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
285
Appendix B CIP Information
286
The following services will be implemented for the Connection Manager Object.
Service Code
0E hex
4E hex
54 hex
Implemented for:
Class Instance Service Name
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
Forward_Close
Forward_Open
Class 1 Connections
Class 1 connections are used to transfer I/O data, and can be established to the assembly object instances. Each Class 1 connection establishes two data transports, one consuming and one producing. The heartbeat instances are used for connections that shall access only inputs. Class 1 uses UDP transport.
• Total numbers of supported Class 1 connections equals 2 (total for: exclusive owner + input only + listen only)
• Supported Actual Packet Interval (API): 2
…
3200 ms (Note that the minimum API can be higher if processor resources become a problem)
• T->O (Target to Originator) Connection type: point-to-point, multicast
• O->T (Originator to Target) Connection type: point-to-point
• Supported trigger type: cyclic, change-of-state
The producing instance can be assigned to multiple transports, using any combination of multicast and point-to-point connection types.
Only one Exclusive-owner connection will be supported at each time. If there’s already an Exclusive-owner connection established and an originator tries to establish a new Exclusive-owner connection an “Ownership conflict” (general status = 0x01, extended status = 0x0106) error code will be returned.
For a connection to be established the requested data sizes must be an exact match of the connections points that the connection tries to connect to. If the requested and actual sizes don’t match, an “Invalid connection size” (general status = 0x01, extended status = 0x0109) error code will be returned.
Exclusive Owner Connection
This connection type is used for controlling the outputs of the module and shall not be dependent on any other condition. Only one exclusive owner connection can be opened against the module.
If an exclusive owner connection is already opened “Connection in use” (general status = 0x01, extend status = 0x0100) shall be returned an error code.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
CIP Information Appendix B
• Connection point O -> T shall be Assembly object, Instance 3, 162 or 166 (162 for product codes <= 0x100 only, 166 for product codes
> 0x100 only).
• Connection point T -> O shall be Assembly object, Instance 52, 150 or 151 (150 for product codes <= 0x100 only, 151 for product codes
> 0x100 only).
Listen Only Connection
This connection is dependent on another connection to exist. If that connection
(exclusive owner or input only) is closed, the listen only connection shall be closed as well.
It is recommended that the originator sets the data size in the Forward_Open be zero.
• Number of supported listen only connections equals two (shared with exclusive owner and listen only connection).
• Connection point O -> T shall be Assembly object, Instance 192 (Listen only heartbeat)
• Connection point T -> O shall be Assembly object, Instance 52, 150 or 151 (150 for product codes <= 0x100 only, 151 for product codes
> 0x100 only)
Class 3 CIP Connections
Class 3 CIP connections are used to establish connections to the message router.
The connection is used for explicit messaging. Class 3 CIP connections use TCP connections.
• Three concurrent encapsulation sessions will be supported
• Six concurrent Class 3 CIP connections will be supported
• More than one Class 3 CIP connection per encapsulation session will be supported
• Supported Actual Packet Interval (API): 100
…
10000 ms
• T->O Connection type: point-to-point
• O->T Connection type: point-to-point
• Supported trigger type: application
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
287
Appendix B CIP Information
Discrete Input Point Object
CLASS CODE 0x0008
The following class attributes are currently supported for the Discrete Input
Point Object:
Attribute ID
1
2
Access Rule
Get
Get
Attribute ID
3
115
116
Access Rule
Get
Get/Set
Get/Set
Name
Revision
Max Instance
Data Type
UINT
UINT
Value
2
4
Four instances of the Discrete Input Point Object are supported. All instances contain the following attributes.
Name
Value
Force Enable
Force Value
Data Type
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Value
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
0 = Disable, 1 = Enable
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
The following common services will be implemented for the Discrete Input Point
Object.
Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single
Discrete Output Point Object
CLASS CODE 0x0009
The following class attributes are supported.
Attribute ID Access Rule
1 Get
2 Get
Name
Revision
Max Instance
Data Type
UINT
UINT
Value
1
4 or 10
Four instances of the Discrete Output Point Object are supported for DOL/
Reverser units. Ten instances are supported for Drive units. The following table summarizes the DOP instances.
288
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
CIP Information Appendix B
Attribute ID
3
5
6
7
8
113
114
115
116
Access Rule
Get
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
➊
Get/Set
➊
Get/Set
Get/Set
117 Get/Set
Instance Name
1 Run Fwd Output
2
9
10
7
8
5
6
3
4
Run Rev Output
User Output 1
User Output 2
Drive Input 1
Drive Input 2
Drive Input 3
Drive Input 4
Drive Jog Fwd
Drive Jog Rev
0029-01-03
0029-01-04
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Description
Run Forward output. For all starter types, this output is hard wired from the
ArmorStart CPU to the actuator.
Run Reverse output. For all starter types, this output is hard wired from the
ArmorStart CPU to the actuator.
These are the two ArmorStart user outputs for all starter types.
These four instances exist for Inverter units only. They are drive the outputs on the main control board that are connected to Drive Inputs 1…4.
This instances exists for Inverter units only.
All instances contain the following attributes.
Name
Value
Fault Action
Fault Value
Idle Action
Idle Value
Pr Fault Action
Pr Fault Value
Force Enable
Force Value
Input Binding
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
STRUCT:
USINT
Data Type
Array of USINT
Value
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
0 = Fault Value attribute, 1 = Hold Last State
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
0 = Fault Value attribute, 1 = Hold Last State
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
0 = Pr Fault Value attribute, 1 = Ignore
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
0 = Disable, 1 = Enable
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Size of Appendix I encoded path
Appendix I encoded path
NULL path means Attribute 3 drives the output.
Otherwise, this is a path to a bit in the Bit Table.
➊ For DOP Instances 1, 2, 9 and 10, Attributes 113 and 114 have “Get” only access, and their values are always 0.
The following common services are implemented for the Discrete Output Point
Object.
Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance
0x0E Yes Yes
Service Name
Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
289
Appendix B CIP Information
Parameter Object
Attribute ID
1
2
8
Access Rule
Get
Get
Get
Access Rule
Get/Set
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Attribute ID
1
2
3
18
19
16
17
20
21
14
15
12
13
10
11
8
9
6
7
4
5
CLASS CODE 0x000F
The following class attributes will be supported for the Parameter Object.
Name
Revision
Max Instance
Parameter Class Descriptor
Data Type
UINT
UINT
WORD
Value
—
—
—
The number of instances of the parameter object will depend upon the type of
Control Module that the EtherNet/IP board is connected to.
The following instance attributes will be implemented for all parameter attributes.
Name
Value
Link Path Size
Link Path
Descriptor
Data Type
Data Size
Parameter Name String
Units String
Help String
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Scaling Multiplier
Scaling Devisor
Scaling Base
Scaling Offset
Multiplier Link
Divisor Link
Base Link
Offset Link
Decimal Precision
Data Type
Specified in Descriptor
USINT
Array of:
BYTE
EPATH
WORD
EPATH
USINT
SHORT_STRING
SHORT_STRING
SHORT_STRING
Specified in Descriptor
Specified in Descriptor
INT
UINT
UINT
UINT
Specified in Descriptor
UINT
UINT
UINT
UINT
USINT
Value
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
290
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
CIP Information Appendix B
The following services will be implemented for the Parameter Object.
Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance
0x01 No Yes
Service Name
Get_Attribute_All
0x0E Yes
0x10 No
0x4b No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
Get_Enum_String
Parameter Group Object
Attribute ID
1
2
Access Rule
Get
Get
Attribute ID
1
2
3 n
4
Access Rule
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
CLASS CODE 0x0010
The following class attributes will be supported for the Parameter Object.
Name
Revision
Max Instance
Data Type
UINT
UINT
Value
—
—
The following instance attributes will be supported for all parameter group instances.
Name
Group Name String
Number of Members
1st Parameter
2nd Parameter
Nth Parameter
Data Type
SHORT_STRING
UINT
UINT
UINT
UINT
Value
—
—
—
—
—
The following common services will be implemented for the Parameter Group
Object.
Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance
0x01 Yes Yes
Service Name
Get_Attribute_All
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
291
Appendix B CIP Information
Discrete Input Group Object
CLASS CODE 0x001D
No class attributes will be supported for the Discrete Input Group Object.
A single instance of the Discrete Input Group Object is supported and contains the following instance attributes.
Attribute ID
3
4
6
7
Access Rule
Get
Get
Get/Set
Get/Set
Name
Number of Instances
Binding
Off_On_Delay
Off_On_Delay
Data Type
USINT
Array of UINT
UINT
UINT
Value
4
List of DIP Instances
—
—
The following common services will be implemented for the Discrete Input
Group Object.
Service Code
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class Instance Service Name
No
No
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
Discrete Output Group Object
CLASS CODE 0x001E
No class attributes will be supported for the Discrete Output Group Object.
Instance 1 exists for all ArmorStart units. Instance 2 exists for drive units only.
Instances 1 contains the following instance attributes.
Attribute ID
3
4
6
104
105
Access Rule
Get
Get
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Name
Number of Instances
Binding
Command
Network Status Overrride
Comm Status Overrride
Data Type
USINT
Array of UINT
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Value
4 for DOL/Soft Starter 10 for Inverters
List of DOP Instances
0 = Idle, 1 = Run
0 = No Override (go to safe state)
1 = Override (run local logic)
0 = No Override (go to safe state)
1 = Override (run local logic)
292
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Attribute ID
3
4
7
8
9
10
113
114
Access Rule
Get
Get
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
CIP Information Appendix B
Instance 2 contains the following instance attributes.
Name
Number of Instances
Binding
Fault Action
Fault Value
Idle Action
Idle Value
Pr Fault Action
Pr Fault Value
Data Type
USINT
Array of UINT
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Value
4
5, 6, 7, 8
0 = Fault Value Attribute, 1 = Hold Last State
0 = OFF, 1 = On
0 = Idle Value Attribute, 1 = Hold Last State
0 = OFF, 1 = On
0 = Pr Fault Value Attribute, 1 = Ignore
0 = OFF, 1 = On
The following common services are implemented for the Discrete Output Group
Object.
Service Code
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class Instance Service Name
No
No
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
Control Supervisor Object
CLASS CODE 0x0029
No class attributes are supported.
A single instance (Instance 1) of the Control Supervisor Object is supported and contains the following instance attributes.
Attribute ID
3
10
12
100
101
4 ➊
7
8 ➊
9
Access Rule
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Name
Run 1
Run 2
Running 1
Running 2
Ready
Tripped
Fault Reset
Keypad Mode
Keypad Disable
Data Type
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Value
These Run outputs also map to DOP
Instances 1 and 2
—
—
—
—
—
0->1 = Trip Reset
0 = Maintained, 1 = Momentary
0 = Not Disabled, 1= Disabled
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
293
Appendix B CIP Information
Attribute ID Access Rule
115
152
153
Get
Get
Get
Name
Warning Status
124
130
131
150 ➋
151
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get
Trip Enable
Trip Reset Mode
Trip Reset Level
High Speed Ena
Base Enclosure
Base Options
Wiring Options
WORD
BOOL
USINT
BOOL
WORD
Data Type
WORD
WORD
WORD
Value
Bits 0…1 = Reserved
Bit 2 = PL Warning (does not apply for Ethernet version)
Bit 3 = Reserved
Bit 4 = PR Warning (does not apply for Ethernet version)
Bit 5 = CP Warning
Bit 6 = I/O Warning
Bit 7 = Reserved
Bit 8 = PI Warning (does not apply for Ethernet version)
Bit 9 = DN Warning
Bits 10…12 = Reserved
Bit 13 = HW Warning
Bits 14…15 = Reserved
Bit enumerated trip enable word
0 = Manual, 1 = Auto
0 = 100%, Default = 75
0 = Disable, 1 = Enable
Bit 0 = IP67
Bit 1 = NEMA 4x
Bits 2…15 Reserved
Bit 0 = Output Fuse
Bit 1 = Safety Monitor
Bit 2 = CP Fuse Detect
Bits 3…7 = Reserved
Bit 8 = 10A Base
Bit 9 = 25A Base
Bit 10…15 = Reserved
Bit 0 = Conduit
Bit 1 = Round Media
Bits 2…15 = Reserved
294
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Attribute ID
154
Access Rule
Get
155
Overload Object
Get
156
157
➋
Get
Get
158 ➋ Get
CIP Information Appendix B
Name
Starter Enclosure
Starter Options
Last Pr Trip
DB Status
DB Fault
Data Type
WORD
WORD
UINT
WORD
WORD
Value
Bit 0 = IP67
Bit 1 = NEMA 4x
Bits 2…15 Reserved
Bit 0 = Full Keypad
Bit 1 = Safety Monitor
Bit 2 = Source Brake
Bit 3 = CP Brake
Bit 4 = Dynamic Brake
Bit 5 = Output Contactor
Bit 6 = EMI Filter
Bit 7 = 0…10V Analog In
Bits 8…15 = Reserved
—
Bit 0 = DB Faulted
Bit 1 = DB Overtemp Warning
Bit 2 = DB On
Bit 3 = DB Flt Reset Inhibit
Bits 4…15 = Reserved
Bit 0 = DB Overtemp
Bit 1 = DB OverCurrent
Bit 2 = DB UnderCurrent
Bit 3 = DB Shorted Switch
Bit 4 = DB Open
Bit 5 = Reserved
Bit 6 = DB Bus Voltage Link Open
Bit 7 = Reserved
Bit 8 = DB Comms
Bits 9…15 = Reserved
➊ Reversing Starters and Inverter Starters only.
➋
Inverter Starters only
The following common services are implemented for the Control Supervisor
Object.
Service Code
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class Instance Service Name
No
No
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
CLASS CODE 0x002C
No class attributes will be supported for the Overload Object.
A single instance (Instance 1) of the Overload Object is supported for DOL and
Reversing Starters. Instance 1 contains the following instance attributes.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
295
Appendix B CIP Information
Attribute ID
3
4
5
9
10
7
8
190
192
193
194
195
Access Rule
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get/Set
Get
Get
Get
Get
Name
FLA Setting
Trip Class
Average Current
% Thermal Utilized
Current L1
Current L2
Current L3
FLA Setting Times 10
Average Current Times 10
Current L1 Times 10
Current L2 Times 10
Current L3 Times 10
Data Type
BOOL
USINT
INT
USINT
INT
INT
INT
BOOL
UINT
UINT
UINT
UINT
Value
xxx.x amps
— xxx.x amps xxx% FLA xxx.x amps xxx.xx amps xxx.xx amps xxx.xx amps
The following common services are implemented for the Overload Object.
Service Code
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class Instance Service Name
No
No
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
Device Level Ring (DLR)
Object
Attribute ID
1
Access Rule
Get
Attribute ID
1
2
Access Rule
Get
Get
10
12
Get
Get
CLASS CODE 0x0047
The following class attributes will be supported for the DLR Object.
Name
Revision
Data Type
UINT
Value
2
A single instance (Instance 1) will be supported with the following instance attributes.
Name
Network Topology
Network Status
USINT
USINT
Data Type Value
0 = Linear, 1 = Ring
0 = Normal
1 = Ring Fault
2 = Unexpected Loop Detect
3 = Partial Network Fault
4 = Rapid Fault/Restore Cycle
Ring Supervisor Active Supervisor Address
Capability Flags
Struct of
UDINT
Array of 6
USINT
DWORD 0x00000002
296
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Qos Object
Attribute ID
1
Access Rule
Get
Attribute ID
1
6
7
4
5
8
Access Rule
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
DPI Fault Object
CIP Information Appendix B
The following common services will be implemented for the DLR Object.
Service Code
0x01
0x0E
Implemented for:
Class Instance Service Name
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_All
Set_Attribute_Single
CLASS CODE 0x0048
The following class attributes will be supported for the QoS Object.
Name
Revision
Data Type
UINT
Value
1
A single instance (Instance 1) will be supported and it contains the following instance attributes.
Name
802 1Q Tag Enable
DSCP Urgent
DSCP Scheduled
DSCP High
DSCP Low
DSCP Explicit
USINT
Data Type
USINT
USINT
USINT
USINT
USINT
0 = Disable (Default)
1 - Enable
Default = 55
Default = 47
Default = 43
Default = 31
Default = 27
Value
The following common services will be implemented for the QoS Object.
Service Code
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class Instance Service Name
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
CLASS CODE 0x0097
The DPI Fault Object is implemented in the DeviceNet Main Control Board.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
297
Appendix B CIP Information
The following class attributes are supported:
Attribute ID
1
2
3
4
6
Access Rule
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Name
Class Revision
Number of Instances
Fault Cmd Write
Fault Instance Read
Number of Recorded Faults
Data Type
UINT
UINT
USINT
UINT
UINT
Value
1
4
0 = NOP, 1 = Clear Fault, 2 = Clear Flt Queue
The instance of the Fault Queue Entry containing information about the Fault that tripped the Device.
The number of Faults recorded in the Fault Queue.
Four instances of the DPI Fault Object are supported. The have the following instance attributes:
Value
—
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Attribute ID
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
3
Get
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Access Rule
Get
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Get
Name
Full/All Info
Fault Code
Fault Source
DPI Port Number
Device Object Instance
B Fault Text
Fault Time Stamp
Timer Value
Timer Description
Help Object Instance
Fault Data
Basic Info
Fault Code
Fault Source
DPI Port Number
Device Object Instance
Fault Time Stamp
Timer Value
Timer Description
Help Text
Struct of:
Data Type
UINT
Struct of:
USINT
USINT
BYTE[16]
Struct of:
ULDINT
WORD
USINT
Struct of:
UINT
Struct of:
USINT
USINT
Struct of:
ULINT
WORD
STRING
The following services are supported:
See table below.
0
0x2c
See table below.
See table below.
0
0x2C
See table below.
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Service Code
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class Instance Service Name
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
298
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
CIP Information Appendix B
The table below lists Fault Codes, Fault Text, and Fault Help Strings for DOL and Reversers.
Table 49 - Bulletin 280E/281E
Fault Code
1
2
3
5
13
14
15
16
17
19
21
Fault Text Help Text
Hdw Short Ckt The built in 140M Circuit Breaker has tripped.
Sfw Short Ckt The wire protection algorithm detected an unsafe current surge.
Motor Overload Load has drawn excessive current based on trip class selected.
Phase Loss
—
Indicates missing supply phase. This fault can be disabled.
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Control Pwr Loss Indicates the loss of control power. This fault can be disabled.
Control Pwr Fuse The Control Power Fuse has blown. Remove power and replace fuse.
Input Short Flags a shorted sensor, input device, or input wiring mistake.
Output Fuse
Over Temp
The Output Fuse has blown. Remove all power and replace the fuse.
Indicates the operating temperature has been exceeded.
—
Phase Imbalance Indicates an imbalanced supply voltage.
—
A3 Power Loss Unswitched (A3) Power was lost or dipped below the 12V DC threshold.
27
28
30
31
MCB EEPROM
Base EEPROM
Wrong Base
Wrong CTs
—
—
—
—
This is a major fault which renders the ArmorStart inoperable.
This is a major fault which renders the ArmorStart inoperable.
—
The ArmorStart controller is connected to the wrong base type.
This is a major fault which renders the ArmorStart inoperable.
—
—
—
—
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
299
Appendix B CIP Information
300
Table 49 - Bulletin 280E/281E
Fault Code Fault Text Help Text
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
The table below lists Fault Codes, Fault Text, and Fault Help Strings for VFD units.
Table 50 Bulletin 284E
14
15
12
13
10
11
8
9
Fault Code
1
2
3
6
7
4
5
22
23
20
21
18
19
16
17
Fault Text Help Text
Hdw Short Ckt The built in 140M Circuit Breaker has tripped.
Fault 2
Motor Overload The Load has drawn excessive current.
—
Drive Overload 150% load for 1 min. or 200% load for 3 sec. exceeded
Phase U to Gnd A Phase U to Ground fault detected between drive and motor.
Phase V to Gnd A Phase V to Ground fault detected between drive and motor.
Phase W to Gnd A Phase W to Ground fault detected between drive and motor.
Phase UV Short Excessive current detected between phases U and V.
Phase UW Short Excessive current detected between phases U and W.
Phase VW Short Excessive current detected between phases V and W.
Ground Fault A current path to earth ground at one or more output terminals.
Stall The drive is unable to accelerate the motor.
Control Pwr Loss Indicates the loss of control power. This fault can be disabled.
Control Pwr Fuse The Control Power Fuse has blown. Remove power and replace fuse.
Input Short Flags a shorted sensor, input device, or input wiring mistake.
Output Fuse
Over Temp
The Output Fuse has blown. Remove all power and replace the fuse.
Indicates the operating temperature has been exceeded.
Heatsink OvrTmp The Heatsink temperature exceeds a predefined value.
HW OverCurrent The drive output current has exceeded the hardware limit.
SW OverCurrent Programmed parameter 198 (SW Current Trip) has been exceeded.
A3 Power Loss Unswitched (A3) Power was lost or dipped below the 12V DC threshold.
Internal Comm Communication with the internal Power Flex drive has been lost.
Drive Comm Loss The RS485 port on the internal Power Flex stopped communicating.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
CIP Information Appendix B
Table 50 Bulletin 284E
36
37
34
35
32
33
30
31
Fault Code
24
25
28
29
26
27
42
43
44
40
41
38
39
45
➊
Fault Text Help Text
Power Loss Drive DC Bus Voltage remained below 85% of nominal bus voltage.
Under Voltage DC Bus Voltage fell below the minimum value.
Over Voltage
MCB EEPROM
Base EEPROM
Drive EEPROM
DC Bus Voltage exceeded the maximum value.
This is a major fault which renders the ArmorStart inoperable.
This is a major fault which renders the ArmorStart inoperable.
The drive EEPROM checksum checks have failed.
Wrong Base
Fan RMP
Power Unit
Drive I/O Brd
The ArmorStart controller is connected to the wrong base type.
The internal cooling fan is not running properly.
A major failure has been detected in the drive power section.
A failure has been detected in the drive control and I/O section.
Restart Retries Automatic fault reset and run retries exceeded.
Drive Aux In Flt The drive auxiliary input interlock is open inside the ArmorStart.
Analog Input (PF Fault Code 29)
Drv Param Reset Internal Drive Parameters (Parameters > 100) have been defaulted.
SCV Autotune
Source Brake
Unknown Fault
DB1 Comm
The drive automatic tuning function was either aborted or failed.
The source brake fuse has blown. Remove power and replace fuse.
—
Communication with an internal DB1 board has been lost.
DB1 Fault A fault has been detected with the operation of the Dynamic Brake.
DB Switch Short The Dynamic Brake switch is shorted.
Fault 44
Incompatible COMM
Device
—
The Software revision of the Drive is not compatible with the ArmorStart.
➊ The Fault text for this error is not return by the device, and is only reported as “Fault 45”.
DPI Alarm Object
Attribute ID
1
2
3
74
6
Access Rule
Get
Get
Set
Get
Get
CLASS CODE 0x0098
The following class attributes will be supported:
Name
Class Revision
Number of Instances
Alarm Cmd Write
Alarm Instance Read
Number of Recorded Faults
Data Type
UINT
UINT
USINT
UINT
UINT
Value
1
1
0=NOP, 1=Clear Fault, 2=Clear Flt Queue
The instance of the Fault Queue Entry containing information about the Fault that tripped the Device.
The number of Faults recorded in the Fault Queue.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
301
Appendix B CIP Information
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Attribute ID
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
3
A single instance of the DPI Alarm Object will be supported with the following instance attributes.
Get
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Access Rule
Get
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Get
Name
Full/All Info
Alarm Code
Alarm Source
DPI Port Number
Device Object Instance
Alarm Text
Alarm Time Stamp
Timer Value
Timer Descriptor
Help Object Instance
Alarm Data
Basic Info
Alarm Code
Alarm Source
DPI Port Number
Device Object Instance
Alarm Time Stamp
Timer Value
Timer Descriptor
Help Text
Struct of:
UINT
Struct of:
USINT
USINT
Struct of:
ULINT
WORD
STRING
Struct of:
Data Type
UINT
Struct of:
USINT
USINT
STRING
Struct of:
ULINT
WORD
USINT
—
The following services are supported.
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Value
—
—
—
Service Code
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class Instance Service Name
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
The table below lists Warning Codes, Warning Text, and Warning Help Strings that do not match the fault text.
Fault Code
101
102
Fault Text
IP67/4X Mismatch
DB Terminal
Help Text
The Base enclosure type does not match the Control Module enclosure type.
A warning has been detected with the operation of the Dynamic Brake.
302
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
CIP Information Appendix B
Interface Object
CLASS CODE 0x00B4
The following class attribute are supported.
Attribute ID
1
Access Rule
Get
Name
Revision
Data Type
UINT
Value
1 for DOL
2 for Inverters
A single instance (Instance 1) of the Interface Object is supported with the following instance attributes.
Attribute ID Access Rule
7 Get/Set
8 Get/Set
9
10
13
15
16
17
19
23
24
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get
Get
Name
Prod Assy Word 0
Prod Assy Word 1
Prod Assy Word 2
Prod Assy Word 3
Starter COS Mask
Autobaud Enable
Consumed Assy
Produced Assy
Set To Defaults
I/O Produced Size
I/O Consumed Size
50 Get/Set PNB COS Mask
Data Type
USINT (rev 1)
UINT (rev 2)
USINT (rev 1)
UINT (rev 2)
USINT (rev 1)
UINT (rev 2)
USINT (rev 1)
UINT (rev 2)
WORD
BOOL
USINT
USINT
BOOL
—
USINT
WORD
Min/Max
—
—
Default
1
5
Description
Defines Word 0 of Assy 120
Defines Word 1 of Assy 120
— 6 Defines Word 2 of Assy 120
—
0 - 0xFFFF
0 - 1
0 to 185
100 to 187
0 to 1
0 t0 20
0 to 16
0 to 0x00FF
7 Defines Word 3 of Assy 120
0xFFFF
1
160 (drive 164)
161 (drive 165)
0
—
—
—
0
Change of state mask for starter bits
1= enabled, 0 = disabled
3, 160, 162, 182, 187 (also for drives 164, 166, 170 and
188)
52, 120, 161, 163, 181…187 (also for drives 165, 167 and 171) 189, 190
0 = No action, 1 = Reset
—
—
Change of state mask for PNBs
The following common services are implemented for the Interface Object.
Service Code
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class Instance Service Name
No
No
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
303
Appendix B CIP Information
TCP/IP Interface Object
Attribute ID
1
Access Rule
Get
Attribute ID
1
2
3
Access Rule
Get
Get
Get/Set
4 Get
5
6
8
9
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
CLASS CODE 0x00F5
The following class attributes will be supported.
Name
Revision
Data Type
UINT
Value
1
One instance of the TCP/IP Interface Object will be supported with the following instance attributes.
Name
Status
Configuration Capability
Configuration Control
Physical Link Object
Interface Configuration
Host Name
TTL Value
Multicast Config
DWORD
DWORD
Data Type
DWORD
Struct of
UINT
Padded EPATH
Struct of
UDINT
UDINT
UDINT
UDINT
UDINT
STRING
STRING
USINT
Struct of
USINT
USINT
UINT
UDINT
0x00000014
0 = Configuration from NVS
2 = Configuration from DHCP
Value
—
2 words
NULL Enet Link Object Instance
IP Address
Network Mask
Gateway Address
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
Default Domain Name for not fully qualified host names
—
Time to Live value for EtherNet/IP multicast packets
Allocation Control
Reserved
Number of multicast addresses to allocate (1…4)
Multicast starting address.
The following common services will be implemented for the TCP/IP Interface
Object.
Service Code
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class Instance Service Name
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_All
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
304
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
CIP Information Appendix B
Ethernet Link Object
CLASS CODE 0x00F6
The following class attributes will be supported.
Attribute ID
1
2
3
Access Rule
Get
Get
Get
Name
Revision
Max Instance
Number of Instances
Data Type
UINT
UINT
UINT
Value
3
2
2
One instance of the Ethernet Link Object will be supported with the following instance attributes.
Attribute ID
1
2
3
Access Rule
Get
Get
Get
Name
Interface Speed
Interface Flags
Physical Address
Data Type
UDINT
DWORD
ARRAY of 6 USINTs
Struct of:
In Octets
In Ucast packets
In NUcast packets
In Discards
In Errors
In Unknown Protos
Out Octets
Out Ucast packets
Out NUcast packets
Out Discards
Out Errors
Struct of:
Alignment Errors
FCS Errors
Single Collisions
SQE Test Errors
Deferred Transmits
Late Collisions
Excessive Collisions
MAC Transmit Errors
Carrier Sense Errors
Frame Too Long
MAC Receive Errors
Struct of:
Control Bits
Forced Interface Speed
7 Get Interface USINT
10 or 100 Mbit/Sec
See ENet/IP Spec
MAC Address
8 Get Interface USINT
9 Get/Set Admin USINT
10 Get Interface
Instance 1: Port 1
SHORT_STRING
Instance 2: Port 2
Value
—
—
—
—
—
—
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
305
Appendix B CIP Information
The following common services will be implemented for the Ethernet Link
Object.
Service Code
0x01
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class Instance Service Name
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_All
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
306
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Appendix
C
Using DeviceLogix
DeviceLogix is a stand-alone Boolean program that resides within the
ArmorStart®. The program is embedded in the product software so that there is no additional module required to use this technology. To program DeviceLogix you will need the latest AOP for ArmorStart EtherNet/IP for Control Logix or other Logix family PLCs.
In addition to the actual programming, DeviceLogix can be configured to operate under specific situations. It is important to note that the DeviceLogix program will only run if the logic has been enabled. This can be done within the
“Logic Editor.” The operation configuration is accomplished by setting the
“Network Override” and “Communication Override” parameters. The following information describes the varying levels of operation:
• If both overrides are disabled and the logic is enabled, the ONLY time
DeviceLogix will run is if there is an active I/O connection with a master, i.e. the master is in Run mode. At all other times, DeviceLogix will be running the logic, but will NOT control the state of the outputs.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
307
Appendix C Using DeviceLogix
• If the Network Override is enabled and the logic is enabled then
DeviceLogix controls the state of the outputs when the PLC is in Run mode and if a network fault such as Duplicate MAC ID or module Bus off condition occurs.
• If the Communications Override is enabled and the logic is enabled, the device does not need any I/O connection to run the logic. As long as there is control power and a DeviceNet power source connected to the device, the logic will control the state of the outputs.
DeviceLogix Programming
DeviceLogix has many applications and the implementation is typically only limited to the imagination of the programmer. Keep in mind that the application of DeviceLogix is only designed to handle simple logic routines.
DeviceLogix is programmed using simple Boolean math operators such as AND,
OR, NOT, timers, counters, and latches. Decision making is done by combining these Boolean operations with any of the available I/O. The inputs and outputs used to interface with the logic can come from the network or from the device hardware. Hardware I/O is the physical Inputs and Outputs located on the device such as push buttons and pilot lights that are connected to the ArmorStart.
There are many reasons to use the DeviceLogix functionality, but some of the most common are listed below:
• Increased system reliability
• Fast update times (1 - 2 ms possible)
• Improved diagnostics and reduced troubleshooting
• Operation independent of PLC or network status
• Continue to run process in the event of network interruptions
• Critical operations can be safely shutdown through local logic
DeviceLogix Programming
Example
The following example will show how to program a simple logic routine to interface the ArmorStart EtherNet I/P with a remote hard-wired startstop station. In this case the I/O is wired as shown in
.
Table 51 - Hardware Bit Assignments and Description for the ArmorStart
Bit
In 0
In 1
In 2
In 3
Input Table
Description
Start Button
Stop Button
N/A
N/A
Bit
Run Forward
N/A
—
—
Output Table
Description
Contactor Coil
N/A
—
—
308
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Using DeviceLogix Appendix C
IMPORTANT
Before programming logic, it is important to decide on the conditions under which the logic will run. As defined earlier, the conditions can be defined by setting parameter 8
(Network Override) and parameter 9 (Comm. Override) to the desired value.
1.
While in the AOP, click on the DeviceLogix tab. Click the Launch Editor button.
2.
Select Function Block or Ladder editor. Note that once selected you are not able to switch back without recreating the logic.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
309
Appendix C Using DeviceLogix
3.
Refer to the tool bar at the top of the DeviceLogix editor window, click the
Move/Logical group and select the RSTD (Latch Reset). Move it to the work space and click to drop it.
4.
From the toolbar, Click on the “Bit Input” button and select In 0 from the
Hardware Boolean tree. This is the remote start button based on the example I/O table.
310
5.
Place the input to the left of the reset function. To drop the input on the page, left click on the desired position.
6.
Place the mouse cursor over the tip of In 0. The tip will turn green. Click on the tip when it turns green.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Using DeviceLogix Appendix C
7.
Move the mouse cursor toward the Set input of the reset function. A line will follow the cursor. When a connection can be made, the tip of the RSL function will also turn green. Click the on Input and the line will be drawn from In 0 to the Set Input of the reset function.
Note:
If this was not a valid connection, one of the pin tips would have turned red rather than green. Left double clicking on the unused portion of the grid or pressing the “Esc” key at any time will cancel the connection process.
8.
From the toolbar, Click on the “Bit Input” button and select In 1 from the pull-down menu. This is the remote stop button based on the example I/O table.
9.
Place the input to the left of the reset function.
10.
Connect the input to the reset input of the reset function.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
311
Appendix C Using DeviceLogix
11.
From the toolbar, Click on the “Bit Output” button and select “Run
Forward”
from the hardware boolean tree. Run Forward is the relay controlling the coil of the contactor.
12.
Move the cursor into the grid and place the Output to the right of the reset function block.
13.
Connect the output of the reset function block to Run Forward.
14.
Click on the “Verify” button located in the toolbar or select “Logic Verify” from the “Tools” pull-down menu.
312
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Using DeviceLogix Appendix C
15.
Click file close. The program is not saved automatically. Fill in the information on following window and accept changes. This saves the program but has not been downloaded in the product.
16.
The last step is to enable the logic via the drop down.
17.
Click OK. To download the DeviceLogix program you must go on-line with the PLC and allow the download. Ensure that the PLC is in the
Program position. If in any other position, the download will not occur and an error will be generated.
18.
The ArmorStart is now programmed and the logic is Active.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
313
Appendix C Using DeviceLogix
Import and Export
The ArmorStart EtherNet/IP AOP provides users an import or export function.
The export function allows the DeviceLogix program to be saved to a file. This file can then be imported into a similar product of same function regardless of horsepower. Importing of DeviceLogix between unlike products is not allowed, e.g. Bulletin 284E and Bulletin 280E.
Bulletin 284 - VFD Preset
Speed Example
DeviceLogix can be used to select one of multiple preset frequencies cooperatively with the PLC or independently based on user input. This can be done using the four digit inputs or the frequency control bits in DeviceLogix.
The digital inputs provide the user the most flexibility, but can be more complex to configure. If a preset speed is needed, the simpler approach is to use frequency control found in the produced network bits of DeviceLogix. If you prefer not to apply DeviceLogix for preset speeds, then implement the digit inputs to select preset speed via Instance 166 found in Chapter 5. The following example will demonstrate the use of frequency control bits in DeviceLogix
Frequency control (Freq Cntl) bits allow a maximum of 4 Preset Speeds, each preset has a predefined accel or decel reference. If more are required then digital inputs must be configured and properly used. The example will focus on
Frequency Control 2,1,0 in the Produced Network Bit
are other capabilities shown in the table that are not reviewed in this example.
below shows all of the available network outputs supported by
Bulletin 284.Referring to Table 52 the preset frequencies are defined in
parameter 170,171,172 and 173 of Bulletin 284. Also note the truth table that selects each of those frequencies. For example if Freq Cntl bit 2=1, 1=1, and 0=0 then the controller frequency is based on Parameter 172 (Preset Freq 2).
314
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Using DeviceLogix Appendix C
Figure 100 - Bulletin 284E Produced Network Bits in DeviceLogix Output
1
1
Freq Ctrl 2
0
0
1
0
0
Accel2
0
0
1
1
Decel 2
0
0
1
1
1
Table 52 -
Refer to table 22 - Parameters 170…177 Preset Freq Options for predefined accel and decel
0
1
Freq Ctrl 1
0
1
0
0
1
Accel1
0
1
0
1
Decel 1
0
1
0
1
1
Freq Ctrl 0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Description
No Command
Accel 1 Enable
Accel 2 Enable
Hold Accel Rate Selected
No Command
Decel 1 Enable
Decel 2 Enable
Hold Decel Rate Selected
No Command
Freq Source = P136 (Start Source)
Freq Source = P169 (Internal Freq)
Freq Source = Comms
P170 (Preset Freq 0) (Accel/Decel 1)
P171 (Preset Freq 1) (Accel/Decel 1)
P172 (Preset Freq 2) (Accel/Decel 2)
P173 (Preset Freq 3) (Accel/Decel 2)
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
315
Appendix C Using DeviceLogix
Using parameters 170-173, set them to 0,10,30, and 60 respectively.
shows the preset frequencies 0-3.
Figure 101 - P170-173 Preset Frequency Settings
In this example DeviceLogix will receive data from the PLC program. The communication and network overrides are disabled as shown below. Refer to Appendix C for details when using the override function.
shows the DeviceLogix program. This allows the user to select one of three predefined frequencies based on two network bits.
316
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Figure 102 - DeviceLogix Program
Using DeviceLogix Appendix C
Once you exit the DeviceLogix editor, ensure that the logic is “Enabled” otherwise the preset frequency control will not operate. Refer to
Figure 103 -
This simple PLC program is used to select one of three preset speeds, speed 1, 2, or 3. For the purpose of this example speed 1, 2, & 3 are BOOL bits but they can be any valid input. Notice that there is an interlock for speed 1 and speed 2 to ensure they do not trigger at the same time. This would accidently cause speed 3 to run.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
317
Appendix C Using DeviceLogix
Download the finished program file to the PLC. In order for the parameters and
DeviceLogix program to update in the device, ensure the PLC is in program mode, and open the AOP for the Bulletin 284E.
Select the Parameters and DeviceLogic tab. This will force a correlation between the program file and the device. If a difference exists either upload from the device or download from the project to the device. In this example you will want to download.
is an example of the parameter correlation when a difference occurs between the project and the device.
Figure 104 -
is an example of the DeviceLogix correlation when a difference occurs between the project and the device.
318
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Figure 105 - DeviceLogix Correlation
Using DeviceLogix Appendix C
Please note the caution statement prior to download.
After the DeviceLogix correlation is successful the following window will display.
After both correlations are complete place the PLC in run mode and test the program by exercising speed 1, 2, and 3 bits.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
319
Appendix C Using DeviceLogix
IMPORTANT
To download a new DeviceLogix program, connect to the PLC and stay in program mode. There can be no active I/O connections to the device or the download will fail.
Open the AOP and select the DeviceLogix tab to start the correlation process. If a difference exists then an upload or download is necessary.
Operation
When bit Speed_1 is ON then the Bulletin 284E will accelerate to 10 Hz or decelerate using accel/decel Time 2
When bit Speed_2 is ON then the Bulletin 284E will accelerate to 30 Hz or decelerate using accel/decel Time 2
DeviceLogix Ladder Editor
Example
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP supports DeviceLogix in a ladder programming environment. When using the ladder editor additional explanation is needed with regard to naming conventions. Fault bits such as “Overload Trip” are tagged
“FB0, FB1, FB2, etc. Status bits such as “Running Fwd” are tagged SB0, SB1, SB2, etc. Outputs such as “Run Reverse” are tagged DOP0, DOP1 etc. Produced
Network Bits such as “Fault Reset” are tagged PNB0, PNB1, etc.
This document will help users interpret the naming conventions.
ArmorStart 280 and 281 Status Bits
The screen capture below shows how to choose status bits in the ladder editor.
320
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Using DeviceLogix Appendix C
The following table contains the status bit definitions for ArmorStart 280D and
281D units:
Status Bit Declaration
1 = Running Fwd
2 = Running Rev
3 = Ready
4 = Net Ctl Status
5 = At Reference
6 = Keypad Hand
7 = HOA Status
8 = 140M On
9 = Explicit Msg Cnxn Exists
10 = IO Cnxn Exists
11 = Explicit Cnxn Fault
12 = IO Cnxn Fault
13 = IO Cnxn Idle
14 = Current Flowing
15 = Keypad Hand Direction
Bulletin 280 and 281 ArmorStart Fault Bits
The screen capture below shows how to choose fault bits in the ladder editor.
The following table contains the fault bit definitions for Bulletin 280D and
281D ArmorStart units:
Fault Bit Declaration
0 = Short Circuit
1 = Overload
2 = Phase Loss
3 = Control Power
4 = IO Fault
5 = Over Temp
6 = Phase Imbalance
7 = DNet Power Loss
9 = HW Flt
10 = PL Warning
11 = CP Warning
12 = IO Warning
13 = Phase Imbal Warn
14 = DN Warning
15 = HW Warning
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
321
Appendix C Using DeviceLogix
Bulletin 280 and 281 ArmorStart Outputs
The screen capture below shows how to choose outputs in the ladder editor.
322
The Bulletin 280 and 281 have the following bit definitions:
0 = Run Forward
1 = Run Reverse
2 = User Output A
3 = User Output B
Bulletin 280 and 281 ArmorStart Produced Network Bits
The screen capture below shows how to choose Produced Network Bits in the ladder editor.
The following table contains the produced network bit definitions for Bulletin
280 and 281 ArmorStart units
Produce Network bit declaration
0 = Net Output 0
1 = Net Output 1
2 = Net Output 2
3 = Net Output 3
4 = Net Output 4
5 = Net Output 5
6 = Net Output 6
7 = Net Output 7
8 = Net Output 8
9 = Net Output 9
10 = Net Output 10
11 = Net Output 11
12 = Net Output 12
13 = Net Output 13
14 = Net Output 14
15 = Fault Reset
16 = Motion Disable
17 = Keypad Disable
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Using DeviceLogix Appendix C
Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Status Bits
The following table contains the status bit definitions for ArmorStart 284
Status bit declaration
1 = Warning
2 = Running Fwd
3 = Running Rev
4 = Ready
5 = Net Ctl Status
6 = Net Ref Status
7 = At Reference
8 = Drive Opto 1
9 = Drive Opto 2
10 = Keypad Jog
11= Keypad Hand
12 = HOA Status
13 = 140M On
14 = Contactor 1
15 = Contactor 2
16 = Explicit Msg Cnxn Exists
17 = IO Cnxn Exists
18 = Explicit Cnxn Fault
19 = IO Cnxn Fau
20 = IO Cnxn Idle
21 = Keypad Hand Direction
Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Fault Bits
The screen capture below shows how to choose Fault Bits in the ladder editor.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
323
Appendix C Using DeviceLogix
The following table contains the fault bit definitions for ArmorStart 284
Fault bit declaration
0 = Short Circuit
1 = Overload
2 = Phase Short
3 = Ground Fault
4 = Stall
5 = Control Power
6 = IO Fault
7 = Over Temp
8 = Phase Over Current
9 = DNet Power Loss
10 = Internal Comm
11 = DC Bus Fault
13 = HW Flt
14 = Reset Retries
15 = Misc. Fault
16 = CP Warning
17 = IO Warning
18 = DN Warning
19 = HW Warning
Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Outputs
The screen capture below shows how to choose outputs in the ladder editor.
324
The Bulletin 284 bit definitions:
0 = Run Forward
1 = Run Reverse (Reserved)
2 = User Output A
3 = User Output B
4 = Drive Digital In 1
5 = Drive Digital In 2
6 = Drive Digital In 3
7 = Drive Digital In 4
8 = Jog Forward
9 = Jog Reverse
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Using DeviceLogix Appendix C
Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Produced Network Bits
The screen capture below shows how to choose Produced Network Bits in the ladder editor.
0
The following table contains the produced network bit definitions for Bulletin
284 ArmorStart units
Produce network bit declaration
0 = Net Output 0
1 = Net Output 1
2 = Net Output 2
3 = Net Output 3
4 = Net Output 4
5 = Net Output 5
6 = Net Output 6
7 = Net Output 7
8 = Net Output 8
9 = Net Output 9
10 = Net Output 10
11 = Net Output 11
12 = Net Output 12
13 = Net Output 13
14 = Net Output 14
15 = Fault Reset
16 = Accel 1
17 = Accel 2
18 = Decel 1
19 = Decel 2
20 = Freq Select 1
21 = Freq Select 2
22 = Freq Select 3
23 = Motion Disable
24 = Keypad Disable
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
325
Appendix C Using DeviceLogix
Notes:
326
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
PID Loop
Appendix
D
PID Setup
The Bulletin 284E ArmorStart® Distributed Motor with sensorless vector control has a built-in PID (proportional, integral, differential) control loop. The PID loop is used to maintain a process feedback (such as pressure, flow, or tension) at a desired set point. The PID loop works by subtracting the PID feedback from a reference and generating an error value. The PID loop reacts to the error, based on the PID Gains, and outputs a frequency to try to reduce the error value to 0.
To enable the PID loop, Parameter 232 (PID Ref Sel) must be set to an option other than Option 0 (PID Disabled).
Exclusive Control and Trim Control are two basic configurations where the PID loop may be used.
Exclusive Control
In Exclusive Control, the Speed Reference becomes 0, and the PID Output becomes the entire Freq Command. Exclusive Control is used when
Parameter 232 (PID Ref Sel) is set to Option 1, 2, 3, or 4. This configuration does not require a master reference, only a desired set point, such as a flow rate for a pump.
PID Ref
PID Fdbk
–
+
PID
Error
PID Loop
PID Prop Gain
PID Integ Time
+
+
+
PID Diff Rate
PID
Output
PID Enabled
Accel/Decel
Ramp
Freq
Command
Example
• In a pumping application, the PID Reference equals the Desired System
Pressure set point.
• The Pressure Transducer signal provides PID Feedback to the drive.
Fluctuations in actual system pressure, due to changes in flow, result in a
PID Error value.
• The drive output frequency increases or decreases to vary motor shaft speed to correct for the PID Error value.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
327
Appendix D PID Setup
328
• The Desired System Pressure set point is maintained as valves in the system are opened and closed causing changes in flow.
• When the PID Control Loop is disabled, the Commanded Speed is the
Ramped Speed Reference.
Pump
PID Reference =
Desired System Pressure
PID Feedback =
Pressure Transducer Signal
Trim Control
In Trim Control, the PID Output is added to the Speed Reference. In Trim mode, the output of the PID loop bypasses the accel/decel ramp as shown. Trim
Control is used when Parameter 232 (PID Ref Sel) is set to Option 5, 6, 7, or 8.
PID Ref
PID Fdbk
–
+
PID
Error
PID Loop
PID Prop Gain
PID Integ Time
+
+
+
PID Diff Rate
PID
Output
PID Enabled
Speed Ref
Accel/Decel
Ramp
+
+
Output
Freq
Example
• In a winder application, the PID Reference equals the Equilibrium set point.
• The Dancer Pot signal provides PID Feedback to the drive. Fluctuations in tension result in a PID Error value.
• The Master Speed Reference sets the wind/unwind speed.
• As tension increases or decreases during winding, the Speed Reference is trimmed to compensate. Tension is maintained near the Equilibrium set point.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
PID Setup Appendix D
PID Reference =
Equilibrium Set Point
0 Volts
PID Feedback =
Dancer Pot Signal
10 Volts
Speed Reference
PID Reference and Feedback
Parameter 232 (PID Ref Sel) is used to enable/disable the PID mode. Select
Option 0 (PID Disabled) to disable or Option 1 to select the source of the PID
Reference. If Parameter 232 (PID Ref Sel) is not set to 0 (PID Disabled), the PID can still be disabled by selecting the programmable Digital Input options
(Parameters 151…154) such as Jog, Local, or PID Disable.
Options
0
PID Disabled
1
PID Setpoint
4
Comm Port
5
Setpnt, Trim
8
Comm, Trim
Description
Disables the PID loop (default setting)
Selects Exclusive Control. Parameter 237 (PID Setpoint) will be used to set the value of the PID
Reference
Selects Exclusive Control. The reference word from a communication network DeviceNet
™ becomes the PID Reference. The value sent over the network is scaled so that Parameter 135
(Maximum Freq) x 10 = 100% reference. For example, with (Maximum Freq) = 60 Hz, a value of 600 sent over the network would represent 100% reference.
Selects Trim Control. Parameter 237 (PID Setpoint) will be used to set the value of the PID
Reference.
Selects Trim Control. The reference word from a communication network DeviceNet becomes the PID Reference. The value sent over the network is scaled so that Parameter 135
(Maximum Freq) x 10 = 100% reference. For example, with (Maximum Freq) = 60 Hz, a value of 600 sent over the network would represent 100% reference.
Parameter 233 (PID Feedback Sel) is used to select the source of the PID feedback.
Option
2
Comm Port
Description
The Consumed Assembly (Instance 164 – Default Consumed Inverter Type Distributed Motor
Controller) from a communication network which becomes the PID Feedback. The value sent over the network is scaled so that Parameter 135 (Maximum Freq) x 10 = 100% Feedback. For example, with (Maximum Freq) = 60 Hz, a value of 600 sent over the network would represent 100% Feedback.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
329
Appendix D PID Setup
330
PID Deadband
Parameter 238 (PID Deadband) is used to set a range, in percent, of the PID
Reference that the drive will ignore.
Example
• (PID Deadband) is set to 5.0
• The PID Reference is 25.0%
• The PID Regulator will not act on a PID Error that falls between 20.0 and
30.0%
PID Preload
The value set in Parameter 239 (PID Preload), in Hertz, will be pre-loaded into the integral component of the PID at any start or enable. This will cause the drive’s frequency command to initially jump to that preload frequency, and the
PID loop starts regulating from there.
PID Enabled
PID Pre-load Value
PID Output
Freq Cmd
PID Pre-load Value > 0
PID Limits
Parameter 230 (PID Trim Hi) and Parameter 231 (PID Trim Lo) are used to limit the PID output and are only used in trim mode. (PID Trim Hi) sets the maximum frequency for the PID output in trim mode. (PID Trim Lo) sets the reverse frequency limit for the PID output in trim mode. Note that when the
PID reaches the Hi or Lo limit, the PID regulator stops integrating so that windup does not occur.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
PID Setup Appendix D
PID Gains
The proportional, integral, and differential gains make up the PID regulator.
• Parameter 234 (PID Prop Gain)
The proportional gain (unitless) affects how the regulator reacts to the magnitude of the error. The proportional component of the PID regulator outputs a speed command proportional to the PID error. For example, a proportional gain of 1 would output 100% of maximum frequency when the PID error is 100% of the analog input range. A larger value for (PID
Prop Gain) makes the proportional component more responsive, and a smaller value makes it less responsive. Setting (PID Prop Gain) to 0.00 disables the proportional component of the PID loop.
• Parameter 235 (PID Integ Time)
The integral gain (units of seconds) affects how the regulator reacts to error over time and is used to get rid of steady state error. For example, with an integral gain of 2 seconds, the output of the integral gain component would integrate up to 100% of maximum frequency when the PID error is
100% for 2 seconds. A larger value for (PID Integ Time) makes the integral component less responsive, and a smaller value makes it more responsive.
Setting (PID Integ Time) to 0 disables the integral component of the PID loop.
• Parameter 236 (PID Diff Rate)
The Differential gain (units of 1/seconds) affects the rate of change of the
PID output. The differential gain is multiplied by the difference between the previous error and current error. Thus, with a large error the D has a large effect and with a small error the D has less of an effect. This parameter is scaled so that when it is set to 1.00, the process response is
0.1% of (Maximum Freq) when the process error is changing at 1%/ second. A larger value for (PID Diff Rate) makes the differential term have more of an effect and a small value makes it have less of an effect. In many applications, the D gain is not needed. Setting (PID Diff Rate) to 0.00
(factory default) disables the differential component of the PID loop.
Guidelines for Adjusting the PID Gains
1.
Adjust the proportional gain. During this step it may be desirable to disable the integral gain and differential gain by setting them to 0. After a step change in the PID Feedback:
• If the response is too slow increase Parameter 234 (PID Prop Gain).
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
331
Appendix D PID Setup
332
• If the response is too quick and/or unstable (see Figure 106), decrease
Parameter 234 (PID Prop Gain).
• Typically, Parameter 234 (PID Prop Gain) is set to some value below the point where the PID begins to go unstable.
2.
Adjust the integral gain (leave the proportional gain set as in Step 1). After
a step change in the PID Feedback:
• If the response is too slow (see Figure 107), or the PID Feedback does
not become equal to the PID Reference, decrease Parameter 235 (PID
Integ Time).
• If there is a lot of oscillation in the PID Feedback before settling out
(see Figure 108), increase Parameter 235 (PID Integ Time).
3.
At this point, the differential gain may not be needed. However, if after determining the values for Parameter 234 (PID Prop Gain) and Parameter
235 (PID Integ Time):
• Response is still slow after a step change, increase Parameter 236 (PID
Diff Rate).
• Response is still unstable, decrease Parameter 236 (PID Diff Rate).
The following figures show some typical responses of the PID loop at different points during adjustment of the PID Gains.
Figure 106 - Response is Unstable
PID Reference
PID Feedback
Time
Figure 107 - Slow Response – Over-Damped
PID Reference
PID Feedback
Time
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Figure 108 - Oscillation – Under-Damped
PID Reference
PID Feedback
Time
Figure 109 - Good Response – Critically Damped
PID Reference
PID Feedback
Time
PID Setup Appendix D
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
333
Appendix D PID Setup
Notes:
334
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Appendix
E
StepLogic, Basic Logic and Timer/
Counter Functions
Four Bulletin 284E ArmorStart® logic functions provide the capability to program simple logic functions without a separate controller.
• StepLogic Function
Steps through up to eight preset speeds based on programmed logic.
Programmed logic can include conditions that need to be met from digital inputs programmed as Logic In1 and Logic In2 before stepping from one preset speed to the next. A timer is available for each of the eight steps and is used to program a time delay before stepping from one preset speed to the next. The status of a digital output can also be controlled based on the step being executed.
• Basic Logic Function
Up to two digital inputs can be programmed as Logic In1 and/or Logic
In2. A digital output can be programmed to change state based on the condition of one or both inputs based on basic logic functions such as
AND, OR, NOR. The basic logic functions can be used with or without
StepLogic.
• Timer Function
A digital input can be programmed for Timer Start. A digital output can be programmed as a Timer Out with an output level programmed to the desired time. When the timer reaches the time programmed into the output level the output will change state. The timer can be reset via a digital input programmed as Reset Timer.
• Counter Function
A digital input can be programmed for Counter In. A digital output can be programmed as Counter Out with an output level programmed to the desired number of counts. When the counter reaches the count programmed into the output level the output will change state. The counter can be reset via a digital input programmed as Reset Counter.
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
335
Appendix E StepLogic, Basic Logic and Timer/ Counter Functions
StepLogic Using Timed Steps
To activate this function, set Parameter 138 (Speed Reference) to Option 6
(StpLogic). Three parameters are used to configure the logic, speed reference, and time for each step.
• Logic is defined using Parameters 240…247 (StpLogic x)
• Preset Speeds are set with Parameters 170…177 (Preset Freq x)
• Time of operation for each step is set with Parameters 250…257 (StpLogic
Time x)
The direction of motor rotation can be forward or reverse.
Figure 110 - Using Timed Steps
Step 0 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7
Forward
0
Reverse
Time
StepLogic Sequence
• Sequence begins with a valid start command
• A normal sequence begins with Step 0 and transitions to the next step when the corresponding StepLogic time has expired
• Step 7 is followed by Step 0
• Sequence repeats until a stop is issued or a fault condition occurs
StepLogic Using Basic Logic
Functions
Digital input and digital output parameters can be configured to use logic to transition to the next step. Logic In1 and Logic In2 are defined by programming
Parameters 151…154 (Digital In x Sel) to Option 23 (Logic In1) or Option 24
(Logic In2).
336
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
StepLogic, Basic Logic and Timer/ Counter Functions Appendix E
Example
• Run at Step 0
• Transition to Step 1 when Logic In1 is true
Logic senses the edge of Logic In1 when it transitions from OFF to ON.
Logic In1 is not required to remain ON.
• Transition to Step 2 when both Logic In1 and Logic In2 are true
The drive senses the level of both Logic In1 and Logic In2 and transitions to Step 2 when both are ON.
• Transition to Step 3 when Logic In2 returns to a false or OFF state
Inputs are not required to remain in the On condition except under the logic conditions used for the transition from Step 2 to Step 3.
Figure 111 - Logic Transitioning to the Next Step
Start Step 0 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3
Frequency
Logic In1
Logic In2
Time
The step time value and the basic logic may be used together to satisfy machine conditions. For instance, the step may need to run for a minimum time period and then use the basic logic to trigger a transition to the next step.
Figure 112 - Step Running for a Minimum Time Period
Start Step 0 Step 1
Frequency
Logic In1
Logic In2
Time
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
337
Appendix E StepLogic, Basic Logic and Timer/ Counter Functions
Timer Function
Digital inputs and outputs control the timer function and are configured with
Parameters 151…154 (Digital In x Sel) set to Option 18 (Timer Start) and
Option 20 (Reset Timer).
Digital outputs (relay) define a preset level and indicate when the level is reached.
Level Parameter 156 (Relay Out Level) is used to set the desired time in seconds.
Parameter 155 (Relay Out Sel) is set to Option 16 (Timer Out) and causes the output to change state when the preset level is reached.
Counter Function
Digital inputs and outputs control the counter function and are configured with
Parameters 151…154 (Digital In x Sel) set to Option 19 (Counter In) and
Option 21 (Reset Counter).
Digital outputs (relay) define a preset level and indicate when the level is reached.
Level Parameters 156 (Relay Out Level) is used to set the desired count value.
Parameter 155 (Relay Out Sel) is set to Option 17 (Counter Out) which causes the output to change state when the level is reached.
Example
• A photo eye is used to count packages on a conveyor line
• An accumulator holds the packages until five are collected
• A diverter arm redirects the group of five packages to a bundling area
• The diverter arm returns to its original position and triggers a limit switch that resets the counter
• parameters are set to the following options:
– Parameter 151 (Digital In 1 Sel) set to Option 19 to select (Counter In)
– Parameter 152 (Digital In 2 Sel) set to Option 21 to select (Reset
Counter)
– Parameter 155 (Relay Out Sel) set to Option 17 to select (Counter
Out)
– Parameter 156 (Relay Out Level) set to 5.0 (counts)
338
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
StepLogic Parameters
StepLogic, Basic Logic and Timer/ Counter Functions Appendix E
Digits 0…3 for each (StpLogic x) parameter must be programmed according to the desired profile.
Digit 0
1
Digit 1
F
Digit 2
0
Digit 3
0 d
E b
C
F
9
A
7
8
5
6
3
4
Setting
0
1
2
Table 53 - Digit 0 and Digit 1 Settings
Description
Skip Step (jump immediately).
Step based on the time programmed in the respective (StpLogic Time x) parameter.
Step if Logic In1 is active (logically true).
Step if Logic In2 is active (logically true).
Step if Logic In1 is not active (logically false).
Step if Logic In2 is not active (logically false).
Step if either Logic In1 or Logic In2 is active (logically true).
Step if both Logic In1 and Logic In2 is active (logically true).
Step if neither Logic In1 or Logic In2 is active (logically true).
Step if Logic In1 is active (logically true) and Logic In2 is not active (logically false).
Step if Logic In2 is active (logically true) and Logic In1 is not active (logically false).
Step after (StpLogic Time x) and Logic In1 is active (logically true).
Step after (StpLogic Time x) and Logic In2 is active (logically true).
Step after (StpLogic Time x) and Logic In1 is not active (logically false).
Step after (StpLogic Time x) and Logic In2 is not active (logically false).
Do not step OR no jump to, so use Digit 0 logic.
Table 54 - Digit 2 Settings
5
6
3
4
Setting
0
1
2
9
A
7
8
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Logic
Jump to Step 0
Jump to Step 1
Jump to Step 2
Jump to Step 3
Jump to Step 4
Jump to Step 5
Jump to Step 6
Jump to Step 7
End Program (Normal Stop)
End Program (Coast to Stop)
End Program and Fault (F2)
AND
NOR
XOR
XOR
TIMED AND
TIMED AND
TIMED OR
TIMED OR
IGNORE
TRUE
FALSE
FALSE
OR
Logic
SKIP
TIMED
TRUE
339
Appendix E StepLogic, Basic Logic and Timer/ Counter Functions
5
6
3
4
Setting
0
1
2
9
A
7
8 b
Table 55 - Digit 3 Settings
Accel/Decel
Parameters Used
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
StepLogic
Output State
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Commanded Direction
FWD
REV
No Output
FWD
REV
No Output
FWD
REV
No Output
FWD
REV
No Output
340
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Appendix
F
Renewal Parts
Bulletin 280E/281E
Control Module Renewal Part Product Selection
Figure 113 - Bulletin 280E/281E Control Module Renewal Part Catalog Structure
Bulletin Number
Bulletin 280 Full Voltage Starter
Bulletin 281 Reversing Starter
Communications
E EtherNet/IP
280 E
–
F 12Z
–
N B
–
R
–
Option 1
Option 1
3 Hand-Off-Auto Selector Keypad
3FR Hand-Off-Auto Selector Keypad
Enclosure Type
F Type 4 (IP67)
Contactor Size/Control Voltage
24V DC
12Z
23Z
Control Module
N Control Module Only
Motor Connection
R Round
Overload Selection
Current Range
A 0.24…1.2
B 0.5…2.5 A
C 1.1…5.5 A
D 3.2…16 A
Current Rating
(A)
0.24…1.2
0.5…2.5
1.1…5.5
3.2…16
230V AC
50 Hz
0.18
0.37
1.1
4
kW
400V AC
50 Hz
0.37
0.75
2.2
7.5
Table 56 - Full Voltage Starters – IP67/NEMA Type 4
Hp
200V AC
60 Hz
—
0.5
1
3
230V AC
60 Hz
—
0.5
1
5
460V AC
60 Hz
0.5
1
3
10
575V AC
60 Hz
0.5
1.5
3
10
Cat. No.
24V DC
280E-F12Z-NA-R
280E-F12Z-NB-R
280E-F12Z-NC-R
280E-F23Z-ND-R
Current Rating
(A)
0.24…1.2
0.5…2.5
1.1…5.5
3.2…16
230V AC
50 Hz
0.18
0.37
1.1
4
kW
400V AC
50 Hz
0.37
0.75
2.2
7.5
Table 57 - Reversing Starters – IP67/NEMA Type 4
Hp
200V AC
60 Hz
1
3
—
0.5
230V AC
60 Hz
1
5
—
0.5
460V AC
60 Hz
0.5
1
3
10
575V AC
60 Hz
0.5
1.5
3
10
Cat. No.
24V DC
281E-F12Z-NA-R
281E-F12Z-NB-R
281E-F12Z-NC-R
281E-F23Z-ND-R
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
341
Appendix F Renewal Parts
Base Module Renewal Part Product Selection
Figure 114 - Bulletin 280E Base Module Renewal Part Catalog Structure
280 E
–
F N
–
10 – C
Bulletin Number
Bulletin 280 Starter
Communications
E EtherNet/IP
Enclosure Type
F Type 4 (IP67)
N Base Only
No Control Module
Line Connection
C Conduit Entrance
R ArmorConnect™ Power Media
Short Circuit Protection (Bul. 140M)
10 10 A Rated Device
25 25 A Rated Device
Current Rating
(A)
0.24…1.2
0.5…2.5
1.1…5.5
3.2…16
230V AC
50 Hz
0.18
0.37
1.1
4
kW
400V AC
50 Hz
0.37
0.75
2.2
7.5
Table 58 - Bulletin 280E Full Voltage Starters and Bulletin 281E Reversing Starters –
IP67/NEMA Type 4
Hp
200V AC
60 Hz
—
0.5
1
3
230V AC
60 Hz
—
0.5
1
5
460V AC
60 Hz
0.5
1
3
10
575V AC
60 Hz
0.5
1.5
3
10
Cat. No.
280E-FN-10-C
280E-FN-10-C
280E-FN-10-C
280E-FN-25-C
Current Rating
(A)
0.24…1.2
0.5…2.5
1.1…5.5
3.2…16
230V AC
50 Hz
0.18
0.37
1.1
4
kW
400V AC
50 Hz
0.37
0.75
2.2
7.5
Table 59 - Bulletin 280E Full Voltage Starters and Bulletin 281E Reversing Starters –
IP67/NEMA Type 4, with ArmorConnect Connectivity
Hp
200V AC
60 Hz
1
3
—
0.5
230V AC
60 Hz
1
5
—
0.5
460V AC
60 Hz
0.5
1
3
10
575V AC
60 Hz
0.5
1.5
3
10
Cat. No.
280E-FN-10-R
280E-FN-10-R
280E-FN-10-R
280E-FN-25-R
Description
Control Voltage Fuse
Output Fuse
Source Brake Fuse
Table 60 - Internal Fuses
Current Rating
7 A
2.5 A
3.0 A
Cat. No.
W25172-260-17
W25176-155-03
W25172-260-12
342
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Renewal Parts Appendix F
Motor Cable Cordsets
Motor Cable Cordsets,
High Flex
Motor Cable Patchcords
Description
Table 61 - Motor Cables
90° M22 Motor Cordset
90° M35 Motor Cordset
90° M22 Motor Cordset
90° Male/Straight Female M22
90° Male/Straight Female M35
Cable Rating
IP67/NEMA Type 4
IP67/NEMA Type 4
IP67/NEMA Type 4
IP67/NEMA Type 4
IP67/NEMA Type 4
6 (19.6)
8 (26.2)
10 (32.8)
14 (45.9)
20 (65.6)
1 (3.3)
3 (9.8)
1 (3.3)
3 (9.8)
Length m (ft)
3 (9.8)
6 (19.6)
10 (32.8)
14 (45.9)
20 (65.6)
3 (9.8)
6 (19.6)
10 (32.8)
14 (45.9)
20 (65.6)
3 (9.8)
280-MTRF22-M6
280-MTRF22-M8
280-MTRF22-M10
280-MTRF22-M14
280-MTRF22-M20
280-MTR22-M1D
280-MTR22-M3D
280-MTR35-M1D
280-MTR35-M3D
Cat. No.
280-MTR22-M3
280-MTR22-M6
280-MTR22-M10
280-MTR22-M14
280-MTR22-M20
280-MTR35-M3
280-MTR35-M6
280-MTR35-M10
280-MTR35-M14
280-MTR35-M20
280-MTRF22-M3
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
343
Appendix F Renewal Parts
Bulletin 284E
Control Module Renewal Part Product Selection
Figure 115 - Bulletin 284E Control Module Renewal Part Catalog Structure
284 E – F V D2P3 Z – N – R – Option 1 – Option 2
Bulletin
Number
Communications
E EtherNet/IP
– Option 3
Option 3
EMI EMI Filter
OC Output Contactor
Enclosure Type
F Type 4 (IP67)
Torque Performance Mode
V Sensorless Vector Control
Volts per Hz
Output Current
Control Module
N Control Module Only
Control Voltage
Z 24V DC
Option 2
DB DB Brake Connector
DB1 DB Brake Connector for
IP67 Dynamic Brake
Resistor
SB Source Brake Connector
Option 1
3 Hand-Off-Auto Selector
Keypad with Jog Function
Blank Status Only
Motor Media Type
R Round
Input Voltage
380…480V
50/60 Hz
3-Phase
kW
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.0
Hp
0.5
1.0
2.0
3.0
5.0
Table 62 - Bulletin 284E Control Module with
Sensorless Vector Control,
IP67/NEMA 4
24 V DC
Control Voltage
284E-FVD1P4Z-N-R
284E-FVD2P3Z-N-R
284E-FVD4P0Z-N -R
284E-FVD6P0Z-N-R
284E-FVD7P6Z-N-R
344
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
Bulletin
Number
Communications
E EtherNet/IP
Enclosure Type
F Type 4 (IP67)
Base
N Base Only — no starter
Base Module Renewal Part Product Selection
Figure 116 - Bulletin 284E Base Module Renewal Part Catalog Structure
284 E
–
F N
–
10
–
C
Renewal Parts Appendix F
Line Media
C Conduit
R ArmorConnect™ Power Media
Short-Circuit Protection
Bulletin 140 Current Rating (A)
10 10 A Rated Device
25 25 A Rated Device
Input Voltage
380…480V
50/60 Hz
3-Phase
380…480V
50/60 Hz
3-Phase
kW
0.4…2.2
3.0
0.4…2.2
3.0
Table 63 - Bulletin 284E Base Module Renewal
Part, IP67/NEMA 4, With Conduit Entrance
Hp
0.5…3.0
5.0
0.5…3.0
5.0
24 V DC
Control Voltage
280E-FN-10-C
280E-FN-25-C
280E-FN-10-R
280E-FN-25-R
Description
M22 Dynamic Brake Cable (DB Option)
Cable Rating
IP67/NEMA Type 4
Table 64 - Dynamic Brake Cable
Length m (ft)
3 (9.8)
Cat. No.
285-DBK22-M3
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
345
Appendix F Renewal Parts
346
Motor Cable Cordsets
Table 65 - Motor Cables
Description
Motor Cable Cordsets, High Flex
90° M22 Motor Cordset
Motor Cable Cordsets,
Shielded (VFD)
Extended Source/
Control Brake
Cable Cordsets
Extended Source/
Control Brake
Cable Cordsets, High Flex
90° M22 Motor Cordset
90° M35 Motor Cordset
90° M22 Motor Cordset
90° M25 Source Brake Cable
90° M25 Source Brake Cable
Cable Rating
IP67/NEMA Type 4
IP67/NEMA Type 4
IP67/NEMA Type 4
IP67/NEMA Type 4
IP67/NEMA Type 4
IP67/NEMA Type 4
Motor Cable Patchcords
90° Male/
Straight Female M22
90° Male/
Straight Female M35
90° Male/
Straight Female M22
IP67/NEMA Type 4
IP67/NEMA Type 4
IP67/NEMA Type 4
Motor Cable Patchcords
Shielded (VFD)
Internal Replacement Fan
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
6 (19.6)
8 (26.2)
10 (32.8)
14 (45.9)
20 (65.6)
3 (9.8)
6 (19.6)
14 (45.9)
6 (19.6)
14 (45.9)
3 (9.8)
Length m (ft)
3 (9.8)
6 (19.6)
10 (32.8)
14 (45.9)
20 (65.6)
3 (9.8)
6 (19.6)
10 (32.8)
14 (45.9)
20 (65.6)
3 (9.8)
6 (19.6)
10 (32.8)
14 (45.9)
20 (65.6)
1 (3.3)
3 (9.8)
1 (3.3)
3 (9.8)
1 (3.3)
3 (9.8)
280-MTRF22-M6
280-MTRF22-M8
280-MTRF22-M10
280-MTRF22-M14
280-MTRF22-M20
284-MTRS22-M3
284-MTRS22-M6
284-MTRS22-M14
285-BRC25-M6
285-BRC25-M14
285-BRCF25-M3
Cat. No.
280-MTRM22-M3
280-MTR22-M6
280-MTR22-M10
280-MTR22-M14
280-MTR22-M20
280-MTR35-M3
280-MTR35-M6
280-MTR35-M10
280-MTR35-M14
280-MTR35-M20
280-MTRF22-M3
285-BRCF25-M6
285-BRCF25-M10
285-BRCF25-M14
285-BRCF25-M20
280-MTR22-M1D
280-MTR22-M3D
280-MTR35-M1D
280-MTR35-M3D
284-MTRS22-M1D
284-MTRS22-M3D
284-FAN
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products.
At http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/ , you can find technical manuals, a knowledge base of FAQs, technical and application notes, sample code and links to software service packs, and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools.
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation, configuration, and troubleshooting, we offer TechConnect
SM support programs. For more information, contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative, or visit http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/ .
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation, review the information that is contained in this manual.
You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running.
United States or Canada 1.440.646.3434
Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/americas/phone_en.html
, or contact your local Rockwell
Automation representative.
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility.
However, if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned, follow these procedures.
United States
Outside United States
Contact your distributor. You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process.
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure.
Documentation Feedback
Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document, complete this form, publication RA-DU002 , available at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/ .
Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş., Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752 İçerenköy, İstanbul, Tel: +90 (216) 5698400
Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P – July 2012
348
Supersedes Publication 280E-UM001A-EN-P — January 2011
Copyright © 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.

Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated.
Advertisement
Key features
- EtherNet/IP™ communication
- Overload protection
- Embedded switch technology
- Rated for group motor installations
- Local logic using DeviceLogix™
- IP67/NEMA Type 4 environmental rating